Home

Educator User Guide

1. Enable to display results as phase Enable to display results as line graph If not enabled results display as bar graph 1st harmonic Choose a vertical scale linear logarithmic decibel or octave Multisim User Guide Enable to normalize graphs Normal ized graphs are normalized against the chart graph or chart an graph Choose a display option d 8 17 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 18 Fourier analysis produces a graph of Fourier voltage component magnitudes and optionally phase components versus frequency By default the magnitude plot is a bargraph but may be displayed as a line graph The analysis also calculates Total Harmonics Distortion THD as a percentage The THD is generated by notching out the fundamental frequency taking the square root of the sum of the squares of each of the n harmonics and then dividing this number by the magnitude of the notched out fundamental frequency 2 THD 2 _ V V x 100 where V is the magnitude of the i harmonics Setting Fourier Analysis Parameters for Normal Use For normal use you just need to specify parameters for the following frequency under test either by clicking Estimate to have a value selected based on the AC sources in the circuit or by entering a value in the Frequency under test field This value should be the lowest common factor for the frequencies present in the circuit number of harmonics b
2. parameter see 8 4 DC Operat Model tolerance list Analysis Setup Miscellaneous Options Summary ing Point Analysis on page 8 9 m Analysis Parameters 1 Analysis DC operating point v eitis Click to edit selected parameter Choose an output variable Ul Output variable ut open 1 z Change Fier Click to change the filter that affects Function MAX x mesada the list of possible output variables Direction pes Choose a function MAX MIN Restrict to range Alon p RISE_EDGE FALL_EDGE Choose a direction Default Lo De EOD or High 2 Enable to restrict the x axis range of the analysis being run Set X Den low default is 0 and X high default is 1 Click to group all traces on a sin gle plot a E functions only enter a value for the threshold voltage For DC circuits the worst case analysis generates a plot of the circuit s possible output volt ages ranging from the nominal specification value 1 on the x axis to the worst case value 2 on the x axis A list of the components and their worst case values appears in tabular form For AC circuits the worst case analysis generates separate plots for the nominal and worst case runs list of the components and their worst case values appears in tabular form Multisim User Guide 8 41 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 16 Pole Zero Analysis 8 16 1 About the Pole Zero Analysis 8 42
3. Cancel July Multisim User Guide 8 57 sos A euy Analyses Analyses El 3 Enable the Grid On option If desired change the grid pen size and color gt To apply a legend to a graph 1 2 Pe edhe ce Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it Click the Toggle Legend button To remove the legend click the button again or Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it Click the Properties button The Graph Properties screen appears Select the General tab Enable the Legend On option If desired change the labels of the traces using the Traces tab See 8 25 6 Traces on page 8 62 for details 8 25 2 Cursors When you activate the cursors two vertical cursors appear on the selected graph At the same time a window pops up displaying a list of data for one or all traces 8 58 Cursors e Analysis Graphs File Edit View Help Cio ha Jaca HAm 5 a vet Transient Analysis 6 testing DC operating point ea Transient Anal M SEES xi y1 Cursor data x2 y2 dx dy 1 dx 1 dy min x max x min y time max y The cursor data includes x1 y1 x y co ordinates for the left cursor x2 y2 x y co ordinates for the right cursor dx x axis delta between the two cursors dy y axis delta between the two cursors 1 dx reciprocal of the x axis delta 1 dy reciprocal of the y axis delta Electronics Workbench Working with Graphs min x min y x and y minima
4. 000 00 cee eee 7 9 Convergence Assistance Algorithms 0 ccc eee eee 7 9 Gmin Stepping 0 0 teenies 7 9 Source Stepping 00 0 eee 7 10 HE Simulation LA bU ter HP SES SE EP Ede te d Re PERS 7 10 VHDL Simulation s s 23e ran EC ir a abe 7 11 Verilog HDL Simulations mene eX uite ivi e deci Tur QE EM 7 11 Chapter 8 Analyses Aboutthis Chapter s mrami a ee 8 1 Introduction to Multisim Analyses 0 cee nn 8 1 Working with Analyses senei ira eSEE w eR m rn 8 2 General Instructions hh 8 2 The Analysis Parameters Tab ee 8 3 The Output Variables Tab 0 2 cette 8 3 Choosing How Output Variables are to be Handled 8 4 Multisim User Guide ix Filtering the Variable Lists llle 8 4 Adding Parameters to the Variable LiSt o ooooomoooomo o 8 5 The Miscellaneous Options Tab o oooococccocco nennen nenn 8 6 The SUMMARY Tab 50 Berne Qe RR ee 8 8 Incomplete Analyses 0 000 E O n 8 9 DC Operating Point Analysis 0 00 ccc eee 8 9 About the DC Operating Point Analysis llli 8 9 Setting DC Operating Point Analysis Parameters llli lesen 8 9 Troubleshooting DC Operating Point Analysis FailuresS o o o 8 10 AG Analysis a weg Phe ee Ran B EPOR dew Rd a 8 11 About the AC Analysis liliis nre 8 11 Setting AC Analysis Frequency Parameters 0000 cece ence e
5. 00 000 c eee tte 8 34 About the Temperature Sweep Analysis liliis 8 34 Electronics Workbench Setting Temperature Sweep Analysis Parameters 00000 0 eee euee 8 35 Transfer Function Analysis 00 0000 cece eee nenn 8 36 About the Transfer Function Analysis 0 000 eee 8 36 Setting Transfer Function Analysis Parameters 0020 0c eee eee 8 37 Worst Case AnalysiSs s exe rp wholes ae anal obe dade ER 8 38 About the Worst Case Analysis 00 0 eects 8 38 Setting Worst Case Analysis Parameters llli cee eee eee eee 8 41 Pole Zero Analysis vi ise a deed etd wine bees wiles cae REA Gone ae eee A oe A 8 42 About the Pole Zero AnNalySiS o oocoocccoocccor eee 8 42 About Circuit Stability 2l 8 43 About the Bode Phase Plot 0 00 eee tees 8 44 Setting Pole Zero Analysis Parameters 0000 cece eee tenes 8 45 Monte Carlo Analysis 2 22 000 tees 8 47 About the Monte Carlo Analysis llle 8 47 Setting Monte Carlo Analysis Parameters 0 0000 cece eee eee 8 50 HF Analyses x sad a rre e as VT gaint imo a e Pu D EG De d ee eG 8 50 Batched Analyses liso pee ra ru a ER ANI nee Nu rire rue 8 51 User Defined Analyses llis rh 8 52 Noise Figure Analysis 0 000 een nen een en 8 53 Viewing the Analysis Results Error Log Audit Trail 0 00000 cee eee 8 53 Viewing the Analysis Resul
6. 3 2 Selecting a Symbol Set iane n 0 000 ccc re 3 3 Selecting Components from the Database 0 000 cece eee eee 3 3 Placing Components Hu vod ere ique ma Yn oe Sed REINO be a POSUER heh 3 4 Choosing a Component and Using the Browser Screen iliis usu 3 4 Using the In Use List 2er cte meme ye ee en Roe aes 3 8 Moving a Placed Component 000 cece eee s 3 8 Copying a Placed Component 000 cece eee 3 8 Replacing a Placed Component 0 0000 cece 3 9 Controlling Component Color 0 000 cece eee 3 10 Wiring Components e este meg E aE a ce ER UP as 3 10 Wiring Components Automatically llle 3 11 Wiring Components Manually llssieseesi II 3 12 Combining Automatic and Manual Wiring 2 22 non sense nenn 3 13 Setting User Preferences for Wiring 2 3 13 Modifying the Wire Palt dreano y a EA R A RI III I 3 13 Controlling Wire Color aseainena pamant a ett a iA 3 14 Manually Adding a Junction Connector sasssa 0000 eee 3 14 Rotating Flipping Components aeaea asaan 3 15 Placed Component Properties unanunua 3 16 Displaying Identifying Information about a Placed Component 3 16 Viewing a Placed Component s Value Model 0000 cee eee eee 3 18 Controlling How a Placed Component is Used in AnalySesS 3 20 Finding Components in Your Circuit liliis 3 21 Labeling ee mestre Re ra
7. 0 000 c eee eee eee 4 21 4 3 1 Browsing for Components 0000 cece tees 4 21 4 3 2 Standard Searching for Components 00 0c eee eee eee 4 21 4 4 Types of Information Stored for Components 0000 cece eee eee 4 23 4 4 1 Pre Defined Fields illii 4 24 4 4 1 1 General Information 0c ccc eens 4 24 4 4 1 2 Common Parameters 00000 eee 4 25 4 4 1 3 Component Specific Data 0 00 0 4 26 4 5 Component Nominal Values and Tolerances llli eee eee ess 4 26 Multisim User Guide sjueuoduJoj5 Components Electronics Workbench Chapter 4 Components 4 1 4 2 1 About this Chapter This chapter introduces you to the underlying structure and organization of the Multisim com ponent database It also explains how to access the database for parts and how to search the database for information Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your version of Multi sim Such features have an icon in the column next to their description Structure of the Component Database The Multisim component database is designed to hold the information necessary to precisely describe any component It contains all the details needed for schematic capture symbols simulation models and PCB layout footprints as well as other electrical information The power of the Multisim database comes from its structure multiple levels well org
8. Analysis to be swept for DC Operating Point Transient Analy Monte Carlo Analysis sis AC Analysis To edit the Model tolerance list Analysis Setup Miscellaneous Options Summary parameters of AC or Transen aa Parameters Analysis click Edit Analysis nalysis Transient analysis y Edit Analysis Number of runs 1 Number of runs must be greater than or equal to 2 Output variable 1 Change Filter Function MAX bd Threshold B Choose output variable To change the filter that affects the list i i Xlow Io Xhigh of possible output variables click Hz us dE Text Output Change Filter and choose the desired filter node an 1 run s Choose a collating function MAX MIN RISE EDGE FALL EDGE Description Option to restrict the x axis range of the analysis being run Set X low default is 0 and X high default is 1 Enable to have all traces grouped on a single plot Choose from All Every List For RISE EDGE and First and None If you choose FALL EDGE functions only Every List or First set the num enter a value for threshold ber of runs for which this applies voltage Monte Carlo analysis produces the appropriate voltage curves sequentially The number of curves is equal to the number of runs you specified in the screen 8 18 RF Analyses E RF analyses Characterizer Noise Figure and Matching Networks analyses are performed K
9. Electronics Workbench DC and AC Sensitivity Analyses Component Sensitivity V unit D10 vj 2 1093e 012 D10 xti 5 2732e 013 D10_area 2 2575e 005 D10_temp 8 6695e 008 D11 af 3 9034e 013 D11 bv 1 4958 D11 eg 3 5165e 013 D11 fc 7 8067e 013 D11 ibv 1 5478 D11 is 954 04 D11 m 1 1722e 012 The AC small signal sensitivity is calculated if AC analysis is selected For AC sensitivity only the analysis measures the sensitivity of the voltage or current with respect to the param eters of the chosen component In the example the chosen component is BJT transistor Q18 The analysis calculates the AC sensitivity of the output voltage at node 12 with respect to all parameters of Q18 transistor Note The AC sensitivity analysis does not generate any data fails if resistors are chosen as components The transistors seem to be very unpredictable as well Multisim User Guide 8 29 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 11 3 Setting Sensitivity Analysis Parameters 8 30 Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and decide on an output voltage or cur rent For an output voltage choose nodes on either side of the circuit output For an output current choose a source Sensitivity Analysis Parameters are set in the following screen Sensitivity Analysis Analysis Parameters Output variables Miscellaneous Options Summary For Voltage only the
10. Electronics Workbench Introduction to the Design Bar 2 3 Y at E N Lo B E The component toolbar contains Parts Bin buttons that let you open component family tool bars which in turn contain buttons for each family of components in the Parts Bin as described in 3 5 1 Choosing a Component and Using the Browser Screen on page 3 4 The circuit window is where you build your circuit designs The database selector allows you to choose which database levels are to be visible as Com ponent toolbars as described in 4 2 1 Database Levels on page 4 1 The status line displays useful information about the current operation and a description of the item the cursor is currently pointing to Introduction to the Design Bar The Design Bar is a central component of Multisim allowing you easy access to the sophisti cated functions offered by the program The Design Bar guides you through the logical steps of building simulating analyzing and eventually exporting your design Although Design Bar functions are available from conventional menus this manual assumes you are taking advantage of the ease of use offered by the Design Bar The Component design button is selected by default since the first logical activity is to place components on the circuit window For details on the functions associated with this button see Chapter 4 Components The Component Editing button lets you modify the components i
11. Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 5 eoepelu Jasn User Interface User Interface gt Tocreate a custom color scheme 1 Choose Custom from the drop down list 2 Click on the color bar next to any items A Color selector screen appears 3 Click on the color you want to use for that item and click OK You are returned to the User Preferences screen The results of your choice appear in the preview box 4 Repeat until all your color settings are made To save your settings and close the screen click OK To cancel your settings click Can cel 2 4 3 Controlling Circuit Window Display Circuit window display options determine the appearance and behavior of the circuit window gt To set the default circuit window options for subsequent circuits choose Edit User Prefer ences and click the Workspace tab User Preferences x Circuit Workspace Preferences Print page setup Shows the results of enabling the options on the right r Show Enable those items you want by default to be shown IV Show grid IV Show page bounds V Show title block m Default sheet size Custom size 3 w Width Orientation Height C Portrait Landscape Set up the desired sheet sizes m Default zoom level m C 200 100 Port C 66 C 33 Set up the desired zoom level at which the component win dow appears gt To set the
12. Simulate Analyses Pole Zero Sets up and runs Pole Zero analysis which finds the poles and zeros in the small signal AC transfer function of a circuit For details see 8 16 Pole Zero Analysis on page 8 42 Electronics Workbench Menus and Commands Simulate Analyses Monte Carlo Sets up and runs Monte Carlo analysis a statistical analysis that lets you explore how chang ing component properties affects circuit performance For details see 8 17 Monte Carlo Analysis on page 8 47 Simulate Analyses Batched Analyses Sets up and runs batched analyses which let you set up a series of different analyses or differ ent variations on the same analysis to be performed on a circuit in sequence For details see 8 19 Batched Analyses on page 8 51 Simulate Analyses User Defined Analysis Sets up and runs a user defined analysis This command presents you with a screen into which you can type the SPICE commands to be executed to perform the analysis For details see 8 20 User Defined Analyses on page 8 52 Simulate Analyses Noise Figure Analysis This analysis is part of Multisim s RF Design module standard in the Power Professional ver sion optional in the Professional version and is described in Chapter 14 RF Simulate Analyses RF Analyses Included in the menu for the purposes of completeness Since RF analyses are available from the Network Analyzer instrument this command places the Network Analyzer for
13. Steps in source stepping algorithm analysis option see 8 29 Analysis Options on page 8 65 RF Simulation RF simulation is included with Multisim Power Professional and is available as part of the Professional Edition in an optional RF Design module This section is simply a brief introduc tion to the simulation portion of the RF Design module You simulate an RF circuit the same way you simulate a board system level circuit in Multi sim as described in 7 3 Using Multisim Simulation on page 7 3 This is because Multisim s RF Design module simulates RF circuits using an optimized SPICE engine as opposed to VHDL Verilog HDL etc There is no need to tell Multisim that your circuit is an RF circuit RF simulation uses the SPICE simulation engine but has been optimized to accurately simu late circuits designed to operate at higher frequencies or at faster clock speeds which gener ate RF characteristics This optimization uses parts specifically designed and modeled to simulate accurately at these higher frequencies For detailed information on RF simulation and the RF Design module see Chapter 14 RF Electronics Workbench VHDL Simulation 7 6 VHDL Simulation S Multisim employs a specialized VHDL simulator which simulates not at the SPICE level Z using schematic design entry but at the behavioral language level VHDL is one of the two most widely used behavioral languages commonly used for designing and modeli
14. e PLAs the original Programmable Logic Devices introduced just after the earlier simpler Programmable Array Logic CPLDs Complex PLDs e FPGAs Field Programmable Gate Arrays All such devices share a common characteristic they have standard blocks of digital logic and a means of interconnecting these blocks on the semiconductor This allows you to program the device to perform a particular function In spite of this common characteristic however each of these three broad classes of devices uses a different architecture for its logic blocks and the interconnections between them Describing these varying architectures that the device ven dors use for implementing blocks interconnects within the semiconductor wafers is beyond the scope of this chapter but is covered sufficiently in many text books on the subject Electronics Workbench Overview of HDLs within Multisim This chapter deals with CPLDs and FPGAs because simple PLDs are not often designed using VHDL or Verilog HDL Such simple PLDs are now less common and typically programmed with the older ABEL or CUPL languages not addressed in Multisim The following is a list of the key steps in designing with CPLDs and FPGAs creating writing source code in VHDL or Verilog HDL simulating analyzing the operation performance of that code e debugging the code to generate final source code e synthesizing the source code specific to a particular device vendor e fitting fo
15. Multisim provides a feature by which the name of the creator of each circuit is stored with that circuit This name is taken from the name entered at the time Multisim is installed Educators can take advantage of this feature to identify the student who for example created the circuit being submitted as the answer to an assignment provided that the student uses his her own copy of the program to create the circuit The name appears on the Circuit Restrictions screen which you can view as long as no passwords have been set see 13 4 2 Setting Cir cuit Restrictions on page 13 6 for more information 13 3 Assigning Faults to Components You may want to assign faults to components for instructional purposes such as troubleshoot ing exercises You can manually assign faults to individual components in a circuit or let Mul tisim randomly assign faults to various components across a circuit Multisim User Guide 13 1 epint s101e2np3 Educators Guide Educators Guide 13 3 1 Setting a Placed Component s Faults 13 2 You can assign a fault to any terminal of the placed component using the Faults tab of that component s properties screen gt To assign a fault to a placed component 1 Double click on the component The component s properties screen appears 2 Click the Faults tab RESISTOR x Shows the termi nals of the placed Label Display Value component SE Choose which 1 None type of f
16. gt Toremove a breakpoint click on an existing breakpoint in the scroll list then click Break point More than one breakpoint can be used Breakpoints affect both Cycle and Burst Multisim User Guide 6 31 sjuaun1su Instruments Instruments 6 15 3 Creating Saving and Reusing Word Patterns Click Pattern to display a set of options that allow you to save word patterns entered in the word generator to a file and load previously saved word patterns This function can also be used to generate useful patterns or to clear the display Changes all words to hex 0000 Opens previously saved pattem MA Clean buffer Open Saves current pattern as a file C Save Cancel Down Counter Creates pattern of subsequent word C shift Right increasing or decreasing by 1 C Shift len Set Initial Pattem Creates pattern such that the result ing binary words have a single 1 Prompts you to choose the initial value when shifted to the left or right you Click the Accept button 6 15 4 Addressing Changes the address of the initial word to be output iniii Displays the address of the word st 1 l selected in the scroll box urrent z d Displays the address of the current Initial ooo word being output Final 0000 Changes the address of the final word to be output Each word in the word generator s scroll window has an address expressed as a 4 character hexadecimal number When a word in the scroll box
17. skin effect explained below A conductor at low frequencies utilizes its entire cross sectional area as a transport medium for charge carriers As the frequency is increased an increased magnetic field at the center of the conductor presents an impedance to the charge carriers thus decreasing the current den sity at the center of the conductor and increasing it around its perimeter This effect is called the skin effect and occurs in all conductors including resistor leads capacitor leads and inductor leads As the frequency increases this effect is more pronounced Multisim User Guide 14 3 du RF RF 14 4 A simple wire connecting two nodes in high frequencies behaves as a transmission line The following figure shows the equivalent circuit of a transmission line There are four compo nents The capacitor is the result of an actual capacitance existing between the center of the conductor and the ground Between these two plates is the dielectric which is not perfect This leakage is modeled using conductance G and is given per unit length of line Also due to the resistance of the conductor itself we have a series resistance R Its value depends on the resistivity of the material used the length the cross section of the conductor and the skin effects Every transmission line has a resistance called its characteristic impedance Most micro wave systems have a characteristic impedance of 50 Ohm This value
18. 5 10 2 2 Symbol Editor Palette The Symbol Editor palette gives you quick access to the most common operations in the Sym bol Editor The following illustrations give information on the tools and their functions Use the rotate tool to select a symbol to rotate Use the select tool to choose a symbol cu To draw a rectangle To draw a circle or ellipse select the rectangle MOM select the ellipse tool click and tool click and drag to drag to draw the circle or draw the rectangle ellipse To draw a multi segment line select To draw a line select a NES the multi line tool click for each the ine 1601 cick and point of the line double click to drag to draw the line end To draw a polygon select the polygon tool click for each point of the poly gon double click to end To draw an arc select the arc tool click and drag to draw the arc Click the pin tool to add an input output pin to the symbol Select the text tool to enter text Click to start enter text click empty space to end Use the name tool to enter a symbol name SM Click to start enter name click empty space to end Use the part tool to enter a symbol part name Click to start enter part click empty space to end Reserved for future use Electronics Workbench 5 10 2 3 Working with the Symbol Editor The Symbol Editor is essentially a graphics editor with the usual range of tasks placi
19. cuit right click on the circuit window The window that appears allows you to set a different color scheme For more on color schemes see 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display on page 2 3 3 6 Wiring Components Once you have placed components on the circuit window you will want to wire them together All components have pins that you can use to wire them to other components or instruments You can choose to wire components either automatically or manually Automatic wiring a feature unique to Multisim means Multisim finds the path for wire placement for you and avoids wiring through other components or overlapping wires Manual wiring means you control the flow of the wire on the circuit window You can easily combine these methods for a single connection for example by starting with manual wiring and then switching to automatic 3 10 Electronics Workbench Wiring Components 3 6 1 Wiring Components Automatically To wire two components together automatically 1 Click on a pin from the first component to start the connection your pointer turns into a sign and drag A wire appears attached to your cursor 2 Click on a pin on the second component to finish the connection Multisim automatically places the wire which snaps to an appropriate configuration unless you have disabled the autowire on connection option as described in 3 6 4 Setting User Preferences for Wir ing on page 3 13 The wire is numbered as
20. must be greater than Start time Generate time steps automatically Set initial timestep Enable to enter the maxi Initial timestep TSTEP fs mum time step the simula tion can handle Enable to manually set time steps Description Enable to generate time steps automatically Enable to set a time interval for simulation output and graph ing 2 Enter settings as desired and click Accept or click Cancel to cancel These settings will be in effect the next time you run a simulation You can control many aspects of the simulation such as resetting error tolerances selecting simulation techniques and viewing the results The options you choose will determine the efficiency of the simulation See 8 29 Analysis Options on page 8 65 for details on the analysis options and their default values You set these options through the Miscellaneous Options tab by clicking Analysis Options Multisim User Guide 6 5 Sjueuuny su Instruments Instruments 6 5 Bode Plotter XBP1 Input terminals T Output terminals The Bode plotter produces a graph of a circuit s frequency response and is most useful for analyzing filter circuits The Bode plotter is used to measure a signal s voltage gain or phase shift When the Bode plotter is attached to a circuit a spectrum analysis is performed Magnitude or phase Bode Plotter XBP1 Vertical and horizontal axes Readouts Directional ar
21. ucts Symbol Symbol used to represent the compo au nent during schematic capture E ot 4 4 1 2 Common Parameters This is information specifying the parameters that are common to all components This infor mation can be searched using the basic search and appears on the Search screen Field Description Example Thermal Resistance The thermal resistance within the 0 00 Junction component watts or degrees centi grade Thermal Resistance Case The thermal resistance of the whole 0 00 case package watts or degrees centi grade Power Dissipation The power dissipation of the whole 0 08 component watts Derating Knee Point The point at which the component s 0 00 power starts being re rated degrees centigrade Min Operating Minimum operating temperature for 0 00 Temperature the component degrees centigrade Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 25 sjueuoduJo 5 Components Components Field Description Example Max Operating Maximum operating temperature for 0 70 Temperature the component degrees centigrade ESD Electrostatic discharge that the com 0 00 ponent can tolerate degrees centi grade 4 4 1 3 Component Specific Data This is important electrical information that is different for each type of component It is often needed in advanced searches For more details see the component s description in the corre sponding appendix 4 5 Component Nominal Val
22. 000 c eee eee 14 39 14 7 4Selecting the Biasing Network llli eee 14 39 14 7 4 1Selecting an Operating Frequency Point 14 41 14 7 4 2Analyzing the RF Network 0 000 e eee eee eee 14 41 Electronics Workbench Chapter 14 RF 14 4 Aboutthis Chapter KS This chapter describes the key capabilities included in the RF Design Module This module is part of the Multisim Power Professional product and is available as an optional add in to the Professional Edition This chapter contains descriptions of the elements components model makers instruments analyses of Multisim s RF Design module as well as a tutorial demonstrating their use and some specific examples of RF functionality 14 2 Introduction to the Multisim RF Module The Multisim RF module is intended to provide fundamental RF circuit design features needed by engineers to design analyze and simulate RF circuits The Multisim RF module is made up of the following e RF specific components including customized RF SPICE models model makers for creating your own RF models two RF specific instruments Spectrum Analyzer and Network Analyzer several RF specific analyses circuit characterizer matching network cells noise figure Elements of the RF Design module are fully integrated into Multisim That is the instruments analyses and components are installed in the same places and invoked in the same way as all other instrum
23. 1N1204C 1N1206C Detail Report Detail Report 1N3064 1N3208 User Fields Fields 1N3491 zi 3 This produces a screen that contains all the details about the selected component includ ing its schematic symbols manufacturer electrical parameters simulation model and foot print package For example Detail report Group Family ANSI ANSI wh E detkkekk e e e dd REA ARA RARAS COMPONENT x xxv xxx x kx n e d d x LED LED green Model Audit 10 15 98 jvt Manufacturer SED Package LED PACKAGE Thermal resistance la USO Thermal resistance case 0 00 Power dissipation 0 00 Print 4 Scroll through the information as necessary To print the information click Print You are prompted with a standard Windows print screen to choose a destination printer 6 To close the screen click OK Multisim User Guide 11 5 suodey Reports Reports 11 5 Instrument Maps The Instrument Maps show the faces of any or all of the instruments in your circuit Any sim ulation data for the circuit appears on the instrument map To produce a map of the instruments 1 Click the Reports button on the Design Bar and choose Instrument Maps from the pop up menu that appears 2 You are prompted to choose which of the possible instruments in your circuit to include in printing Print Instrument Maps Function Generator lt FG1 3 Click on any instrument to select deselect it
24. 74F158N 74F166AD 74F166AN 74F161AN 74F162AD 74F162AN 74F163AN 74F169D 74F169N 74F174N 74F175D 74F175N 74F182D 74F182N 74F196D 74F191D 74F191N 74F192D 74F193D 74F193N 74F194D 74F20D 74F26N 74F21D 74F240D 74F246N 74F241D 74F242D 74F242N 74F243D 4 Use any of the standard Notepad functions to search scroll file edit or print this informa tion 5 When done choose File Exit 11 4 Component Detail Report You can produce a Database Detail Report showing all the information stored in the Multisim database about a particular component Note Although this report appears in the pop up menu under the Reports Design Bar but ton when you choose Database Family List you are reminded that this report is accessed through the Browser screen only The Database Family List report is included in the Reports pop up menu only as a way of listing all available Multisim reports in one location 11 4 Electronics Workbench Component Detail Report gt To produce a database family list showing detailed information about a specific component 1 Access the database as described in 3 3 Setting up Your Circuit Window on page 3 1 to select a component Parts Bin and a family within that Parts Bin for example the 74STD of the TTL group 2 In the Browser screen select a specific component in the family and click Detail Report r Select Component Component List Manufacturer List Model Level List Find 1N1202C List Report
25. Component Editor Electronics Workbench Chapter 5 Component Editing 5 1 About this Chapter This chapter explains how to create edit copy or delete a component and how to manage the Multisim component database It also explains how to load into the Multisim database any models that you may have developed obtained or purchased and how to create simulation models using Multisim s Model Makers or code modelling EN Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your version of Multi A sim Such features have an icon in the column next to their description 5 2 Introduction to Component Editing You can modify any component stored in the Multisim component database See Chapter 4 Components for more information on this database For example an existing component might now be available in a new package originally pin through hole now surface mount You can easily copy the component information and change only the package details to create this new component You can also create your own component and place it into the database or load a component from another source Note Multisim s database stores extensive information about components Creating a com ponent depending on its use may require entering many details Where possible we recommend that you modify an existing similar component rather than to create one As described in Chapter 4 Components in the component database each compon
26. File NeW i iul bed beset dee rex ebore aa 2 11 2 6 1 2 File Opam 2 solae REI n XX Rd cR REOR PERS 2 11 2 6 1 3 File CloSes os asia a ICD ER MuR etu ENS 2 11 2 64 4 File SaV8 s s eI ERU tals ao RR REED RE 2 11 2 6 1 5 File Save AS ioco sse ena dade eed PA EGER Eth bid 2 12 2 641 6 File Print x5 asa Gene Cand a gaa bes chad DERE Dueb Abu 2 12 2 6 1 7 File Print Preview 2 0 00 cece 2 12 2 6 1 8 File Print Setup s ienei ne etai aaa aaa a eee 2 12 2 6 1 9 File Recent Files 0 00 c eee eee 2 13 2 84 10 File EXIt a ae ue p spe Kana AU ERG 2 13 2 6 2 EdIEMORDU veru A a RP ERG EE 2 13 2 6 2 1 Edit Place Component nsss saaana ea 2 13 2 6 8 2 Edit Place Junction o oooococccocco 2 13 2 6 2 3 Edit Place BUS c v dace ae ne AOL bata Poe ee A Damas 2 14 2 6 2 4 Edit Place Input Output 2 22n nennen eee 2 14 2 6 2 5 EdiVPlace Text oos tob dies Ree ev ata 2 14 Multisim User Guide eoeneju 1es 1 User Interface 2 6 3 2 6 4 2 6 2 6 Edit Urido i un is rto Re te P Mem Dag ter ae 2 14 2 062 7 EURO rv Rub AR okies Rer eee Ree 2 14 2 6 2 B Edil Gut rr te cak detach cot i ENERO Lid ms 2 14 2 6 2 9 Edit COPY s RERO ERR ea a ewes Madge nae a hs Men 2 14 2 6 20 Edil Pasle ol ane s vis oem a dde ke hee RSS 2 14 2 6 2 11 Edit Paste as Subcircuit Macro llle 2 14 2 62 12 Edil Del le vp o RR PX wh PEERS 2 15 2 6 2 13 Edit Replace Part 0 00 2
27. Multi sim master corporate library and user These database levels are discussed more thoroughly in Chapter 4 Components There are two methods of locating a component in this database e through either the component toolbars or Edit Place Component you can browse through all the component groups families as explained in 3 5 1 Choosing a Component and Using the Browser Screen on page 3 4 e by searching a specific component group family of the database as explained in Chapter 4 Components The first of these three choices is used most commonly The families of components you need to create a circuit are grouped into logical divisions each grouping represented by a Parts Bin a button on the Component toolbar This logical grouping is a key advantage of Multisim sav gt 8 ing you time and frustration You can toggle the Component toolbar on and off by clicking the Component button on the Design Bar Each Parts Bin button on the Component toolbar corresponds to group of components with similar functionality Placing your cursor over one of these buttons displays another toolbar the component family toolbar containing a button for each component family contained in that Parts Bin Note For a detailed look at the make up of the component Parts Bins see 4 2 3 Classifica tion of Components in the Database on page 4 3 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 3 elnideo oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic
28. Pole zero analysis finds the poles and zeros in the small signal AC transfer function of a cir cuit The analysis begins by calculating the DC operating point and determining the linearized small signal models for all nonlinear devices From the resulting circuit the analysis finds the poles and zeros of the transfer function Pole zero analysis is useful in determining the stability of electronic circuits When designing circuits it is important to know whether the output signal remains bounded or increases indef initely following the application of an input signal An unbounded output could damage or destroy the circuit therefore it is important to know if the circuit can accommodate the expected output before applying the input signal A circuit is said to have bounded input bounded output BIBO stability if any bounded input results in bounded output BIBO stabil ity can be determined by examining the poles of the transfer function of the circuit Your cir cuit should have poles with negative real parts otherwise it could have an unintentionally large and potentially damaging response to certain frequencies Transfer functions are a convenient way of expressing the behavior of analog circuits in the frequency domain A transfer function is ratio of the LaPlace Transform of the output signal to the LaPlace Transform of the input signal in a circuit The LaPlace Transform of the output signal is commonly referred to as Vs and the LaPlac
29. Triangular or Square wave button 6 7 2 Signal Options 6 7 2 1 Frequency 1Hz 999 MEGHz This setting determines the number of cycles per second the function generator generates 6 7 2 2 Duty Cycle 1 99 This setting determines the ratio of on period to off period It affects the shape of triangular and square waves as shown below A sine wave is not affected by the duty cycle setting 6 7 2 3 Amplitude O 999 kV This setting controls the signal s voltage measured from its DC level to its peak If the leads are connected to the common and either the positive or the negative terminal the wave s peak to peak measurement is twice its amplitude If the output comes from the positive and negative terminals the wave s peak to peak measurement is four times its amplitude 6 7 2 4 Offset 999 kV and 999 kV This option controls the DC level about which the alternating signal varies An offset of 0 positions the waveform along the oscilloscope s x axis provided its Y POS setting is O A positive value shifts the DC level upward while a negative value shifts it downward Offset uses the units set for Amplitude 6 7 3 Rise Time This option sets the time over which the square waveform is built and therefore the angle of the waveform Only available for square waveforms 6 12 Electronics Workbench Logic Converter 6 8 Logic Converter The logic converter is able to perform several transformations of a circ
30. XFG1 wa ru Positive terminal Negative terminal Common or neutral terminal The function generator is a voltage source that supplies sine triangular or square waves It provides a convenient and realistic way to supply stimulus signals to a circuit The waveform can be changed and its frequency amplitude duty cycle and DC offset can be controlled The function generator s frequency range is great enough to produce conventional AC as well as audio and radio frequency signals The function generator has three terminals through which waveforms can be applied to a cir cuit The common terminal provides a reference level for the signal Function Generator XFG1 E Wave Forms Choose one of the pos A e ee sible waveforms Signal Options Frequency J Hz Duty Cycle a Amplitude 10 v Offset o v Set Rise Fall Time Common e 5 gs Effect of signal option choices depend on waveform chosen gt To reference a signal from ground connect the common terminal to the ground component The positive terminal provides a waveform in the positive direction from the neutral com mon terminal The negative terminal provides a waveform in the negative direction Multisim User Guide 6 11 S USWNJ SuU Instruments Instruments 6 7 1 Waveform Selection You can select three different types of waveforms as the output gt To select the waveform click the Sine
31. gear integra method Default provides faster simula ZOIDAL tion method if unwanted tions with same numerical numerical oscillations accuracy but can produce occur during simulation or unintended results if circuit contains ideal Switches Use default if circuit operates in oscilla tion mode for example oscillator circuits Be aware that Gear integra tion may overdamp results TRYTOCOM Trycompaction Applicable only to lossy trans Off PACT for LTRA lines mission line component When option turned on Multisim tries to reduce data storage and memory usage needed for tran sient simulation of circuits con taining lossy transmission lines BADMOSS Use old mos3 model discon tinuous with respect to kappa KEEPOP Record operat Retains the operating point Particularly useful if the INFO ing point for information whether an AC circuit is large and you do each small sig Distortion or Pole Zero analy not want to run a redun nal analysis sis is run dant OP analysis NOOPALTER Do not do ana log event alter nation in DCOP RAMPTIME Transient anal Ramps independent sources 0 ysis supply capacitor and inductor initial ramping time conditions from zero to their final values during the time period specified MAXEVTI Maximum 0 TER event itera tions at analy sis point Multisim User Guide 8 69 sos A euy Analyses Analyses MAXOPAL Maximum ana 0 TER
32. see 3 13 Printing the Circuit on page 3 28 database see component list see instrument maps see 2 6 1 7 File Print Preview Previews the circuit as it will be printed Opens a separate window where you can move from page to page and zoom in for details You can also print what you preview For details see 3 13 Printing the Circuit on page 3 28 2 6 1 8 File Print Setup Changes the page setup for a selected printer Print Setup 2 x m Printer Name Lexmark Optra R plus Properties Status Ready Type Lexmark Optra R plus Where Outer lexmark_pel Comment Uses PCL driver m Paper Orientation Size Letter 8 x11in y C Portrait Source Upper Tray y Landscape Page Setup Cancel Electronics Workbench Menus and Commands 2 6 2 When you click Page Setup you can set the page characteristics for this printer Page Setup x Margins Zoom Options Top 03 a Bottom fo 3 a Measurement Units Left for Inches Right o 3 Centimeters Cancel These settings apply only to the current circuit For details on these fields see 2 4 5 Print Page Setup Tab on page 2 9 2 6 1 9 File Recent Files Displays a list of all recently opened circuit files To re open a file select it from the list 2 6 1 10 File Exit Closes all open circuit windows and exits Multisim If you have unsaved changes in any cir cuits
33. see 8 22 Viewing the Analysis Results Error Log Audit Trail on page 8 53 for more information For educational purposes you can choose which analyses will be available to students in a cir cuit See 13 4 Using Restrictions on page 13 3 for more information Multisim User Guide 8 1 s s jeuy Analyses Analyses 8 3 Working with Analyses You need to know how to work with analyses in general as well as the specific options for each individual analysis For each analysis you can set e the analysis parameters all have default values how output variables are to be handled required atitle for the analysis optional custom values for analysis options optional Analysis settings are saved with the circuit The next section describes the general procedures for performing analyses and the following sections describe the details of each particular analysis 8 3 1 General Instructions gt To perform an analysis 1 Click the Analyses button on the Design Bar or choose Simulate Analyses A menu zi appears with the list of analyses available 2 Select the desired analyses Depending on the analysis selected the screen that appears will include some or all of the following tabs the Analysis Parameters tab where you set the parameters for this analysis the Output Variables tab where you specify what is to be done with specific analysis output not present in all analyses the Miscellaneous Option
34. then click Print to print the selected instru ments 4 A standard print dialog appears Choose the desired print options and click OK 11 6 Electronics Workbench Chapter 12 Transfer Communication 12 1 12 2 12 8 12 4 Aboutthis Chapter page USE eR eee eat act FR E e Re RES 12 1 Introduction to Transfer Communication 2 222222 cece eee 12 1 Transterring Data cratere Rida aden MA EE Ee Mee a ee eels 12 1 12 3 1 Transferring from Multisim to Ultiboard for PCB Layout 12 1 12 3 2Transferring to Other PCB Layout 0000 c eee eee 12 2 Exporting Simulation Results ooooocooccooccoooo 12 3 12 4 1 Exporting to MathCAD 0 000 eee 12 3 12 4 2 Exporting to Excel us cis teer RR Rp Rr RE EE OR REO 12 3 Multisim User Guide Jejsued Transfer Electronics Workbench Chapter 12 Transfer Communication 12 1 12 3 12 3 1 About this Chapter This chapter explains how to use Multisim to transfer either circuit schematics themselves in whole or in part or the results of simulation Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your version of Multi sim Such features have an icon in the column next to their description Introduction to Transfer Communication Multisim makes it easy to transfer schematic and simulation data to other programs for further processing In a unique capability Multisim can even combine schematic information and s
35. 1 Aboutthis Chapter 0 0 0 0 00 ct tees 7 1 7 2 Introduction to Simulation 0 000 ee 7 1 7 2 1 What Type of Simulation Should Use oococcoccccccccnocoo 7 1 7 2 2 What Kind of Simulation Does Multisim Support 00005 7 2 7 8 Using Multisim Simulation 0 0 0 00 00 eee 7 3 7 3 1 Start Stop Pause Simulation 0 0000 eee 7 3 7 3 2 Interactive Simulation liliis 7 4 7 3 3 Circuit Consistency Check 00 00 ree 7 4 7 3 4 Miscellaneous SPICE Simulation Capabilities 7 4 7 3 4 1 Component Tolerances 0000 cece eee 7 4 7 3 4 2 Menu Driven Simulation from Netlist Without Schematic 7 5 7 4 Multisim SPICE Simulation Technical Detail llle 7 5 7 4 4 BSpice XSpice Support 20 0000 eese 7 5 7 4 2 Circuit Simulation Mechanism 0000 0 cece eee 7 6 7 4 3 Four Stages of Circuit Simulation 0 000000 cee 7 6 7 4 4 Equation Formulation slieleeeeeee eee 7 7 7 4 5 Equation Solution sec tesa wages as Bains Pie a ees En As 7 7 7 4 6 Numerical Integration 0 0 ee eae 7 8 7 4 7 User Setting Maximum Integration Order 00 0c eee eee 7 9 7 4 8 Convergence Assistance Algorithms 2 222 cece ee 7 9 7 4 8 1 Gmin Stepping nennen nennen ees 7 9 7 4 8 2 Source Stepping 0 0 0 eee 7 10 7 5 RF Simulation zc REG ee PX ea ei XX en
36. 12 1 transient analysis 8 13 trigger oscilloscope 6 27 triggering logic analyzer 6 18 word generator 6 33 truth table Multisim User Guide constructing 6 14 deriving from circuit 6 13 U Ultiboard transfer to 12 1 user interface about 2 2 customizing 2 4 design bar 2 3 elements 2 2 user preferences about 2 4 user defined analysis 8 52 using instruments 6 3 V value changing component 3 18 variables postprocessor 9 8 vertical Bode plotter settings 6 7 VHDL introduction to 10 4 simulation 7 11 View menu 2 17 virtual components 3 4 voltmeter multimeter measurement options 6 20 Ww wattmeter 6 29 waveguide model 14 27 Window menu 2 26 wire color 3 14 re shaping 3 13 wiring automatic 3 11 combining automatic and manual 3 13 manual 3 12 wiring components 3 10 wiring options 2 8 word generator 6 30 addressing 6 32 vii enabling data 6 33 entering words 6 31 setting clock frequency 6 33 triggering 6 33 using word patterns in 6 32 worst case analysis 8 38 X Xspice model 5 28 simulation 7 5 Z zoom level default 2 6 viii Electronics Workbench
37. 2 1 Introduction to the Multisim Interface lllllie IR 2 2 Introduction to the Design Bar III 2 8 Customizing the Interface ooooococcoooco hn 2 4 About User Preferences 0 0 00 cee e 2 4 Controlling Circuit Display 2 2 22 sonen nenn nenn 2 5 Controlling Circuit Window Display 2 2222 0000 nennen nennen nn nn 2 6 Setting Autosave Symbol Set Default Path and Wiring Options 2 8 Print Page Setup Tab 2 2 e O a n 2 9 Other Customization Options occccccccocccn a 2 9 System Toolbar Buttons 4 1 4 east eed kenn sa dwt ewes RATE seein 2 10 Menus and Commands 0c e een een een eee 2 11 File Menu ies eds RI ete oaths Fuere e ERE ea ae Pe ente er deere Barca tae 2 11 File NEWCtrl4n 2 rr 2 11 File OpenCtr O neia a on a a teens 2 11 El lOs E 2 11 File SaveCtr S 222m nen een eee 2 11 File Save AS U ote ele A IL Lote ans N pe oes 2 12 Ele Pri a vates Re A A RAE nee 2 12 File Print Preview oca a as a is add a Ln 2 12 File Print SetU as i aie a o aa e eee 2 12 File Recent Files n nunana 2 13 File EXIE i oer A e SR Ade Oa S a RR UE Rr let 2 13 Edit M nul osi a eue ies A Ken dare dA SUELE V ratus desert 2 13 Edit Place COMpoNeNt ooccocccccc ees 2 13 Edit Place Junction CtrltU 2 2 0 2 2c eres 2 13 Multisim User Guide i EdiUPlace BUS lot kee beth thd ee dat bue oh Wee hh ea ee 2 14 Edit Place Input Output o
38. 2 17 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 9 eoepelu 1es 1 User Interface User Interface 2 5 System Toolbar Buttons The system toolbar offers the following standard Windows functions Saves the active circuit Copies the selected elements Prints the active circuit and places them on the Win Launches the Multisim dows clipboard help file Creates a circuit N Dia fal B amp 2 ala Zooms in or out on the circuit increasing or decreasing the view ar Opens a circuit file Removes the selected ele Inserts the contents of the ments and places them onthe Windows clipboard at the Windows clipboard cursor location Electronics Workbench Menus and Commands 2 6 2 6 1 Menus and Commands This section explains in brief all available Multisim commands It is intended primarily as a reference File Menu Contains commands for managing circuit files created with Multisim 2 6 1 1 File New Ctrl N Opens an untitled circuit window that can be used to create a circuit The new window opens using your circuit preferences Until you save the circuit window is named Circuit where HP is a consecutive number For example you could have Circuit1 Circuit2 Circuit3 and so on You can create an unlimited number of circuits in one session Note Users of versions other than Professional or Power Professional can only have one cir cuit open at a time For these users
39. 24 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 21 eunjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 3 11 1 Modifying Component Labels Labels and for most components a reference ID are assigned by Multisim to a placed compo nent You can also assign this information using the Component Properties screen gt To assign a label and or reference ID to a placed component 1 Double click on the component The Component Properties screen appears 2 Click the Label tab Enter or modify the RESISTOR reference ID and or Value Faut label here 3 Enter or modify the label and or reference ID text which must be composed of letters or numbers only no special characters or spaces Note If you assign the same reference ID to more than one component Multisim warns you that this is not normally desirable cannot proceed with assigning the same reference ID to multiple components 4 To cancel your changes click Cancel To save your changes click OK 3 22 Electronics Workbench Labelling 3 11 2 Modifying Node Numbers Multisim automatically assigns a node number to each node in the circuit You can modify and move these labels gt To modify a node label 1 Double click on the wire The Node properties screen appears Node name fi Node name that appears on the circuit window Node s trace width as calculated by Multisim Trace width o Analysis I Use IC for Transient Analysis f
40. 277 KOhm and Rc 2KOhm Note that Vec 9V and the transistor is MRF927T1 2 Click the Analysis button on the Design Bar and choose DC Operating Point The DC Operating Point Analysis screen appears 3 Select the nodes representing the collector and base of the transistor 4 Click Plot during Simulation 5 Click Simulate The results will show a reading of Vc and Vb In the DC biasing network Vc is Vce and Vb is Vbe The first readings are Vce 3 33V and Vbe 0 8V You can modify the value of either Rc or Rb or both to achieve the desired DC operating point After a number of iterations you arrive at Rc 2KOhm and Rb 258KOhm Reading the values of Vce and Vbe for the final simulation you will note that Beta Ic Ib Rb Vcc Vce Rc Vcc Vbe 94 36 which is close to the initial value of Beta Electronics Workbench Tutorial Designing RF Circuits 14 7 4 1 Selecting an Operating Frequency Point The operating frequency point chosen depends on the type of application and is usually defined in the design specifications For this tutorial you can assume a single center fre quency analysis of 3 02 GHz 14 7 4 2 Analyzing the RF Network gt To perform the simulation 1 Connect the biased transistor to the network analyzer using two series capacitors These capacitors are used to isolate the network analyzer from the biasing network in DC mode This step is necessary whenever the biasing network is important that is
41. 5 Change any of the trace s characteristics using the following fields Field Use Trace Specifies the trace whose properties are being affected Label Specifies a label for the trace Appears in legend Pen Size Controls the thickness of the trace 8 62 Electronics Workbench Viewing Charts Field Use Color Controls the color of the trace The Sample box shows a preview Bottom Axis Top Axis Controls the X range of the trace Left Axis Right Axis Controls the Y range of the trace X Offset Y Offset Value to offset the trace from its original coordinates 8 26 Viewing Charts To help you examine and organize a chart you can sort rows adjust column widths change precision and add a title gt To sort a row of data click the column name button of the column you want to sort by Sorting order is from low to high for numbers otherwise it is alphabetical gt To adjust the width of a column click and drag the left edge of the column name button Tochange the chart s column precision number of significant digits or title 1 2 Click the Properties button The Chart Properties screen appears 3 4 To change a column s precision select a column number and a precision number of sig Select a chart by clicking anywhere on it To change the chart title type a new title To change the font click the Font button nificant digits Precision only affects columns that contain
42. 6 13 Simulate Instruments Distortion Analyzer Places a distortion analyzer on the circuit window A typical distortion analyzer provides dis tortion measurements for audio signals in the range of 20 Hz to 100 KHz For details see 6 6 Distortion Analyzer on page 6 9 Simulate Instruments Spectrum Analyzer Places a spectrum analyzer on the circuit window The spectrum analyzer is used to measure frequency versus amplitude For details see 6 13 Spectrum Analyzer on page 6 28 Electronics Workbench Menus and Commands Simulate Instruments Network Analyzer Places a network analyzer on the circuit window The network analyzer is used to measure the scattering parameters or S parameters of a circuit commonly used to characterize a circuit intended to operate at higher frequencies For details see 6 11 Network Analyzer on page 6 23 2 6 4 5 Simulate Analyses Contains commands you use to set up and run the circuit s analysis an alternative to using the Design Bar For details on these analyses see Chapter 8 Analyses Simulate Analyses DC Operating Point Sets up and runs DC operating point analysis which determines the DC operating point of a circuit For details see 8 4 DC Operating Point Analysis on page 8 9 Simulate Analyses AC Analysis Sets up and runs AC analysis in which the DC operating point is first calculated to obtain lin ear small signal models for all nonlinear components Then a c
43. 6 19 Measurement Options 2 22 2 nee nennen nennen 6 19 AMM y A el AS a EN RR Rc Dee 6 20 Multisim User Guide vii Voltmeter oink tind He Ware ade hte he x ut E bn d 6 20 Ohr tmeter o uu ime dudes Beet f ree pee x ar edu sies aris 6 21 DEGBE a roa e ees edo estet us du ewe dg 6 21 Signal Mode AC or DC 22 nennen rn 6 22 Internal Settifigs course ve 520 gave bu daa 6 22 Network ANalyZeFT o ocoooccoc ehm rr 6 23 Oscilloscope s eter E t Re C ex tea Sur e ie 6 24 Time Base 0 1 ns Div 1S Div 0 0 0 0 000 eee 6 25 X Position 5 00 5 00 as eiia daa ee nen 6 25 Axes Y T A B and BIA i206 er A RE aee ana 6 25 GOUGING orto Fhe 22 Ze a etu oed Ue en doa ege we arius ula 6 25 Channel A and Channel B Settings 0 0000 cece eee 6 26 Volts per Division 010m V Div 5 kV Div llle 6 26 Y Position 3 00 3 00 4 c 2 2 ea ee ann 6 26 Input Coupling AC 0 and DC 2 2 2 0 0c ce 6 26 Trigger i ord ete a Ete Soe Pe de ee ee oe Bevo ds 6 27 TriggerEdge AAN A BAN rts Es 6 27 Trigger Level 999kV 999 KV eee 6 27 Trigger Signal true sche ae Marie rye E dom a RR E a fuso 6 27 Using Cursors and ReadoutS 000s 6 28 SPECHUM Analyzer zd eee sc end wee sews ease dee tete pars 6 28 Wattrmieter x cese dence A Eee fea Te EU Et ced ORT UT ENDE A 6 29 Word Generator 6 30 Entering Words s an pee Bae en POM ed es Ok ag MORE 6 31 Control ridad
44. Analyzer lisse rn 14 15 14 4 2 1About the Network Analyzer liliis 14 15 14 4 2 2Using the Network Analyzer 2 0 000 e ee eee ee 14 16 14 4 2 3Marker Controls 0 0 2 0 0c ec eae 14 17 14 4 2 4Trace Controls 0 0 0 tee 14 17 14 4 2 5Format Controls liliis 14 17 14 4 2 6Data Controls 0 0 0 cee 14 18 14 4 2 7Mode Controls 1 0 0 0 0c ee 14 18 Multisim User Guide du RF 14 5 14 6 14 7 HF Analyses nn erp ONG aeree PS A 14 18 14 5 4 RF Characterizer Analysis llle 14 18 14 5 2Matching Network Analysis l l 14 20 14 5 3Noise Figure Analysis llle 14 25 14 5 3 1Noise Figure Analysis Tabs 0 0 0 cee eee 14 26 RE Model Makers sus re Sa be gad Clee dae SE 14 27 14 6 1 Waveguides 5 3 5 ra teeth e use plan PEE PANE ER mela Au 14 27 14 6 2 Microstrip Line urs rl tte terrent some ease 14 28 14 6 3Open End Microstrip Line 0 00 0 ee 14 29 14 6 4RF Spiral Inductor 0 0 0 0 00a 14 31 14 6 5Strip Line Model ooooccoccccccocc nennen 14 32 14 6 6Stripline Bend iiss gi m oened atia iu AE nenn 14 33 14 6 7 Eossy LElhe s a e bu O oes Bee need 14 34 14 6 8Interdigital Capacitor sanaaa aaea 14 36 Tutorial Designing RF Circuits llle 14 37 14 7 1 Selecting Type of RF Amplifier liliis 14 38 14 7 2Selecting an RF Transistor 00 nennen 14 38 14 7 3Selecting a DC operating Point
45. Attenuation Coaxial High Temperature MIL C 17 Cable 26 AWG stranded silver coated copper coated steel SCCCS conductor with TFE Teflon insulation Silver coated copper braid 96 coverage White TFE Teflon tape jacket MIL C 17D Temperature Rating 200 C Suggested Operating Temperature Range Non UL 70 C to 200 C Maximum Operating Voltage Non UL 900 Volts RMS Passes WWW 1 Vertical Wire Flame Test For cables manufactured to the latest government revision of other MIL SPEC requirements please contact your nearest Belden B Regional Sales Office Spools may contain more than one piece Lengths may vary 10 from length shown Nom Atten Nom Atten Freq Nom Atten Nom Atten dB 100f9 dB 100m MHz dB 100ft dB 100m somo 720 si Nominal atten uation higher fre quency bound lt Lossy Line Model ossy Line Model Multisim User Guide 14 35 du RF RF 14 6 8 Interdigital Capacitor For Interdigital Capacitor models enter values in the two tabs shown below Use the following diagram for assistance in identifying the values Number of fingers 7 Finger length Finger width m di Space between fingers Finger end gap Relative dielectric constant e 14 36 Electronics Workbench Tutorial Designing RF Circuits lt Interdigital Capacitor Model gt lt Interdigital Capacitor Model gt 14
46. Baan D RS 2 19 Simulate Menu 55 3 rs UE e ER doe RR bat eo I RNC Re 2 19 2 6 4 1 Simulate Run Stop oococcoccccco 2 19 2 6 4 Simulate Pause Resume 00 eee 2 19 2 6 4 3 Simulate Default Instrument Settings 2 19 2 6 4 4 Simulate InstruMentS o ooooooooooo ooo 2 19 2 6 4 5 Simulate AnalySES o ooooocccconc eres 2 21 2 6 4 6 Simulate Postprocess 000 cee eee 2 23 2 6 4 7 Simulate VHDL Simulation oooooooooooooooo 2 23 2 6 4 8 Simulate Verilog HDL Simulation 00 0005 2 24 Electronics Workbench 2 6 4 9 Simulate Auto Fault Option liliis 2 24 2 6 4 10 Simulate Global Component Tolerances 2 24 2 6 5 Transfer Menu errore 3 4 ck re kx etd Remo ER 2 24 2 6 5 1 Transfer Transfer to Ultiboard o o oooooocooooomooo 2 24 2 6 5 2 Transfer Transfer to other PCB Layout 4 2 24 2 6 5 3 Transfer Backannotate from Ultiboard 2 24 2 6 5 4 Transfer VHDL Synthesis 000 cee eee eee 2 25 2 6 5 5 Transfer Verilog HDL Synthesis 00 cae eee 2 25 2 6 5 6 Transfer Export Simulation Results to MathCAD 2 25 2 6 5 7 Transfer Export Simulation Results to Excel 2 25 2 6 5 8 Transfer Export Netlist llle 2 25 2 6 6 Tools MENU oor AA Sheek Seth reae ann xA 2 25 2 6 6 1 Tools Create Component 000 02 cee eee ee eee 2 2
47. Capture For example Placing the cursor on this component toolbar Parts Bin button reveals this compo nent family toolbar Electronics Workbench provides the unique concept of virtual components in Multisim Vir tual components are not real that is cannot be purchased and have no footprint They are included for simulation flexibility Virtual components appear by default in a different color from other components on the circuit window You control the color as described in 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display on page 2 5 3 5 Placing Components 3 5 1 Choosing a Component and Using the Browser Screen E By default the Component Design Bar button is enabled and one or more Component tool 8 bars are visible If no toolbar is visible click the Component button on the Design Bar gt To choose and place a component 1 On the desired Component toolbar place the cursor on the desired Parts Bin The associ ated component family toolbar appears 3 4 Electronics Workbench Placing Components 2 From the component family toolbar click the button for the desired component family If the selected component family has only a single component you can simply place the component For other components a Browser screen appears Alternatively you can dis play the Browser screen by choosing Edit Place Component 3 From the Browser screen select the desired component from the Component List Infor matio
48. Fields on page 13 8 Multisim User Guide 11 1 suoday Reports Reports gt To create a BOM for your circuit 1 Click the Reports button on the Design Bar and choose Bill of Materials from the pop up menu that appears 2 The report appears looking similar to this Bill Of Materials View af alm am Description Reference_ID E LED LED red LED1 CAPACITOR 330nF cl RESISTOR 10kohm R3 RESISTOR l20ohm RZ RESISTOR 4700hm Rl BJT NPN 2N2222 Q2 Ql gt To print the Bill of Materials click the Print button A standard Windows print screen appears allowing you to choose the printer number of copies and so on Tosave the Bill of Materials to a file click the Save button A standard Windows file save screen appears allowing you to specify the path and file name Because the Bill of Materials is primarily intended to assist in procurement and manufactur ing it includes only real parts That is it excludes parts that are not real or able to be pur chased such as sources or virtual components gt To see a list of components in your circuit that are not real components click the Others button A separate window appears showing these components only 11 2 Electronics Workbench Database Family List 11 3 Database Family List You can produce a Database Family List showing all the components in a family Note Although this report appears in the pop up menu under the Reports Desig
49. RR ERE XS 6 27 6 12 4 2 Trigger Level 999kV 999 KV eee ee 6 27 6 12 4 3 Trigger Signal ion eein a E tee 6 27 6 12 5Using Cursors and Readouts naasen aaaea 6 28 Spectrum Analyzer 0 0 he 6 28 Wattmeter x ea ee nee etr eo Eutr doge M RERO ke a etes 6 29 Word Generator auauna auauna een 6 30 6 15 1Entering Words ss se a D E a E e E n 6 31 0 15 2 Controls nn Loose LM CILE LEE LEE STIS 6 31 6 15 3Creating Saving and Reusing Word PatternsS o o ooooo 6 32 6 15 4Addressirng teet bre tene re dae Ar Rt Toni 6 32 6 15 5 Triggering cents entem ore munere eee m ARS eek ne 6 33 6 15 6Frequency and Data Ready 0 cece te eee 6 33 Ammeter and Voltmeter 0 000 tee tees 6 33 Electronics Workbench Chapter 6 Instruments 6 1 About this Chapter This chapter explains how to use the various virtual instruments provided as part of Multisim It explains both the general procedures for attaching and configuring the instruments and the specific steps in using each instrument Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your version of Multi sim Such features have an icon in the column next to their description Introduction to the Multisim Instruments Multisim provides a number of virtual instruments You use these instruments to measure the behavior of your circuits These instruments are set used and read just like their real world equival
50. The cursor changes to indicate a node is ready to be placed 2 Click at the location where you want the input output node placed The connecting node is placed on your circuit window You can wire it into your circuit as with any other components The connecting node is wired 0 vas into the circuit I li 3 12 3 Adding Subcircuits to a Circuit gt To add a subcircuit to a circuit 1 Copy or cut the desired circuit file or portion of a circuit file to the clipboard 2 Choose Edit Paste as Subcircuit Macro You are prompted for a new name for the sub circuit Your cursor changes to a ghost image of the subcircuit indicating a subcircuit is ready to be placed 3 Click on the location in the circuit where you want the subcircuit placed you can move it later if necessary 4 The subcircuit appears in the desired location on the circuit window as an icon with the subcircuit name inside it The subcircuit name appears with your other components in the In Use list The subcircuit icon can be manipulated as with any other components For example you can right click on the icon and rotate it or set its color You can also connect wires from the original circuit to any appropriate location in the subcircuit that is where potential input output connections are available as shown earlier in this section Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 27 eunjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 3 13 3 28 To
51. a PCB layout package produced by a vendor other than Electronics Work bench you can create files in the necessary formats for transfer to the following third party layout packages Eagle Lay e OrCAD e Protel Tango e PCAD gt To transfer the circuit design to a third party layout package e 1 Click the Transfer button on the Design Bar 2 From the menu that appears choose Transfer to Other PCB Layout A standard file browser appears 3 Navigate to the desired folder enter a file name and choose the desired manufacturer from the drop down list Multisim creates a file of the appropriate format that can then be loaded into the layout package of your choice 12 2 Electronics Workbench Exporting Simulation Results 12 4 Exporting Simulation Results 12 4 4 Exporting to MathCAD You can export the results of your simulation to MathCAD allowing you to perform sophisti cated mathematical operations on your data Note This function is only available if you have MathCAD installed on your computer gt To export the simulation results to a MathCAD session 1 Click the Transfer button on the Design Bar 2 From the list that appears choose Export Simulation Results to MathCAD A prompt screen appears asking you to confirm that you want to open the Grapher and continue with the export process 3 Click OK The Grapher appears showing the results of your simulation and or analysis 4 Use the Grapher to def
52. a Siete aded qute ex es Aun e ER HMM eal ea 6 31 Creating Saving and Reusing Word Patterns llli lille 6 32 Addressirig c ted ee pest env eb tavoli d eaa edt ER SW 6 32 Iriggering eet eem pa be eae en Sot t Woe te ate RR qn 6 33 Frequency and Data Ready 2 cece ees 6 33 Ammeter and Voltmeter 0 0 2 0 cent eee 6 33 Chapter 7 Simulation About this Chapter osi aa Hamas I EI 7 1 viii Electronics Workbench Introduction to Simulation 2n sense nennen eer 7 1 What Type of Simulation Should Use 2 unsern nennen nn 7 1 What Kind of Simulation Does Multisim Support 2 222220 aaaea 7 2 Using Multisim Simulation lille eh 7 8 Start Stop Pause Simulation n nanana eee 7 3 Interactive Simulation iliis 7 4 Circuit Consistency Check lisi ne 7 4 Miscellaneous SPICE Simulation Capabilities o ooooooooooo 7 4 Component Tolerances 222m ce eects 7 4 Menu Driven Simulation from Netlist Without Schematic 7 5 Multisim SPICE Simulation Technical Detail llli 7 5 BSpice XSpice Support aeaaaee 7 5 Circuit Simulation Mechanism 0 000 cee ee 7 6 Four Stages of Circuit Simulation illie 7 6 Equation Formulation e aeae A a E RR n 7 7 Equation Solution s iie aui e a ea teeta 7 7 Numerical Integration 0 0 eee eae 7 8 User Setting Maximum Integration Order
53. about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 15 sjueuodujoj5 Components Components 4 16 4 2 3 10 Mixed Chips Toolbar ANSI ADC DAC Mixed Mul ES Analog switch DAC Timer A E Monostable PLL DIN ADC_DAC Mixed Mul ES Analog switch ee Timer Doce EJ Monostable PLL Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Electronics Workbench Structure of the Component Database 4 2 3 11 Indicators Toolbar ANSI Voltmeter Probe Hex display Buzzer A Bargraph DIN Indicators F3 Voltmeter Ammeter Probe Lamp Hex display Buzzer Bargraph Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 17 sjueuodujoj5 Components Components 4 18 4 2 3 12 Miscellaneous Toolbar ANSI Motor Crystal MENTES ad Voltage reference Vacuum tube Voltage regulator Voltage suppressor Boost converter Buck boost converter 77 Fuse ER Far Lossy transmission line Lossless line type1 FI ES isst Net DIN Crystal Motor is El Voltage usns E Voltage suppressor Vacuum tube Voltage regulator Boost conv
54. active compo nents add shot or flicker noise A measure of this signal noise degradation is given by the noise figure S N So No where S N is the input signal to noise ratio and S N is the output signal to noise ratio Multisim calculates the noise figure using the equation r 20 GN where N is the output noise power which includes the noise due to two part network and the magnified input noise N is the thermal noise of the source resistor this resistor generates noise equal to the output noise of the previous stage and G is the AC gain of the circuit the ratio of the output signal to the input signal of the two part network Note that the bandwidth of the signal has been considered in source resistor Finally Multisim prints the Noise Figure in dB that is 10 logyg P Multisim User Guide 14 25 du RF RF 14 26 14 5 3 1 Noise Figure Analysis Tabs Just as for other Multisim analyses you need to fill in the appropriate fields from the Analysis Parameters tab Analysis parameters are shown below Noise Figure Analysis Choose an input source Enter temperature in degrees Kelvin Setting Noise Figure Analysis Parameters for Normal Use For normal use you only need to select an input source from the Input noise reference source drop down list select an output node from the Output node drop down list select a reference node from the Reference node drop down list enter a
55. and simulation When you start simulation the network analyzer automatically executes two AC analyses The first AC analysis is applied at the input port to compute the forward parameters S11 and S21 The second analysis is applied at the output port to compute the reverse parameters S22 and S12 After the S parameters are determined you can use the network analyzer to view the data in many ways and perform further analyses based on the data Select an appropriate representa tion for the data Network analyzer XNA1 x n 7 Marker Marker and cir cuit information 1 0000 j 0 0064 Show or hide individual Parameter Smith R Polar Re lm Seale Auto Scale Set up Mode Measurement W Set up Chart display Select a mode of operation The display of the network analyzer is divided into two regions traces Select a differ ent set of parameters to be displayed on the chart Work with net work analyzer data The left region contains a chart display area and a text display area that shows marker and circuit information e The right region contains the controls for the network analyzer 14 16 Electronics Workbench RF Instruments 14 4 2 3 Marker Controls Select from the Marker drop down list how you want data represented e Real Imaginary e Magnitude Phase dB Magnitude Phase Use the scroll bar below the list to step through each dat
56. are the same as for the parameter sweep For details see 8 12 2 Setting Parameter Sweep Analysis Parameters on page 8 31 Temperature sweep analysis plots the appropriate curves sequentially The number of curves is dependent on the type of sweep as shown below Type of Sweep Curves Linear The number of curves is equal to the difference between the start and end values divided by the increment step size Decade The number of curves is equal to the number of times the start value can be multiplied by ten before reaching the end value Octave The number of curves is equal to the number of times the start value can be doubled before reaching the end value Setting Temperature Sweep Analysis Parameters for Normal Use You can use the Analysis Parameters tab to define the temperature values to be swept and the type of analysis to be run at the various swept temperatures You can also edit the analysis The Sweep Parameter field is set to Temperature by default and the default setting for the Sweep Variation Type is List You need only enter the desired list of temperatures to sweep and the type of analysis to be performed gt To specify the list of temperatures and the analysis 1 Enter the list of temperatures separated by a space in the Values field 2 Choose the analysis to be performed by choosing from the Analysis to sweep drop down list 3 Click Edit Analysis to specify the Analysis Parameters Note If
57. be greater than zero and less than one Note Fl is swept according to the values specified as the start and stop frequencies for the analysis F2 is kept at a single frequency as F1 sweeps The value of F2 is determined by multiplying the F2 F1 ratio by the start frequency FSTART specified Note Click Reset to Default to reset all parameters on the Analysis Parameters tab to their default values DC Sweep Analysis The DC sweep analysis computes the DC operating point of a node in the circuit for various values of one or two DC sources in the circuit Using a DC sweep analysis you can quickly verify the DC operating point of your circuit by simulating it across a range of values for one or two DC voltage or current sources The effect Multisim User Guide 8 25 sos A euy Analyses Analyses is the same as simulating the circuit several times once for each different value or pair of val ues You control the source values by choosing start stop and increment values in the Analy sis Parameters tab of the DC Sweep screen Assumptions Digital components are treated as large resistances to ground 8 10 1 Setting DC Sweep Analysis Parameters Before setting analysis parameters review your circuit and decide on one or two DC sources to sweep and a node for analysis DC sweep analysis plots the appropriate curves sequentially If only one source is being swept a curve of the output node value versus source value is traced If
58. bers ranging from 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 0 to 4 294 967 265 in decimal Each horizontal row represents a binary 32 bit word When the word generator is activated a row of bits is sent in parallel to the corresponding terminals at the bottom of the instrument gt To change a bit value in the word generator select the number you want to modify and type the new value in the Hex ASCII or Binary fields using the appropriate number format As the words are transmitted by the word generator the value of each bit appears in the circles representing the output terminals at the bottom of the instrument 6 15 2 Controls Sends a continuous stream of words Sends all the words from the initial to the final address in a stream Sends one word at a time Pauses the stream of input at selected words Uses or creates saved pattern gt To inject the 32 bit words into a circuit click Step Burst or Cycle The current word appears in the box labeled Current To transmit one word at a time into the circuit click Step gt To send all words in sequence click Burst Clicking Cycle sends a continuous stream of words that can be stopped by clicking Cycle again or by pressing CTRL T Use Breakpoint when you want to pause and restart the stream of words at a specified word gt To insert a breakpoint select the word in the scroll list where you want the input to stop then click Breakpoint An asterisk marks a breakpoint in the scroll list
59. can set two options Autowire on connection and Autowire on move Enabling Autowire on connection ensures that Multisim will choose the most efficient path to wire the selected components together Disabling this option gives you more con trol over the wire path as Multisim follows the exact path of your cursor Enabling Autowire on move ensures that when you move a wire component Multisim reshapes the wire to the most efficient path Disabling this option means that the wires will move exactly in the shape and direction that you move a wired component 3 6 5 Modifying the Wire Path gt To alter the shape of the path once it is placed 1 Click on the wire A number of drag points appear on the wire c1 vi R uoc 7 1 0F 1 0kohm Drag points Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 13 eunjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 2 Click any of these and drag to modify the shape Or Move your cursor anywhere on the wire When your cursor changes to a double arrow click and drag in the direction of the arrows to modify the shape You can add or remove drag points to give you even more control over the wire shape gt To add or remove drag points press CTRL and click on the wire at the location where you want the drag point added or removed 3 6 6 Controlling Wire Color 3 7 3 14 The default color used for wires is controlled by your user preferences as described in 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit D
60. capacitor at high frequencies There is always a series resistance which prevents the coil from resonating The ratio of an inductor s reactance 14 6 Electronics Workbench Components to its series resistance is often used as a measure of the quality of the inductor The larger the ratio the better the inductor is 14 3 3 5 Active Devices In low frequencies active devices are modeled using a number of ideal components such as resistors and capacitors In high frequencies each of these ideal components should be replaced by its equivalent as discussed earlier For example a resistor should be replaced by a resistor in series with an inductor Some simplifications would reduce redundant components Multisim User Guide 14 7 du RF RF Two inductors in series for example can be replaced by one inductor A typical equivalent circuit of RF transistor is shown in the following figures Lp Tbb Cpc Lc lp e H B TO T ANL C Cpe C The cutoff frequency f can be derived from the equivalent circuit and is inversely propor tional to the transit time T Em 1 Vs le In Am 2nL 4 14 8 Electronics Workbench RF Instruments 14 4 where L is the effective length of the gate and v is the saturation velocity that electrons travel Active components included in Multisim are RF BJT NPN RF BJT PNP RF MOS 3TDN and tunnel diode See Appendix M RF Components for in
61. chip modeled with VHDL or Verilog HDL including a programmable logic device Multisim automatically simulates that device with the correct VHDL or Verilog HDL simulator This process is invoked automatically during simulation of the PCB level circuit is performed simultaneously with the SPICE simulation and is transparent to you To view the results of your simulation you will need to use either a virtual instrument or be running an analysis explained in the next chapter in order to display the simulation output This output will include the combined results of all Multisim simulation engines SPICE VHDL Verilog HDL all brought together conveniently in common displays instruments or Grapher Note For design entry simulation and source code debugging of individual VHDL or Ver ilog HDL modelled chips on their own not as part of a PCB circuit likely as part of the programmable logic design flow see 7 6 VHDL Simulation on page 7 11 and 7 1 Verilog HDL Simulation on page 7 11 for an introduction For details see Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic which explains designing with VHDL and Verilog HDL Start Stop Pause Simulation gt To simulate a circuit click the Simulate button on the Design Bar and choose Run Stop from the pop up menu that appears Multisim begins to simulate the circuit s behavior During simulation messages about the simulation results and any problems with the simula tion are written to the
62. circuit window options for the current circuit do one or all of the following e to show or hide the grid page bounds or title block right click on the circuit window and choose the corresponding command Grid Visible Show Page Bounds or Show Title Block and Border from the menu that appears 2 6 Electronics Workbench Customizing the Interface e to set the sheet size choose Edit Set Sheet Size a screen similar to the Default sheet size of the User preferences screen appears toset the zoom level choose View Zoom or use the zoom buttons Multisim comes with several sheet sizes that you can use for laying out your circuit You can modify any of the settings of these sizes gt To use one of the provided sheet sizes as the default 1 Choose the sheet size from the drop down list That size s settings orientation and mea surements appear 2 To save your settings and close the screen click OK To cancel your settings click Can cel gt To modify the settings for a specific sheet size 1 Choose the desired sheet size from the drop down list That size s settings orientation and measurements appear 2 Change any of the settings 3 To save your settings and close the screen click OK To cancel your settings click Can cel Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 7 eoepelu Jasn User Interface User Interface 2 4 4 Setting Autosave Symbol Set Default Path and Wiring Options These options apply to both the cur
63. component For the DC sensitivity analysis a DC analysis is first performed to determine the DC operat ing point of the circuit Then the sensitivity of each output for all of the device values as well as model parameters is calculated Assumptions Applied to an analog circuit small signal Models are linearized 8 11 2 Sensitivity Analyses Example 8 28 Consider the following example Note If the flat line overlapping X axis gets displayed this means that the output voltage current is not affected by the chosen component value The DC sensitivity analysis generated a report shown below of the output voltage at node 12 sensitivity with respect to all components and their parameters Alternatively you can choose to run a DC sensitivity analysis of the current source What does the DC report mean In the first line of the report the change increase of one unit of flicker noise AF of the Zener diode D10 will cause the decrease of the output voltage by 1 583e 012 V Note that the sensitivity number is negative 1 582e 012 This indicates that the increase of one unit of a device parameter will cause the decrease of voltage Each line is to be similarly interpreted Component Sensitivity V unit D10 af 1 582e 012 D10 bv 0 00046414 D10 eg 1 4252e 012 D10 fc 3 1639e 012 D10 ibv 0 0002668 D10 is 38 487 D10 m 4 7507e 012 D10 n 1 582e 012 D10 rs 2 3913e 006 D10 tnom 6 5352e 014
64. component placed on the circuit window has a set of properties that control certain aspects of it beyond those stored in the Multisim database These properties affect only the placed component not other instances of that component in other circuits or other locations in this circuit Depending on the type of component these properties determine some or all of the following e the identifying information and labels about the placed component to be displayed on the circuit window for details see 3 11 1 Modifying Component Labels on page 3 22 the model of the placed component e for some components how the placed component will be used in analyses the faults to be used for the placed component s nodes The properties also show the component s value or model and footprint Displaying Identifying Information about a Placed Component As described in 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display on page 2 5 your user preferences deter mine which of the three pieces of identifying information label values and reference ID is displayed is set in user preferences User preferences take effect when a new circuit is created You can also use View Show to display a window where you can set these defaults for the cur rent circuit only Finally you can override these settings for an individual placed component as described here For educational purposes you can also hide this information from students view for all the components in an enti
65. down list select Impedances The input output impedances are provided in the form of a curve as well as printed out at the top of the curves 8 Use the frequency scroll bar to select the desired frequency for a specific variable Power Gains The Multisim RF Simulator calculates the General Power Gain PG Available Power Gain APG and Transducer Power Gain TPG for Zo 500hm at a given frequency The dBMag is derived as 0log y PGI PG is defined as the ratio of the power delivered to the load and the average power delivered to the network from the input and is given as PG 152112 1 15111 Multisim User Guide 14 19 du RF RF 14 5 2 14 20 The Transducer Power Gain TPG is the ratio of the power delivered to the load to the power available from the source For Gs GL 0 TPG 18211 The Available Power Gain APG is the ratio of the power available from the output port of the network to the power available from the source and it is expressed as 2 2 APG z IS21I 1 18221 Voltage Gain Voltage Gain VG is obtained for Is T 0 and is expressed as VG S21 1 S11 Voltage Gain expressed in dBMag is calculated as 20log y VGI If you observe the time domain signals of the input and output while the transistors are operat ing in the linear region you find that the amplitude of the output voltage signal when 50 Ohm load and source impedances are used to the amplitude of the input voltage sig
66. edit a subcircuit 1 Double click on the subcircuit icon in the main circuit window that contains the subcir cuit The Subcircuit screen appears 2 Click Edit Subcircuit The subcircuit appears in its own window from which you can edit the subcircuit as you would any other circuit For educational purposes you can lock a subcircuit to make it unavailable to students for viewing or editing See 13 4 2 Setting Circuit Restrictions on page 13 6 Printing the Circuit Multisim allows you to control specific aspects of your printing including e whether to output in color or black and white whether to include the background in the printed output page margins for printing scaling of the circuit s image to fit the printed output To set the default printing environment for future circuits use Edit User Preferences as described in 2 4 5 Print Page Setup Tab on page 2 9 To set the default printing environment for this circuit choose File Print Setup then click Page Setup The window that appears offers three tabs which provide the same choices as in the User Preferences screen For details see 2 4 5 Print Page Setup Tab on page 2 9 To print the circuit file using the specified environment choose File Print Print Circuit To preview your printed file choose File Print Preview The circuit appears in a preview win dow where you can zoom in move from page to page and send the circuit to the printer
67. for the worst case analysis The maximum value is calculated with the fol lowing formula R2 ar 1 Tol X R2 Once all the sensitivities have been obtained a final run provides the worst case analysis result Data from the worst case simulation is gathered by collating functions A collating function acts as a highly selective filter by allowing only one datum to be collected per run The six collating functions are This collating function Captures Maximum voltage the values of the Y axis maxima Minimum voltage the values of the Y axis minima Frequency at maximum the X value where the Y axis maxima occurred Frequency at minimum the X value where the Y axis minima occurred Rising edge frequency the X value the first time the Y value rises above the user specified threshold Falling edge frequency the X value the first time the Y value falls below the user specified threshold Assumptions Applied to an analog circuit DC and small signal Models are lin earized Multisim User Guide 8 39 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 40 Setting Worst Case Analysis Tolerance Parameters Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and decide on an output node In the Model tolerance list tab choose which tolerance parameters are to be used You can do this using any of the following methods To edit a tolerance in the list select it and click Edit selected tolerance The tolerance s
68. identical to the contents of the chapters of this guide 2 6 8 2 Help Multisim Reference Displays Multisim s reference help file The contents of this help file are identical to the con tents of the appendices of this guide 2 6 8 3 Help Release Notes Displays version information additions or corrections to printed documentation and other useful information 2 6 8 4 Help About Multisim Displays information on the version number of Multisim Customer support may ask for this number Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 27 eoeyeju 1es 1 User Interface User Interface 2 28 Electronics Workbench Chapter 3 Schematic Capture 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 About this Chapter eos eh yee eed RE aw E n na 3 1 Introduction to Schematic Capture 0 2 0 00 0 eee 3 1 Setting up Your Circuit Window 0 0 000 cee eee 3 1 3 3 1 Setting up a Sheet Size ee 3 2 3 3 2 Displaying or Hiding the Grid Title Block and Page Borders 3 2 3 3 3 Selecting a Symbol Set 0 2 0 0 000s 3 3 Selecting Components from the Database 0 000 cece eee 3 3 Placing Components veronica bad 3 4 3 5 1 Choosing a Component and Using the Browser Screen 3 4 3 5 2 Using the In Use List ee ea e RS a eee 3 8 3 5 8 Moving a Placed Component 0000 cece eee eee eee 3 8 3 5 4 Copying a Placed Component s s s sasssa uaaa 3 8 3 5 5 Replacing a Placed COMpON
69. is a compromise between maximum power handling capability and minimum attenuation At 50 Ohm there is a reasonably low attenuation and adequate power handling capability If the outer diameter of the conductor of a coaxial line is shown by D and the inner diame ter is shown in d and e is the dielectric constant of the cable the characteristic impedance is calculated by the following formula 138 D Zo lo 2 0 Je 810 d The components C and L shown in the figure above are calculated as follows _ 7 354 C log D d PF ft m ll 0 1404 logo D d HA ft A stripline is a useful form of transmission line The stripline consists of a conducting strip lying between and parallel to two wide conducting planes The region between the strip and the planes is filled with a uniform dielectric Microstrips are easy to fabricate using photolithographic processes At the same time that a transistor is placed on top of the board for example a microstrip can also be placed Micros Electronics Workbench Components trip is therefore easily integrated with other passive and active devices A conductor of width W is printed on a thin grounded dielectric substrate of thickness d and relative permittivity Hr A waveguide is a structure or part of a structure that causes a wave to propagate in a chosen direction If the waveguide boundaries change direction the wave is constrained to fo
70. is changed its address appears in the Edit box As the word generator outputs words each word s address appears in the Current box gt Tocreate a subset of the words to be output enter first and last addresses in the Initial and Final fields 6 32 Electronics Workbench Ammeter and Voltmeter 6 15 5 Triggering Use input terminals Trigger on ascending edge of signal Trigger 1 Use external trigger Trigger on descending edge terminal of signal gt To use the word generator clock to trigger input from the word generator s input field to the circuit click Internal To use input through the external terminal instead with each input cycle causing one word to be transmitted click External Use the ascending descending edge buttons to control whether the input signal triggers the word generator on its ascending or descending edge 6 15 6 Frequency and Data Ready Frequency 1 KHz ran Set the clock frequency of the word generator in Hz KHz or MHz Each word is placed on the output terminals for the duration of one clock cycle Data Ready s Enabling this option lets the circuit know that data from the word generator is ready 6 16 Ammeter and Voltmeter These instruments are accessed through the Indicators toolbar For details see Appendix J Indicators Components Multisim User Guide 6 33 Sjuoeuuny1su Instruments Instruments 6 34 Electronics Workbench Chapter 7 Simulation 7
71. log see 7 3 1 Start Stop Pause Simulation on page 7 3 2 6 3 4 View Show Hide Command Line Interface Opens a window into which you can type Xspice commands to be executed Press RETURN to execute the command The command is listed at the top part of the window and any errors are reported in the error log audit trail 2 6 3 5 View Show Hide Grapher Shows hides the Grapher screen which shows the results of simulation on a graph or chart For details about this screen see 8 23 Viewing the Analysis Results Grapher on page 8 54 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 17 eoeyeju 1es 1 User Interface User Interface 2 18 2 6 3 6 View Show Simulate Switch Shows or hides the simulation on off switch An alternative to using the Design Bar button or menu commands The switch looks like this aon 2 6 3 7 View Grid Visible Shows or hides a grid in the background of the circuit window This helps you place elements in specific locations on a grid For details see 3 3 2 Displaying or Hiding the Grid Title Block and Page Borders on page 3 2 2 6 3 8 View Show Page Bounds Shows or hides page boundaries in the circuit window This helps you note where circuits will appear on printed output For details see 3 3 2 Displaying or Hiding the Grid Title Block and Page Borders on page 3 2 2 6 3 9 View Show Title Block and Border Shows or hides the circuit s title block and border For details see 3 3 2 Dis
72. log event alter nations in DCOP CONVLIMIT Enable conver Enables disables a conver ON gence assis gence algorithm used in some tance on code built in component models models CONVAB Absolute step Controls automatic conver 0 1 SSTEP allowed by gence assistance by establish code model ing an absolute step size limit in inputs between solving for the DC operating iterations point CONVSTEP Fractional step Controls automatic conver 0 25 allowed by gence assistance by establish code model ing a relative step size limit in inputs between solving for the DC operating iterations point AUTOPAR Use auto par TIAL tial computa tion for all models RSHUNT Shunt resis Inserts resistance to ground at Dis Ww Should be set to some tance from all analog nodes in the circuit abled very high resistance say analog nodes Reducing value reduces simu 1 0e12 1e 12Q If you get a No to ground lation accuracy when DC path to ground or a Med d Matrix is nearly singular abled error message try decreasing RSHUNT to 1e 9Q or 1e 6Q Temporary file Allows you to adjustthe filesize 10 Mb If your circuit has many size for simula tion for storage of simulation results When the file reaches its maximum size you are prompted to stop simulation use remaining disk space and continue or discard existing data and continue nodes and you want to Scroll the oscilloscope back in time to the start
73. logical pins of a component The logical and physical pin mapping is needed for exporting to a layout package the pin group and type information is needed for simulation General Symbol Model Footprint Electronic Parameters User Fields Package Type Number of Pins Number of Sections 2 Component Type piss E Component Technology as El Restore Symbol to Footprint Pin Mapping T able topes Pie FoointPine sector Typ INPUT INPUT ACTIVE DRIVER INPUT INPUT ACTIVE DRIVER GND gt To modify or enter package information 1 In the Package Type field modify or enter the package type for example DIP14 2 In the Number of Pins field modify or enter the number of pins 3 In the Number of Sections field modify or enter the number of sections 4 In the Component Type field choose the component type from the drop down list 5 In the Component Technology field choose the component technology from the drop down list gt To map logical and physical pins 1 Click on the field you want to modify until a frame appears around the field 2 For each logical pin enter its corresponding physical pin on the package 3 For each pin enter the grouping of pins using the syntax described in 5 12 1 Pin Group Naming Convention on page 5 30 4 For each pin enter the type using the syntax described in 5 12 2 Pin Type Naming Con vention on page 5 30 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JO
74. modeling language VHDL includes many features appropriate for describing the behavior of electronic components ranging from simple logic gates to complete micropro cessors and custom chips Features of VHDL allow electrical aspects of circuit behavior such as rise and fall times of signals delays through gates and functional operation to be precisely described The resulting VHDL simulation models can then be used as building blocks in larger circuits using schematics block diagrams or system level VHDL descriptions for the purpose of simulation Just as high level programming languages allow complex design concepts to be expressed as computer programs VHDL allows the behavior of complex electronic circuits to be captured into a design system for automatic circuit synthesis or for system simulation This process is called design entry and is the first step taken when a circuit concept is to be realized using computer aided design tools Design entry using VHDL is very much like software design using a software programming language Like Pascal C and C VHDL includes features useful for structured design tech niques and offers a rich set of control and data representation features Unlike these other pro gramming languages VHDL provides features allowing concurrent events to be described This is important because the hardware being described using VHDL is inherently concurrent in its operation Users of PLD programming languages su
75. models associated with them are connectors and junctions These components do not affect the simulation of the circuit The Model tab of the Component Properties screen offers you a number of options to choose from to assign a model to your component You can e modify the model information of a component e load an existing model for a component e copy a model of one component to another create a model for a component Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JO1JIp3 1ueuoduio5 Component Editor Use to create a General Symbol Model F int Electronic Parameters User Fields MOEN wis UITG eneral Syi ootprint onic Par ters User Fields sim s Model Name Maker Model Data Model Maker Use to load a Load Madel from Files model stored in Select from DB a file Restore Use to copy data from another ae to Model Pin ee dal mode Click to ignore changes to a model and continue using the original one First of all you can directly modify the existing model data by using the fields of this screen or you can enter information from scratch in these fields The Model Data and Symbol to Model Pin Mapping fields contain the information that make up the model itself and are thus the most important part for simulation purposes The Model Data field contains the model s code for example in SPICE and the Symbol to Model Pin Mapping field connects pins of the symbol to their respective nodes in the model
76. not be available in your version of Multi SN sim Such features have an icon in the column next to their description 9 2 Introduction to the Postprocessor The Postprocessor allows you to manipulate the output from analyses performed on a circuit and plot the results on a graph or chart The plotted results are referred to as traces Types of mathematical operations that can be performed on analysis results include arithmetic trigo nometric exponential logarithmic complex vector logic etc The following examples illustrate possible uses of the Postprocessor e Divide the output curve by the input curve obtained from a transient analysis and observe the results Multiply a voltage by a current to observe circuit power e Assess the differences caused by minor changes to your circuit For example run an anal ysis on a circuit then change one condition of the circuit such as changing the input volt age of the component s value and run the analysis again Subtract one set of results from the other to show the effect of the circuit modification Multisim User Guide 9 1 JosseooJdisod Postprocessor Postprocessor 9 3 9 3 1 9 2 zu Using the Postprocessor The Postprocessor calculates the results of equations and plots these results as traces on graphs and charts To use the Postprocessor you build the equations yourself by combining the variables from previous circuit analysis results with mathe
77. occurs if the reverse transmission coefficient S or the reverse Electronics Workbench RF Analyses transducer power gain E is equal to 0 This means that the input section of the amplifier is completely isolated from the output section Note that passive networks are usually not unilateral The unilateral property of a network is determined by calculating the Unilateral Figure of Merit U If necessary the frequency can be adjusted to improve the unilateral property gt To calculate the Unilateral Figure of Merit 1 From the Match Net Designer screen click the Unilateral Gain Circles tab 2 Read the value of U or the Unilateral Figure of Merit 3 Calculate the upper and lower limits of the following inequality using U 1 1 U lt Gp Gry lt 1 1 0 where Gy transducer power gain is defined as the ratio of the output power delivered to a load by a source and the maximum power available from the source and Gry repre sents the transducer power gain assuming unilateral property S12 0 for the network You need not calculate GT or GTU since only the limits are of interest here If the limits are close to one or U is close to zero the effect of S12 is small enough to assume unilateral property for the amplifier If it is not go to the next step 4 Change the frequency so that the minimum U is read This frequency suggests an oper ating point for the amplifier where the unilater
78. oe a 8 23 8 9 1 About the Distortion Analysis lille 8 23 8 9 2 Setting Distortion Analysis Parameters llli 0 eee eee aes 8 24 DC Sweep Analysis ita epi RN bed e PARET 8 25 8 10 1 Setting DC Sweep Analysis Parameters 0000 eee eee 8 26 DC and AC Sensitivity Analyses ooccooccocccno ee 8 27 8 11 1 About the Sensitivity Analyses lille 8 27 8 11 2Sensitivity Analyses Example 0 0000 cece eee lees 8 28 8 11 3Setting Sensitivity Analysis Parameters lille 8 30 Parameter Sweep Analysis 0000 cece eee eh 8 31 8 12 1 About the Parameter Sweep Analysis 00000 cece eee eae 8 31 8 12 2 Setting Parameter Sweep Analysis Parameters 2222er 8 31 Temperature Sweep Analysis liiis 8 34 8 13 1 About the Temperature Sweep Analysis 000000 eee ess 8 34 8 13 2 Setting Temperature Sweep Analysis Parameters usu 8 35 Transfer Function Analysis liens 8 36 8 14 1 About the Transfer Function Analysis 0 000 eee eee eee 8 36 8 14 2 Setting Transfer Function Analysis Parameters issus 8 37 Worst Case Analysis nispa der terate erana io tex Pen gd ne 8 38 8 15 1 About the Worst Case Analysis liliis eese 8 38 8 15 2 Setting Worst Case Analysis Parameters 00000 eee eeee 8 41 Pole Zero ANAS onem Dies en RRS eye RR TR 8 42 8 16 1 About the Pole Zero Analysis
79. of the simulation you may need to increase the tem porary file size 8 70 Electronics Workbench Analysis Options Multisim User Guide 8 71 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 72 Electronics Workbench Chapter 9 Postprocessor 9 1 Aboutthis Chapter ossis cani e aae pa a a e e a iaa E E a a 9 1 9 2 Introduction to the POStprOCesSsO0r coocccooocc nara ene 9 1 9 3 Using the PoStprocessor o o oooooocccooc een nn 9 2 9 3 1 Basic Steps ria oix re A A ea el deta VERS 9 2 9 3 1 1 Using the Default Analysis llli 9 4 9 3 1 2 Creating Multiple Traces lille 9 6 9 3 2 Working with Pages Graphs and Charts 0000 0c eee eee 9 7 9 4 Postprocessor Variables 9 8 9 5 Available Functions E a a E A eee 9 8 Multisim User Guide JOSS 901q SOd Postprocessor Electronics Workbench Chapter 9 Postprocessor 9 1 About this Chapter This chapter explains how to use the Postprocessor to mathematically manipulate the results of simulation obtained through analyses in different ways Several examples are provided at the end of the chapter To use the Postprocessor you must have performed at least one analysis on your circuit This chapter assumes that you are familiar with the analyses offered by Multisim and the Grapher function that displays analysis results For details see Chapter 8 Analyses KN Some of the features described in this chapter may
80. oooocoocccoocccora 8 42 8 16 1 1 About Circuit Stability liliis 8 43 8 16 1 2 About the Bode Phase Plot l u anuanua aaa 8 44 8 16 2 Setting Pole Zero Analysis Parameters llle 8 45 Monte Carlo Analysis lisse hne 8 47 8 17 1 About the Monte Carlo Analysis llle 8 47 8 17 2Setting Monte Carlo Analysis Parameters llli less 8 50 HF Analyses 2e er en en ee Rm Ene Des ne temm en 8 50 Batched Analyses x ose a a a RR ED A 8 51 User Defined Analyses o ooooocccccocc rn 8 52 Noise Figure Analysis 0 000 I eh 8 53 Electronics Workbench 8 22 Viewing the Analysis Results Error Log Audit Trail o oo o o oo ooo 8 53 8 23 Viewing the Analysis Results Grapher liliis 8 54 8 24 Working with Pages ssepe RE hawaii RARE owe eee en 8 56 8 25 Working with Graphs oooooccooccoco eh 8 57 8 25 1 Grids and LegendS ooooccocccoc eese 8 57 825 2 QUESOS nc but eau EARS CENE Reese s 8 58 8 25 3Zoom and Restore 2 eee 8 59 8254 Te Fan daa ug dre Lp howe RE OE RE ees bas 8 60 Bab SAXCS alone ees A A a a AN na MM DE 8 61 8 25 76 TACOS osse BARRE E REESE Ra Sade 8 62 8 26 Viewing ChartS 060 err 8 63 8 27 Cut Copy and Paste cir qb ens wher x heels eed Pali feta Ges td eub roges 8 63 8 28 Print and Print Preview 0 cee e 8 64 8 29 Analysis Options na aa rns 8 65 Multisim User Guide sos A euy Analyses Electronic
81. page to which you want to add the graph or chart 2 Click New Graph or New Chart You are prompted for a name 3 The name is added to the drop down list for that page Transient Analysis tran01 Transier gt Chart tran01 Graph tran01 1 h 2 The drop down list shows the graphs and charts in the page Each chart or graph on a page appears on the same tab in the Grapher screen gt To remove a trace select it and click Delete Trace To delete a page select it and click Delete Page To save the current set of pages click Save Pages Navigate to the location where you want to save the file and provide a file name gt To load a saved set of pages click Load Pages navigate to the location of the saved file select it and click Open Multisim User Guide 9 7 JosseooJdisog Postprocessor Postprocessor 9 4 9 5 9 8 Postprocessor Variables The variables that appear in the Analysis Variables list of the Postprocessor are based on the selected analysis They can include any or all of the following v voltage in node where represents the node number vv branch branch current through voltage source vv vv represents the voltage source name expr x expression within subcircuit x Available Functions The functions you can apply to the Postprocessor variables are Symbol Type Description Algebraic plus A
82. paste it elsewhere 2 6 2 9 Edit Copy Ctrl C Copies selected components circuits or text The copy is placed on the Windows clipboard You can then use the Paste command to paste the copy elsewhere including other applica tions such as word processors 2 6 2 10 Edit Paste Ctrl V Places the contents of the clipboard The cursor shows a ghosted image of the item to be pasted Click to indicate where the item is to be pasted 2 6 2 11 Edit Paste as Subcircuit Macro Ctrl B Places the contents of the clipboard as a subcircuit For details see 3 12 3 Adding Subcir cuits to a Circuit on page 3 27 Electronics Workbench Menus and Commands 2 6 2 12 Edit Delete Del Permanently removes selected components or text Does not place the selection on the clip board and does not affect anything currently on the clipboard Caution Use the Delete command with care Deleted information cannot be retrieved although the most recent deletion can be recovered using the Undo command Note Deleting a component or instrument removes it from the circuit window not from its toolbar 2 6 2 13 Edit Replace Part Before using select a component on the circuit window to be replaced Invokes the Browser screen see Chapter 3 Schematic Capture for more information from which you can select a new component Click OK to replace the old component with the new one 2 6 2 14 Edit Select AII Ctrl A Selects all items in the
83. properties gt To edit a pin s properties 1 Double click the pin The Pin Properties screen appears showing the default properties for the pin Pin Properties Visible Visible l REMOVE Electronics Workbench 3 Click on the pin attribute Logical Pin Physical Pin or Shape you want to edit A field appears at the bottom of the screen allowing you to enter the value of either the Physical or Logical pin and change its shape For example Pin E dit Lx This field lets you set the Properties Name Value value for the Logical Pin New Pin Visible selected Physical Pin 0 Visible Cancel Shape Dot property d Physical Pin o I Visible Remove Emi Add Buren 4 Enable or disable Visible to make the value visible or hidden by default Note It is recommended that you use databook names for logical pins It is important that you use the databook numbering for the physical pins 5 To cancel your changes click Cancel To confirm them click OK The Pin Properties screen appears again Click OK to close the screen gt To remove a logical or physical pin property select it and click Remove Once it is removed the Add button becomes available to add a physical or logical pin property again 5 11 Creating or Editing a Component Model A component that has an effect on the circuit must have a model if you wish to simulate that component The only components in Multisim that do not have
84. represent the phase of current compared to the voltage This phase is ideally 90 but is smaller for real components The power factor PF is defined as COS 6 This factor is a function of temperature frequency and the dielectric material The power factor is usually used to describe the capacitor in low frequencies This factor in higher frequencies is sometimes referred to as the dissipation factor This factor describes how much power is dissipated lost or transformed to heat energy in RF frequen cies Another factor that defines the quality of the capacitor is closely related to power factor and is called Q factor This factor is the reciprocal of dissipation factor The larger the Q the better the capacitor No dielectric material is perfect Therefore there is always leakage current between two plates This behavior is best described by Rp which is usually around 100 000 MOhm The series resistor is the AC resistance of the capacitor in high frequencies and is obtained using COS 6 Cw 1e6 Here 22 pi f There is a frequency point above which the capacitor starts to behave like an inductor 14 3 3 4 RF Inductors Inductors are extensively used in resonant circuits filters and matching networks The fol lowing figure shows a typical inductor modeled for RF frequencies An inductor is a wire wound or coiled Each two windings are at close proximity which creates a distributed capac itor Cd The inductor would behave like a
85. schematic in the circuit window with the mathematical representation for simulation The accuracy of the component models is one of the key items that determines the degree to which simulation results match real world circuit performance The mathematical representation of a circuit is a set of simultaneous nonlinear differential equations The main task of the simulator is to solve these equations numerically A SPICE based simulator transforms the nonlinear differential equations into a set of nonlinear alge braic equations These equations are further linearized using the modified Newton Raphson method The resulting set of linear algebraic equations is efficiently solved using the sparse matrix processing LU factorization method 7 4 3 Four Stages of Circuit Simulation The simulator in Multisim like other general purpose simulators has four main stages input setup analysis and output described below Stage Description Input stage Simulator reads information about your circuit after you have built a schematic assigned values and chosen an analysis Setup stage Simulator constructs and checks a set of data structures that contain a complete description of your circuit Analysis stage The circuit analysis specified in the input stage is performed This stage occupies most of the CPU execution time and is actually the core of cir cuit simulation The analysis stage formulates and solves circuit equa tions for the spec
86. simulation error log audit trail The error log audit trail appears auto matically when you stop the simulation If you want to keep an eye on the progress of the simulation you can display the error log audit trail during simulation To display it from the View menu choose Show Hide Error Log Audit Trail To pause the simulation while it is running click the Simulate button on the Design Bar and choose Pause Resume from the pop up menu that appears To resume the simulation from the same point as when you paused click the Simulate button and choose Pause Resume again To stop a simulation click the Simulate button on the Design Bar and choose Run Stop from the pop up menu that appears If you restart the simulation after stopping it it will restart from the beginning unlike Pause Resume which allows you to restart from the point you paused Multisim User Guide 7 3 uoneinwig Simulation Simulation Alternatively you can run simulations by choosing Run Stop and Pause Resume from the Simulation menu using the same instructions as above gt A final option available to you for starting and stopping simulations is to use the simulation aon 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 3 4 7 4 switch From the View menu choose Show Simulation Switch to display a switch for acti vating your circuit The switch can be used to start stop and pause the simulation Interactive Simulation In a capacity unique to Multisim simulat
87. tab 8 6 Monte Carlo 8 47 noise 8 19 noise figure 14 18 options 8 65 output variables tab 8 3 parameter sweep 8 31 performing general instructions 8 2 pole zero 8 42 printing graphs and charts 8 64 results 8 53 summary tab 8 8 Multisim User Guide temperature sweep 8 34 transfer function 8 36 transient 8 13 user defined 8 52 viewing charts 8 63 viewing graphs 8 57 working with pages 8 56 worst case 8 38 analysis default settings for instruments 6 5 analysis output manipulating 9 1 9 2 9 7 Analysis Parameters tab about 8 3 assigning faults to components 13 1 audit trail 8 53 Auto Fault option 13 3 automatic wiring 3 11 autosave 2 8 axes Bode plotter settings 6 7 B batched analyses 8 51 Bill of Materials 11 1 Bode plotter about 6 6 axes settings 6 7 magnitude 6 7 phase 6 7 readouts 6 8 settings 6 7 Boolean expressions entering 6 14 Browser screen 3 6 browsing database 3 3 BSpice model 5 28 Bspice support 7 5 C changing component value model 3 18 channel settings 6 26 charts cut copy paste 8 63 printing 8 64 using in postprocessor 9 7 viewing 8 63 circuit adding instruments to 6 2 adding subcircuits 3 27 consistency checking in simulation 7 4 controlling display 2 5 equation 7 7 printing files 3 28 setting up as subcircuit 3 27 simulation See simulation circuit restrictions setting 13 6 circuit window placing components 3 4 clock logic analyzer 6 17 color component 3 10 schemes 2 5
88. the File New command closes the currently open circuit file 2 6 1 2 File Open Ctrl O Opens a previously created circuit file or netlist Displays a file browser If necessary change to the location of the file you want to open Note You can open files created with Version 5 of Electronics Workbench files created in Multisim and netlist files 2 6 1 3 File Close Closes the active circuit file If any changes were made since the last save of the file you are prompted to save those changes before closing 2 6 1 4 File Save Ctrl S Saves the active circuit file If this is the first time the file is being saved displays a file browser If you want change to the desired location for saving the file You can save a circuit file with a name of any length The extension msm is added to the file name automatically For example a circuit named Mycircuit will be saved as Mycircuit msm Tip To preserve the original circuit without changes choose File Save As Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 11 soeJyaju Jasn User Interface User Interface 2 6 1 5 File Save As Saves the current circuit with a new file name The original circuit remains unchanged Tip Use this command to experiment safely on a copy of a circuit without changing the original 2 6 1 6 File Print Prints all or some aspects of a circuit and or its instruments on a printer attached to your sys tem You can choose one of the following to print circuit
89. the first element is taken and if it isn t an image then the floor of the magnitude is used length Vector length of vector Multisim User Guide 9 9 JosseooJdisog Postprocessor Postprocessor Symbol Type Description deriv Vector derivative of vector uses numeric differentiation by interpolating a polynomial and may not produce satisfactory results particularly with iterated differ entiation Only calculates the derivative with respect to the real component of the vector s scale max Vector maximum value from vector min Vector minimum value from vector vm Vector vm x mag v x vp Vector vp x ph v x yes Constat yes true Constat true no Constat no false Constat false pi Constat pi e Constat natural logarithm base c Constat speed of light in vacuum i Constat square root of 1 kelvin Constat degrees kelvin echarge Constat fundamental charge boltz Constat Boltzman s constant planck Constat Planck s constant 9 10 Electronics Workbench Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic 10 1 About this Chapter areas RV ER ERU EE REP CERE ES 10 1 10 2 Overview of HDLs within Multisim llle meh 10 2 10 2 T About HDLS es nube TEMA NELLE oL in SNe es 10 2 10 2 2 Using Multisim with Programmable Logic 2222222 10 2 10 2 3Using Multisim for Modeling Complex Digital ICs 10 3 1
90. these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Electronics Workbench Structure of the Component Database 4 2 3 7 TTL Toolbar ANSI 74STD 74S 74LS m 74RLS 74ALS gt DIN 74STD TTL Multi ES 748 74F 74ALS 74AS SS Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim 74ALS Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 13 sjuauodwo5 Components Components 4 14 4 2 3 8 CMOS Toolbar ANSI CMOS 5V CMOS 10V 4XXX 4XXX CMOS 15V 74HC 2V 74HC_4V 74HC 6V TinyLogic 2V TinyLogic 3V TinyLogic BV TinyLogic 4V TinyLogic ev MB DIN CMOS 5V CMOS_10V CMOS_15V HC 2V x 74HC fey ur 74HC_4V 74HC 6V TinyLogic 2V TinyLogic 3V TinyLogic_5V El TinyLogie_6V m TinyLogic_4V Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Electronics Workbench Structure of the Component Database 4 2 3 9 Miscellaneous Digital Toolbar ANSI Misc Digita E3 TIL VHDL Verilog HDL Line receiver Line driver Line transceiver Memory DIN TIL VHDL Verilog HDL Line receiver Line driver Line transceiver Memory Note For details
91. this you need to enter the numerical values of frequencies in the Frequency area of the screen Their values should be non zero values When Enter is clicked the center frequency f center and the range of frequency displayed on the spectrum analyzer f span are calculated automatically The relationship among these parameters is expressed as follows f center f start f end 2 f span fend f start Frequency Enter Span o kHz Start 1 KHz Center 51 KHz End 101 KHz These two techniques are interrelated that is it is not possible to set all four parameters inde pendently Both techniques are useful For example if you want to see frequency components around one specific frequency such as100 Mhz 100kHz then the frequency control tech nique is easier to apply The center frequency in this example is 100 Mhz and the span is 2 100kHz 200 kHz Multisim User Guide 14 11 du RF RF 14 12 14 4 1 6 Amplitude Range Amplitude FT E Range 2 Div Ref fe dB You can set the amplitude range of the signal visible on the screen by choosing one of the fol lowing three options dB This option stands for 20 log10 V where log10 is the logarithm in base 10 and V is the amplitude of the signal When this option is used the signal is displayed by dB per division shown in the right hand side of the spectrum analyzer The dB reading is of interest when measuring the po
92. to sweep drop down list 8 14 Transfer Function Analysis 8 14 1 About the Transfer Function Analysis S Transfer function analysis calculates the DC small signal transfer function between an input 2 source and two output nodes for voltage or an output variable for current in a circuit It also calculates input and output resistances Any nonlinear models are first linearized based on the DC operating point and then small signal analysis is performed The output variable can be any node voltage while the input must be an independent source defined somewhere in the circuit Assumptions Analog circuit linear models Models are linearized The DC small signal gain is the derivative of the output with respect to the input at the DC bias point and zero frequency For example Wour dV The input and output resistance of a circuit refers to the dynamic or small signal resistance at the input or output Mathematically small signal DC resistance is the derivative or the 8 36 Electronics Workbench Transfer Function Analysis input voltage with respect to the input current at the DC bias point and zero frequency The following is an expression for input resistance dVy dl y In Multisim the results of the Transfer function analysis produce a chart showing the ratio of the output to the input signal the input resistance at the input source node and the output resistance across the output voltage nodes 8 14 2 Setting
93. to the Multisim Interface Multisim s user interface consists of the following basic elements Zoom Multisim toolbar Design Bar In Use list multiSIM Tut3 msm Um Edit View Simulate Transfer Tools Window Help Menus Olla lee al QQ a 21 In Use List y B LAUS i AE IU E NN E O E 7 i A 4 5 E m tobe Al Esca Nl T 1E oam NS XSC1 vw mm 5v ANA 10kohm 4700hm E 1 R3 Ri Component Y toolbar zd 2 9 LEDI gt Y LED_red msc gt P x D Circuit f ell window a M 2N2222A y 4 ua ELS Database e saison 4200hm selector E P To PO CompProj E Z C User x nz I Temp 27 I Status line ee Note Your circuit window may by default have a black background however for the pur poses of this document we show a white background To change the background color see 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display on page 2 5 i Menus are as in all Windows applications where you find commands for all functions The system toolbar contains buttons for commonly performed functions as described in 2 5 System Toolbar Buttons on page 2 10 The zoom toolbar allows you to zoom in and out on the circuit The Multisim Design Bar is an integral part of Multisim and is explained in more detail in 2 3 Introduction to the Design Bar on page 2 3 The In Use list lists all the components used in the current circuit for easy re use
94. two nodes Insert the multimeter in series with the load to measure current flow just like a real ammeter as shown in diagram below XMM1 C D1 1 7 N409 S a B A en 1 1 0kohm 1 0kohm 4 gt i 1N1199C gt To measure current at another node in the circuit connect another multimeter in series at that load and activate the circuit again When used as an ammeter the multimeter s internal resis tance is very low 1n Ohm gt To change the resistance click Set See 6 10 3 Internal Settings on page 6 22 for details 6 10 1 2 Voltmeter This option measures voltage between two nodes Select V and attach the voltmeter s probes in parallel with the load as shown in diagram below After the circuit has been activated you XMM1 LZ may move the probes around to measure voltage between other nodes When used as a volt meter the multimeter has a high internal resistance of 1 mohm which can be changed by clicking Set See 6 10 3 Internal Settings on page 6 22 for details 6 20 Electronics Workbench Multimeter 6 10 1 3 Ohmmeter This option measures resistance between two nodes The nodes and everything that lies between them are referred to as the component network To measure the resistance select this option and attach the multimeter s probes in parallel with the component network as shown in the diagram below XMM1 LZ 1 D1 2 D2 R1 R2 1 gt 2 1 0ohm 2 1 0ohm To get an accurat
95. two sources are swept the number of curves equals the number of points for the second source Each curve repre sents the output node value versus the first source value while the second source value is held at each of its sweep values DC Sweep Analysis parameters are set on the following screen Choose the source for Dc Sweep Analysis the sweep Click to filter the items in the Source list The values at which the analysis will stop and start The values by which each sweep will increase As above but for sec ond source 8 26 Electronics Workbench DC and AC Sensitivity Analyses 8 11 Setting DC Sweep Analysis Parameters for Normal Use For normal use you only need to set the source for the sweep by choosing from the Source drop down list under the Source 1 options astarting value for the sweep by entering it in the Start Value field astop value for the sweep by entering it in the Stop Value field anincrement value for the sweep by entering it in the Increment field The analysis will calculate the circuit s bias point values beginning with the specified start value The Increment value will then be added to the start value and the circuit variables will be recalculated The Increment value is added again and the process continues until the stop value is reached Setting DC Sweep Analysis Parameters for Advanced Use You can filter the variables displayed to include intern
96. using the following fields Field Use Label Label for the axis To change the axis font click Font Pen Size Controls the thickness and color of the axis and the font of the axis values To change color or font click Color or Font Minimum Max Controls the minimum and maximum values displayed Values change when you imum zoom Number Sets the number of tick marks on axis Frequency Sets the occurrence of values on tick marks For example 2 means that a value appears every two tick marks Precision Sets the number of significant digits for axis values Scale Sets a multiplication factor for axis values Changes the scale of the axis Multisim User Guide 8 61 sos A euy Analyses Analyses Field Use Enabled Determines whether or not the axis appears 8 25 6 Traces You can change several characteristics of each trace in a graph from the Traces tab in the Graph Properties screen Graph Properties x General Left Axis Bottom Axis Right Axis Top Axis Traces Trace Label ri seen o r Sample Pen Size fi E Color I Red gt Range Y Range Offsets Bottom Axis Left Axis X Offset fo C Top Axis C Bight Axis Y Offset fo gt To change the characteristics of a trace 1 Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it 2 Click the Properties button The Graph Properties screen appears 3 Click the Traces tab 4 Select a trace
97. value in the Frequency field enter a value in the Temperature field The default setting of 300 15 degrees Kelvin is equivalent to 27 degrees Celsius You can filter the variables displayed to include internal nodes such as nodes inside a BJT model or inside a SPICE subcircuits open pins as well as output variables from any submod ules contained in the circuit Electronics Workbench RF Model Makers 14 6 gt To filter the variables displayed 1 Click the Change Filter button The Filter Nodes screen appears Filter nodes X Display internal nodes Display submodules Cancel Display open pins 2 Enable one or more settings 3 Click OK RF Model Makers As with the other Multisim Model Makers RF Model Makers automatically simulate models based on the input you provide Whereas input for other model makers usually comes from data books RF Model Makers can also receive other types of input such as operating charac teristics or physical dimensions depending on the type of components you are modelling Multisim has RF Model Makers for the following types of components 14 6 1 Waveguide For Waveguide models enter values in the two tabs shown below Use the following diagram for assistance in identifying the values Central strip Slot width width Conductor thickness t Dielectric thickness Relative dielectric constant gj Y Conductor length Multisi
98. wire 3 14 complex digital ICs modeling 10 3 Complex Programmable Logic Device See CPLD component color 3 10 component detail report 11 4 Component Editing about 5 1 Footprint tab 5 29 Generaltab 5 7 component symbol editing 5 16 component value model changing 3 18 component wizard 5 9 components about 4 1 adding 5 9 assigning faults 13 1 Auto Fault option 13 3 changing value model 3 18 classification in database 4 3 copying model 5 27 copying symbols 5 17 creating model 5 25 creating symbols 5 18 determining use in analyses 3 20 displaying information 3 16 editing 5 5 editing model 5 25 editing symbol 5 16 flipping 3 15 general properties 5 7 information stored 4 23 labels assigning 3 22 moving 3 8 package information 5 29 pins 5 29 placed properties 3 16 placing 3 4 3 8 placing on circuit window 3 4 reference ID assigning 3 22 removing 5 14 rotating 3 15 searching for 4 21 using global 4 26 virtual 3 4 wiring 3 10 connector adding 3 14 convergence assistance 7 9 copying component model 5 27 component symbol 5 17 CPLD 10 3 creating components 5 9 customizing interface 2 4 cut copy paste pages graphs and charts 8 63 D data ready 6 33 database classification of parts 4 3 component classification 4 3 Electronics Workbench family list 11 3 levels 4 1 selecting components 3 3 structure of 4 1 DC operating point analysis 8 9 DC sensitivity analysis 8 27 decibels 6 21 default analysis postproc
99. you For details see 14 4 2 Network Analyzer on page 14 15 Simulate Analyses Stop Stops the currently running analysis 2 6 4 6 Simulate Postprocess Opens the Postprocessor screen which you use to combine the results of several analyses in different ways To use the Postprocessor you must have performed at least one analysis on your circuit For details see Chapter 9 Postprocessor 2 6 4 7 Simulate VHDL Simulation Runs the VHDL simulation module For details see Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 23 eoepelu Jasn User Interface User Interface 2 6 4 8 Simulate Verilog HDL Simulation Runs the Verilog HDL simulation module For details see Chapter 10 HDLs and Program mable Logic 2 6 4 9 Simulate Auto Fault Option Applies faults to randomly selected components in the circuit You choose the number of faults either in total or the number of each type of fault to be applied For details see 13 3 2 Using the Auto Fault Option on page 13 3 2 6 4 10 Simulate Global Component Tolerances Multisim components are by default ideal they have no internal resistance and their out put is consistent You can choose to use global components instead These randomly introduce variances to simulate the performance of actual physical components Global component set tings affect the simulation results See 4 5 Component Nominal Values and Tolerances o
100. 0 2 4 How to Use HDLs in Multisim llle 10 3 10 2 5Introduction to VHDL 6 tee 10 4 10 2 5 1VHDL A Standard Language 000 eee eee eee 10 5 10 2 5 2A Brief History of VHDL 0 00 eee 10 5 Multisim User Guide SICH HDLs Electronics Workbench Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic 10 1 About this Chapter This chapter deals with Hardware Description Languages HDLs generally and more specif ically with the two most common HDLs VHDL and Verilog HDL and their usage in Multi sim It also addresses one of the most common applications of using HDLs designing with programmable logic devices and the process of synthesis This chapter is divided into three main parts the first section provides a brief overview of HDLs within Multisim the second section deals with VHDL and the third section deals with Verilog HDL Important information particularly for newcomers to HDLs also exists in the VHDL appendix This chapter is primarily of use to those with the VHDL or Verilog HDL Design Simulate and Debug module of Multisim included in the Power Professional version and available as an add on product to Professional Edition users Also available is a separate add on product that includes the ability to simulate a circuit containing a device for which the model already exists in VHDL or Verilog HDL but not the ability to write or design VHDL Verilog HDL source code SS Some of the features descri
101. 000 cece eee 14 38 Selecting a DC operating Point 0 000 cee eee 14 39 Selecting the Biasing Network 00 000 cece 14 39 Selecting an Operating Frequency Point 00ee ee eeee 14 41 Analyzing the RF Network ooocccocccccooo raana ranana 14 41 Index Multisim User Guide XV xvi Electronics Workbench Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Whatis M ltisim eee aree ret Et ee RAE 1 1 1 2 Multisim Educational Editions lle Multisim User Guide uononpoulu Introduction Electronics Workbench Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 1 2 This manual assumes that you are familiar with Windows applications and know how for example to choose a menu from a command use the mouse to select an item and enable dis able an option box If you are new to Windows see your Windows documentation for help What is Multisim Multisim Version 6 is the latest generation of the world s most popular electronic design and education software from Electronics Workbench It is a complete system design tool that offers a large component database schematic entry full analog digital SPICE simulation VHDL Verilog design entry simulation FPGA CPLD synthesis RF capabilities postprocess ing features and seamless transfer to PCB layout packages such as Ultiboard also from Elec tronics Workbench It offers a single easy to use graphical interface for all your design and analysis needs Multisim Educational Editi
102. 1 0e 12 A Generally set to 6 to 8 tolerance error tolerance Default is suit able for most bipolar transistor VLSI circuits VNTOL Voltage error Resets the absolute voltage 1 0e 06 V Generally set to 6 to 8 tolerance error tolerance of the program orders of magnitude smaller than the largest voltage signal in the cir cuit TRTOL Truncation Resets transient error toler 7 Use default value error overesti ance Only used in the local mation factor truncation error criterion CHGTOL Charge error Resets the charge tolerance in 1 0e 14 C Do not change default tolerance coulombs PIVTOL Minimum Resets the absolute minimum 1 0e 13 Do not change default acceptable value for a matrix entry to be pivot accepted as a pivot 8 66 Electronics Workbench Analysis Options PIVREL Minimum Resets the relative value 0 001 Do not change default acceptable between the largest column ratio of pivot entry in the matrix and an acceptable pivot value Value must be between 1 and 0 TNOM Nominal tem Resets the normal temperature 27 oc Do not change unless you perature at which model parameters are want your circuit to match measured and calculated data book specifications that were extracted at a temperature other than 27 C ITL1 DC iteration Resets the upper bound limit to 100 If you receive the error limit the number of Newton Raph message No conver son iterations during a DC gence in DC analys
103. 11 3 Database Family List 11 4 Component Detail Report 11 11 5 Instrument Maps Multisim User Guide suoday Reports Electronics Workbench Chapter 11 Reports 11 1 About this Chapter Multisim allows you to generate a number of reports This chapter explains the major types of reports Database Family List Component Detail Report and Instrument Maps Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your version of Multi sim Such features have an icon in the column next to their description Bill of Materials BOM A Bill of Materials lists the components used in your design and therefore provides a sum mary of the components needed to manufacture the circuit board Information provided in the Bill of Materials includes quantity of each component needed description including the type of component for example resistor and value for exam ple 5 1 Kohm reference ID of each component e package or footprint of each component Note The Bill of Materials is intended primarily to assist in procurement and manufacturing and therefore only includes real components If you have purchased the Project Team Design module included in the Power Professional and optional in the Professional Edition the Bill of Materials will include all user fields and their values for each component that has such fields completed For more on defining and completing user fields see 13 7 Working with User
104. 15 2 6 2 14 Edil Select All ono her ova dde nA wads 2 15 2 6 2 15 Edit Flip Horizontal llssissseeeee eee 2 15 2 6 2 16 Edit Flip Vertical liliis 2 15 2 6 2 17 Edit 90 Clockwise lese III 2 15 2 6 2 18 Edit 90 CounterCW 0 n 2 16 2 6 2 19 Edit Set Sheet Size eee 2 16 2 6 2 20 Edit Set Title Block sese 2 16 2 6 2 21 Edit Description liliis 2 16 2 6 2 22 Edit User Preferences 00 cc ccc eee eee 2 16 2 6 2 23 Edit Global Restrictions 0 0 0 0 0 eee 2 16 2 6 2 24 Edit Circuit Restrictions 0 0 0 0 ee 2 16 View Menus is dva Sateen Raced Waa Sed ah EI reece wate debe 2 17 2 6 3 1 View Toolbar S mk e A UR d tabe ba aS a 2 17 2 6 3 2 View Status Bar pran i anane e Ea n 2 17 2 6 8 3 View Show Hide Simulation Error Log Audit Trail 2 17 2 6 8 4 View Show Hide Command Line Interface 2 17 2 6 3 5 View Show Hide Grapher liliis eese 2 17 2 6 3 6 View Show Simulate Switch o ooooo oooooooon 2 18 2 6 3 7 View Grid Visible lesse IIR 2 18 2 6 3 8 View Show Page Bounds 20000 eee eee e eee 2 18 2 6 3 9 View Show Title Block and Border 00 0000 eee 2 18 2 0 3 10 VieW GOolOF 5 84 eco eR CR BARCO Se EB P ne 2 18 216 311 VIeW ShoW essei an CREE EQ ERR ra eA 2 18 2 6 3 12 Vie W ZOOITI ddr epe ded d RE EE EXER LA ERE dre 2 18 2 6 3 13 View Find x palse d ene a a A alee
105. 2 Select the desired toolbar button file and click Open 3 The new toolbar button will be displayed on the Database Management screen in the But ton in Toolbar area gt To edit the default component toolbar button 1 With the desired component family selected click Edit 2 Your paint program is launched and the bitmap file of the button opened 3 Edit the bitmap file to your requirements and then save 4 The revised toolbar button will appear as the component toolbar button gt To delete a component family from the user or corporate library database 1 In the Database list choose the database from which you want to delete a component fam ily 2 In the Family list choose the component family that you want to delete 3 Click Delete You are prompted to confirm your deletion 4 To complete the delete process click OK You return to the Database Management screen gt To modify User Field Titles 1 Click Modify User Field Titles The Modify User Field Titles screen appears Modify User Field Titles x Tei favaiabity Te2 so mex Tes Titles 2 Enter the desired information in the Title fields 3 Click OK You return to the Database Management screen Electronics Workbench gt To delete empty families from the user or corporate library database 1 Click Delete Empty Families You are prompted to confirm your command to delete all empty family folders 2 To proceed click OK All empt
106. 3 Using Restrictions rn esed a eb d ee eee be ee a 13 3 Setting Global RestrictiONS ooooococcoccoocooo 13 4 Setting Circuit Restrictions oocooocconccror rens 13 6 Setting Passwords for Restrictions 2l 13 9 Remote Control Circuit Sharing Multisim User Guide xiii Chapter 14 RF About this Chapter satses a in e n e m aeai teens 14 1 Introduction to the Multisim RF Module lisse 14 1 Components N LL dte d ste aug 14 2 About RF Components 000 00 cee lh 14 2 Multisim s RF Components 0 0 0 cece nes 14 2 Theoretical Explanation of the RF Models 0c eee eee eee 14 3 Striplines Microstrips Waveguides llli 14 3 HF ResistorS ceo nie 2 Be See puer dece den s 14 5 HE Gapacitors o as dade a tec a une dre Ip RA Ru ate dx 14 5 HF Inductors ie eee eee RR exe en exe a dd Dac Pants 14 6 Active DeviceS neradi kka A a ee nennen 14 7 HF INStrument 22 232222 erase UR ERE Pe NEW READ RUNE MER LAT 14 9 Spectrum Analyzer a ia creer ce ehh hn 14 9 About the Spectrum Analyzer oococccccccc ee 14 9 Using Multisim s Spectrum Analyzer 00000 eee eee 14 9 Erequency Range oc eeu Re Rr re ERE x wid re ue 14 10 Frequency Spans Fos osei ra E a aa ren 14 10 Frequency Analysis ille 14 11 Amplitude Range serea m i aan EEA E A nes 14 12 Reference Level coer IE EVEIA A ER OA eee 14 12 Frequency Resolution 22222 een een eae 1
107. 3 From Circuit Window with Wire Selected Delete deletes the selected wire e Color changes the color of the selected wire from its default values Help opens the Multisim help file 3 32 Electronics Workbench Chapter 4 Components 4 1 Aboutthis Chapter 20 0 0 cts 4 1 4 2 Structure of the Component Database llli eese 4 1 4 2 1 Database Levels oi eeey aaiae ra a a een 4 1 4 2 2 Displaying Database Level Information llli eee eee 4 2 4 2 3 Classification of Components in the Database 000000 4 3 4 2 3 1 Component Families List 0 000 00000 cece eee eee 4 4 4 2 8 Sources Toolbar e reread n a eee 4 5 4 2 3 3 Basic Toolbar sta Da Si fete bee Metin eds Seine ee 4 7 4 2 8 4 Diodes Toolbar 000000 eee 4 9 4 2 3 5 Transistors Toolbar 0 0 ce eee 4 10 4 2 3 6 Analog Toolbar 4 12 42 9 7 T TE Toolbar ar ae one kd reg Rh tee Ra 4 13 4 2 3 8 CMOS Toolbar 000 c ects 4 14 4 2 3 9 Miscellaneous Digital Toolbar o ooooooooommmooo 4 15 4 2 3 10 Mixed Chips Toolbar 22 000 e eee 4 16 4 2 3 11 Indicators Toolbar 0 002 ce es 4 17 4 2 3 12 Miscellaneous Toolbar 0 0 00 eee 4 18 4 2 3 13 Controls Toolbar sr erar k a y a a a a 4 19 4 2 3 4 RF Toolbar 22i dtm nA ae 4 20 4 2 3 15 Electro mechanical Toolbar 0 0 00 e eee 4 20 4 3 Locating Components in the Database
108. 3TDN virtual MOS_3TDP virtual MOS_3TEN virtual MOS 4TDN MOS_3TEP virtual MOS_4TEN MOS_4TDP JFETN MOS_4TEP SPESE JFET N virtual GaAsFET_N JFET_P_virtual Power MOS N TE GaAsFET P Ik Power MOS COMP Jb Power MOS P Electronics Workbench Structure of the Component Database DIN BJT NPN Transistors BJT NPN virtual BJT PNP BJT_PNP virtual BJT_4T_NPN BJT_ ST PNP Darlington NPN x BJT_NRES BJT_Pres Darlington_PNP BJT_Array 1 IGBT MOS stn P JE Je MOS 3TDN virtual MOS 3TDP MOS 3TDP virtual MOS 3TEN JH MOS 3TEN virtual MOS 3TEP MOS 4TDN JE MOS 3TEP virtual MOS 4TEN jZ MOS 4TDP JEN MU MOS 4TEP JEU JFET N virtual GaAsFET N JFET P virtual Power MOS N GaAsFET P Jee Power_MOS_P Power MOS COMP E Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 11 sjueuodujoj5 Components Components 4 12 4 2 3 6 Analog Toolbar ANSI Analog M Opamp Norton Opamp Comparator Wide bandwidth amplifiers Special function DIN Opamp Norton Opamp Comparator Wide bandwidth amplifiers i SPECIAL Special function _ FUNC Note For details about
109. 4 13 Examples t tad Son he tau Po vata a ad 14 13 Network Analyzer vsu us vec eee eus yan ee Ee PR dea Ws 14 15 About the Network Analyzer sls 14 15 Using the Network Analyzer o o ooococcccooocon anna 14 16 Marker ControlS oocooccocccoococo ren 14 17 A E Ru PNEU Ur RE Pa bears ve 14 17 Format Cohtrols ume Rer ee Ba ES ER 14 17 Data Controls 54 xk gute reb nate RIEN Sadi lee E ea 14 18 Mode Controls iied akas ia E R a ae a E oE EEE 14 18 HF Analyses ranet e Ausser Ra ou e arent ue a ais 14 18 RF Characterizer Analysis 0 000 cece ees 14 18 Matching Network Analysis 2 liil ee 14 20 Noise Figure Analysis 0 0 rh 14 25 Noise Figure Analysis TabS ooocoooccocrcc ee 14 26 xiv Electronics Workbench RFE M del Makers a vau 22 34 22 22 Yan aaa zn Web bees alt cat dak 14 27 Wavegulde 23 2 1223 pb be pers dete ele bred i eR 14 27 Microstrip Eine ose pae ep adc eto e t CMT e M e a 14 28 Open End Microstrip Line o oooocococoococoo 14 29 RE Spital Ifiduetor zc ec nen 24 Weve ba Rene Deka Hr ES DO 14 31 Strip Line Model 2 0 000 cc tte 14 32 Stripline Benda m ve tea eae oe a Beek De eae a n 14 33 LOSSY ENE em RD e mtd e Bale RP BERN on line 14 34 Interdigital Capacitor 2 0 es 14 36 Tutorial Designing RF Circuits 1 2 0 0 es 14 37 Selecting Type of RF Amplifier auauua uaaa eee 14 38 Selecting an RF Transistor
110. 4 28 microstrip open end model 14 29 miscellaneous options tab about 8 6 model changing component 3 18 copying 5 27 creating See model creation loading 5 28 Electronics Workbench model creation by importing 5 28 module RF 14 1 Monte Carlo analysis 8 47 moving component 3 8 multimeter 6 19 internal settings of 6 22 signal mode 6 22 using ammeter measurement option 6 20 using decibel measurement option 6 21 using ohmmeter measurement option 6 21 using voltmeter measurement option 6 20 multiple instruments 6 4 multiple traces postprocessor 9 6 Multisim about 1 1 features 1 1 interface 2 2 N network analyzer 6 33 14 15 nodes assigning labels 3 23 noise analysis 8 19 noise figure analysis 14 18 numerical integration 7 8 O ohmmeter 6 21 oscilloscope about 6 24 channel settings 6 26 grounding 6 25 time base 6 25 trigger 6 27 output variables tab about 8 3 P package information 5 29 page borders displaying or hiding 3 2 page bounds showing 2 6 Multisim User Guide pages cut copy paste 8 63 using in analyses 8 56 using in postprocessor 9 7 parameter sweep analysis 8 31 passwords creating changing 13 9 phase 6 7 pin information 5 29 pins adding to symbols 5 23 placed components properties 3 16 placing components 3 4 3 8 PLD about 10 2 pole zero analysis 8 42 pop up menu 3 30 postprocessor about 9 1 9 2 9 8 basic steps 9 2 creating multiple traces 9 6 functions 9 8 pag
111. 5 2 6 6 2 Tools Edit Component 0 0c cee eee 2 25 2 6 6 3 Tools Copy Component 00 0 cece eee eee 2 26 2 6 6 4 Tools Delete Component 0000 cee eee eee 2 26 2 6 6 5 Tools Database Management 20000 e eee ee eae 2 26 2 6 6 6 Tools Update Models 0000s 2 26 2 6 6 7 Tools Remote Control Design Sharing isses 2 26 2 6 7 Window Menu oinen EEEE rre 2 26 2 6 7 1 Window Cascade s ccc eee 2 26 2 6 7 2 Window Tile lisse eh 2 26 2 6 7 3 Window Arrange Icons eres 2 27 2 6 7 4 Window open files llle 2 27 2 6 8 Help Menu u cei ek er DER or nU 2 27 2 6 8 1 Help Multisim HelP oooocccocccocccnocno 2 27 2 6 8 2 Help Multisim Reference liiis nennen nenn 2 27 2 6 8 3 Help Release Notes 0 00000 ccc eee ee eee 2 27 2 6 8 4 Help About Multisim l l 2 27 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 eoepelu Jasn User Interface Electronics Workbench Chapter 2 User Interface 2 1 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 About this Chapter This chapter explains the basic operation of the Multisim user interface and briefly describes all available Multisim commands Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your version of Multi sim Such features have an icon in the column next to their description 2 1 eoeueju Jasn User Interface User Interface 2 2 Introduction
112. 6 Transient Analysis 8 6 1 Aboutthe Transient Analysis In transient analysis also called time domain transient analysis Multisim computes the cir cuit s response as a function of time Each input cycle is divided into intervals and a DC anal ysis is performed for each time point in the cycle The solution for the voltage waveform at a node is determined by the value of that voltage at each time point over one complete cycle DC sources have constant values AC sources have time dependent values Capacitors and inductors are represented by energy storage models Numerical integration is used to calculate the quantity of energy transfer over an interval of time if initial conditions are set to be then automatically determined Multisim tries to start the simulation using the DC operating point as the initial condition If the simulation fails it uses user defined initial conditions based on the DC operating point Multisim first calculates the DC operating point of the circuit then uses that result as the initial conditions of the transient analysis zero the transient analysis starts from zero initial conditions user defined the analysis starts from initial conditions as set in the transient analysis screen Assumptions None Multisim User Guide 8 13 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 6 2 Setting Transient Analysis Parameters 8 14 Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and de
113. 7 10 2 6 VADE Simulation 25 eso aad a REDE Yu ue pa We DER 7 11 7 7 Verilog HDL Simulation liliis 7 11 Multisim User Guide UOHe NWIS Simulation Electronics Workbench Chapter 7 Simulation 7 1 7 2 1 About this Chapter This chapter explains the various types of simulation available in Multisim the application for which each type is appropriate how the types of simulation are used separately and together and finally some of the underlying logic of Multisim simulation Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your version of Multi sim Such features have an icon in the column next to their description Introduction to Simulation Simulation is a mathematical way of emulating the behavior of a circuit With simulation you can determine a circuit s performance without physically constructing the circuit or using actual test instruments Although Multisim makes simulation intuitively easy to use you should be aware that the technology underlying the speed and accuracy of the simulation as well as its ease of use is extremely complex For that reason explaining how Multisim per forms its simulation is beyond the scope of this manual What Type of Simulation Should Use The type of simulation that is appropriate for a circuit depends on the type of circuit and how you plan to physically implement it For example analog digital and mixed analog digital cir cuits to be built as
114. 7 Tutorial Designing RF Circuits This tutorial is intended to provide an introduction to simple RF circuit design demonstrate to engineers how to use Multisim for designing an RF circuit Each design step is accompanied by the required simulation steps in Multisim The methodology that an RF engineer uses to design an RF circuit differs from that used for a low frequency circuit design An RF designer looks at performance parameters such as S parameters input output impedances power gain noise figure and stability factor These design parameters are not directly available from a SPICE simulation Impedance matching is a phase of RF circuit designs where the designer uses a Smith Chart and calculates the values of matching elements such that maximum power is transferred to the load impedance The Smith Chart or the calculations are not provided by SPICE simulation Multisim User Guide 14 37 Ju RF RF 14 7 1 Selecting Type of RF Amplifier Select the type of amplifier based on the application Amplifiers designed for low power applications are different than those for low noise applications Similarly broad band amplifi ers are different in terms of design and structure than those for high gain amplifiers Some of the possible applications are Maximum Power Transfer These types of amplifiers operate in a very narrow band of frequencies Design for Specified Gain Designers may intentionally introduce mismatc
115. 8 8 8 3 6 Incomplete Analyses t aa cee ne 8 9 8 4 DC Operating Point Analysis llle ren 8 9 8 4 1 About the DC Operating Point Analysis 00 000 esee 8 9 8 4 2 Setting DC Operating Point Analysis Parameters 2 20 5 8 9 8 4 3 Troubleshooting DC Operating Point Analysis Failures 8 10 8 57 AC AnalysiS ai m sa ienaa erbe ende pd bote ede M verbi ee egets 8 11 8 5 1 About the AC Analysis 8 11 8 5 2 Setting AC Analysis Frequency Parameters 2 000e0eeaee 8 11 8 6 Transient Analysis enora oori E OEE E re 8 13 8 6 1 About the Transient Analysis nauau auaa aaa 8 13 8 6 2 Setting Transient Analysis Parameters 20000 cece eee eae 8 14 8 6 3 Troubleshooting Transient Analysis Failures o oo oooooooo 8 15 8 7 EourlerAnalysls tieu star braten beled Geek AA neu ns 8 16 8 7 1 About the Fourier Analysis llle 8 16 8 7 2 Setting Fourier Analysis Parameters 0000 0c cece eee eae 8 17 8 8 Noise Analysls ior qe et p eR wean oh Rew ER e De n rex 8 19 8 8 1 About the Noise Analysis lleeleeeleee eee 8 19 Multisim User Guide s s jeuy Analyses 8 9 8 10 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 19 8 20 8 21 8 8 2 Noise Analysis Example 00 0 0 cece eee 8 20 8 8 3 Setting Noise Analysis Parameters 000 cee eee eee 8 21 Distortion Analysis u Dee eres e RR Rom
116. Auto 6 12 4 3 Trigger Signal Triggering can be internal with reference to the input signal for channel A or B or external with reference to a signal through the external trigger terminal situated below the ground ter minal on the Oscilloscope icon If a flat signal is expected or if signals are to be displayed as soon as possible select Auto Multisim User Guide 6 27 Sjuoeuuny su Instruments Instruments The Sing button is used to make the oscilloscope trigger one pass when the trigger level is met Once the trace gets to the end of the scope face the trace will not change until you click Sing again The Nor button is used to make the oscilloscope refresh every time the trigger level is met 6 12 5 Using Cursors and Readouts To display the exact values of the wave drag the vertical cursor until the desired portion appears The boxes below the display show the time and the voltage at the probe connections where the vertical cursor intersects the sine wave and the difference between the two positions Once a circuit has been activated and its behavior simulated you may move the oscilloscope s probes to other nodes without re activating the circuit Moving the probes automatically redraws the waveforms for the new nodes If you fine tune the oscilloscope s settings either during or after simulation the display redraws automatically Note If the oscilloscope settings or analysis options are changed to provide
117. Do not change default of unchanging scheme for nonlinear model elements evaluation Turning off may increase simulation time MAXORD Maximum inte Sets the maximum order for 2 Use the default value for gration order integration when GEAR chosen most circuit simulation as transient analysis integration method Must be between 2 and 6 Using a higher order the oretically leads to more accu rate results but slows down simulation TEMP Operating tem Resets the temperature at 27 9c perature which the entire circuit will be simulated Setting in the Analy sis Parameters screen will override OLDLIMIT Use SPICE2 MOSfet limit ing ITL6 Stepsinsource Sets the number of steps in the 10 stepping algo Gmin stepping algorithm Helps rithm find a solution during a DC operating point analysis See 7 4 8 Convergence Assis tance Algorithms on page 7 9 for more information GMINSTEPS Number of Sets the number of steps in the 10 Gmin steps Gmin stepping algorithm Helps find a solution during the DC operating point analysis See 7 4 8 Convergence Assis tance Algorithms on page 7 9 for more information If a zero value is specified the Gmin stepping algorithm is disabled MINBREAK Minimum time 0 between breakpoints 8 68 Electronics Workbench Analysis Options NOOPITER Go directly to Gmin stepping METHOD Integration Selects for transient analysis TRAPE Use GEAR
118. Final value Base settings Log logarithmic Lin linear Initial value 6 5 2 1 Base Settings A logarithmic base is used when the values being compared have a large range as is generally the case when analyzing frequency response For example if measuring a signal s voltage gain the decibel value is calculated as follows dB 20 logi Va The base scale can be changed from logarithmic Log to linear Lin without the circuit being activated again Only when using a logarithmic scale is the resulting graph referred to as a Bode plot Multisim User Guide 6 7 sjuaun1su Instruments Instruments 6 5 3 6 8 6 5 2 2 Horizontal Axis Scale 1 mHz 999 9 GHz The horizontal or x axis always shows frequency Its scale is determined by the initial I and final F settings for the horizontal axis Since a frequency response analysis requires a large frequency range a logarithmic scale is often used Note When setting the horizontal axis scale the initial I frequency must be larger than the final F frequency Multisim will not let you set I smaller than F 6 5 2 3 Vertical Axis Scale The units and scale for the vertical axis depend on what is being measured and the base being used as shown in the table below When Measuring Using the Base oa a valde en Final Magnitude gain Logarithmic 200 dB 200 dB Magnitude gain Linear 0 10e 09 Phase Linear 720 720 When
119. From the RF component family toolbar click the RF BJT NPN bipolar transistor but ton The Browser screen appears 3 Scroll down in the component list until you find MRF927T1 and select it Component data for that component appears in the screen 4 Click OK The Product RF screen closes and your cursor changes to indicate a transistor is ready to be placed Electronics Workbench Tutorial Designing RF Circuits 5 Click to place the transistor on the circuit window The results look similar to this 91 MRF927T1 14 7 3 Selecting a DC operating Point DC operating point is referred to as Vce and Ic There are many reasons to select a specific DC operating point You need to consider maximum swing at the output small portable power source and gain bandwidth Some DC operating points are available in the data book and others must be decided based on the application Vce Settings Vce is always less than Vcc and it is usually around Vec 2 for maximum swing in a common emitter configuration For this tutorial Vce 3V and Vcc 9V are selected Ic Settings The nominal value of Ic for the selected transistor is 5mA The power dissipated in transistor at any time is Ic Vce For this tutorial Ic 3mA is selected to dissipate less power and to be close to the nominal value of Ic This will let us achieve relatively good current gain band width and moderate voltage gain The voltage gain is maximum at Ic 1mA and the current gai
120. HP3 1ueuoduio 5 Component Editor 5 To save your changes click OK To cancel them click Cancel 5 12 1 Pin Group Naming Convention For logical pins use the following formats For Use Where pins associated with one section of a compo GRP n nis the section nent pins common to several sections but not all GRP n m n and mare the sections sections pins common to all sections COM pins associated with voltages PWR VO VO is ground or or PWR Vn nis a voltage unused pins no connects NC 5 12 2 Pin Type Naming Convention For digital components the pin type is used to link together the I O models to the logical core for each device In other families such as analog components where the simulation models are self contained units pin types are for information purposes only Electronics Workbench Use the format TYPE MODE MODEL where Type is either A analog or D digital Mode is one of the following input output VO 3 state Open drain Open source Open sink l O open drain l O open source l O open sink Input ECL Output ECL lO ECL Terminator Power NC Model pin model name none for analog Multisim User Guide Rev 1 Jop 1ueuoduio5 Component Editor Electronics Workbench Chapter 6 Instruments 6 4 Aboutthis Chapter i oes vex ete esr ER ex RR RE Rm eee a 6 1 6 2 Introduction to the Multisim Instruments lille 6 1 6 3 Working w
121. JOHP3 1ueuoduio5 Component Editor 5 10 2 Creating and Editing a Component s Symbol with the Symbol Editor gt To edit a component symbol 1 2 Under the Symbol tab of the Component Properties screen from the Symbol Set drop down list be sure you have selected the desired symbol set ANSI or DIN whose symbol you would like to edit The appropriate symbol appears in the upper part of the screen Click Edit The Symbol Editor appears displaying the selected symbol for you to edit gt To create a new symbol for the component under the Symbol tab of the Component Proper ties screen click New The Symbol Editor appears with a blank screen and the three compo nent labels these are described in 5 10 2 4 Labels on page 5 21 The Symbol Editor looks like this Toolbar Menu bar symAnsi sym gt File Edit View SM cture Align Graphics Window Help Lela asl almeja 2 Palette Design space Status line The Symbol Editor screen consists of the menu bar which contains the menus with their associated commands the toolbar which gives quick access to some commonly used tools the design space which is where you build or modify your symbols the palette which provides quick access to the most common operations in the Symbol Editor the status line which gives information on the currently selected object or action Electronics Workbench The next sections describe the menus a
122. MultiSIM Schematic Capture Simulation amp Programmable Logic Educator User Guide clectronics WORKBENCH DESIGN SOLUTIONS FOR EVERY DESKTOP multiSIM and Electronics Workbench copyright 1989 1992 2000 Interactive Image Technologies Ltd All rights reserved All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Portions of this product are provided under license from e Green Mountain Computing Systems Metamor Inc ISBN 1 55169 088 8 Rev 1 2000 Interactive Image Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Published May 2000 Printed in Canada Preface Congratulations on choosing Multisim from Electronics Workbench We are confident that it will deliver years of increased productivity and superior designs Electronics Workbench is the world s leading supplier of circuit design tools Our products are used by more customers than those of any other EDA vendor so we are sure you will be pleased with the value delivered by Multisim and by any other Electronics Workbench products you may select Documentation Conventions When Multisim manuals refer to a toolbar button an image of the button appears in the left col umn The manuals show circuits in black and white although Multisim is configured to use color by default You can change the color scheme When you see the icon in the left column the functionality described is only avail
123. N 74F157AD 74F157AN 74F157N 74F158AD 74F158AN 74F158N 74F166AD 74F166AN 74F161AD 74F161AN 74F162AD 74F162AN 74F163AD 74F163AN 74F169D 74F169N 74F174D 74F174N 75F175D 74F175N 74F181N 74F182D 74F182N 74F190D 74F191D 74F191N 74F192D 74F193D 74F193N 74F194D 74F20D 74F26N 74F21D 74F240D 74F240N 74F241D 74F242D 74F242N 74F243D Electronics Workbench Structure of the Component Database 4 2 3 2 Sources Toolbar ANSI Sources Ground DC voltage source DC current source mi AC current source AM source FM current source Voltage controlled voltage source Voltage controlled current source Voltage controlled sine wave __ Voltage controlled triange_ e wave Piecewise linear voltage 1 source Pulse voltage source Polynomial source Exp current source TT Controlled one shot Th Multisim User Guide Rev 1 Digital ground VCC voltage source AC voltage source Clock source FM voltage source FSK source Current controlled volt age source Current controlled current source Voltage controlled square wave Voltage controlled piece wise linear source Piecewise linear current source Pulse current source Exp voltage source Nonlinear dependent source 4 5 sjuauodwo5 Components Components 4 6 DIN Sources F3 Ground Digital ground DC voltage source DC current source p mm VCC voltage source AC vo
124. Restrictions on page 13 3 Touse the instrument 1 To view and modify an instrument s controls double click its icon The instrument con trols appear Make any necessary changes to the control settings just as you would on their real world equivalents The control settings are different for each instrument so if you are unfamiliar with them or need instruction refer to the section on that particular instrument in this chapter It is critical that the control settings be appropriate for your circuit If the settings are incorrect this may cause the simulation results to appear incorrect or difficult to read Note Not all areas of the open instrument are modifiable A hand appears when your cursor is on a control that can be modified 2 To activate the circuit click the Simulate button on the Design Bar and choose Run zx Stop from the pop up menu that appears Multisim begins to simulate the circuit s behav ior and the signals as measured at the points to which you have connected the instrument are displayed The simulation results depend on the circuit s construction During simulation messages about the simulation results and any problems with the simulation are written to the simu lation error log audit trail The error log audit trail appears automatically when you stop the simulation If you want to keep an eye on the progress of the simulation you can dis play the error log audit trail during simulation To displ
125. S through the Network Analyzer instrument and are described in 14 4 2 Network Analyzer on page 14 15 8 50 Electronics Workbench Batched Analyses 8 19 Batched Analyses You can batch together different analyses or different instances of the same analysis to be SN performed in sequence This provides a convenient way for advanced users to perform multi ple analyses from a single interpreted command For example you might use batched analyses to repeatedly perform the same set of analyses such as when trying to fine tune a circuit prepare demonstrations of circuit principles for educational purposes e build a record of the analyses that you performed on the circuit e setup a sequence of long analyses to run automatically gt To set up batched analyses 1 Choose Analysis Batched Analyses The Batched Analyses screen appears This is the list of Available analyses Analyses To Perform analyses that could be added to the batch Run Circuit Directly Run Circuit Directly 4 User Defined Analysis amp Run Circuit Directly 5 ti Run Circuit Directly 6 AC Analysis Transient Analysis gt Add analysis gt This is the list of analyses to be performed in the batch To see summary infor mation about an analysis click the beside the analysis Distortion Analysis Parameter Sweep Temperature Sweep Pole Zero Transfer Function Edit Analysis Delete A
126. See 5 11 Creating or Editing a Component Model on page 5 25 for more information on editing model data Alternatively you can copy a model whose model template matches what you want More information on copying models is given in 5 11 1 Copying a Component s Model on page 5 27 Thirdly you can import or load an existing model by clicking Load Model from File These options are described in more detail in 5 11 2 Loading an Existing Model on page 5 28 Finally depending on your version of Multisim you can create your own model using the Model Maker command Procedures for using the Model Makers are given in 5 13 Creating a Component Model Using the Model Makers on page 5 33 Note If you choose to edit a model s data or template directly be very careful when entering information Making a typing error or removing a character by mistake could cause the model to function improperly Unless you are experienced at creating editing models it is recommended that you copy a model that has the same Template information you require Electronics Workbench 5 11 1 Copying a Component s Model gt To copy the model information from an existing component 1 Click Select from DB The Select Model Data screen appears Select the database level you want to Select Component Select Model Data x choose a model Database fme Name me Select the compo Family nent family name SI ms y T4ALS l Z 5 manufacturer m
127. The Miscellaneous Options Tab The options on this tab provide you with additional flexibility but do not require that you set them Use this tab to set a title for the analysis results to check if the circuit is valid for analy sis and to set custom analysis options Ac Analysis The title appears on the plot produced by the analysis and is recorded in the audit trail To set custom analysis options enable this option and click this button To check if the circuit is valid for analysis enable this option To change the analysis title from its default enter text in the Title for analysis field To check if the circuit is a valid circuit for analysis enable Perform consistency check before starting analysis This option automatically identifies inconsistencies such as open capacitors empty circuit files and ungrounded circuits Normally analyses run without further intervention If an analysis does not perform as neces sary you may need to set custom analysis options gt To set custom analysis options 1 Enable Use custom analysis options Note You should have a general knowledge of the SPICE simulation engine before altering the default settings under this option Electronics Workbench Working with Analyses 2 Click Analysis Options A list of the possible analysis options appears Analysis Options Print simulation statistics Minimum conductance Relative error tolerence Absolut
128. The Print Preview screen offers the following toolbar Moves from page to Zooms in or out on page in a multi page the image WES 7 X Next Page Prey Page Two Page Zoom In Zoom Gut Close Sends the pre Toggles between Closes the Print viewed image to the showing one page or Preview window printer two pages at a time Electronics Workbench Placing a Bus 3 14 Placing a Bus Buses are a set of parallel paths in your schematic that are used to connect one group of pins to another group of pins over a similar path When implemented on a PCB for example a bus may in fact be a single piece of copper or series of cables carrying several binary bits repre senting a digital word in parallel To place a bus in your circuit 1 Choose Edit Place Bus 2 Click on the first point for the bus 3 Click on the next point for the bus 4 Continue to click on points until the bus is complete 5 Double click to mark the ending point of the bus The bus is drawn in the same color as set for virtual components Click at each us location of the bus 6 Wire the bus into your circuit by dragging a wire to any location on the bus The Node Name screen appears Node Name x Bus iE 0 7 If necessary change the name shown this name is appended to the word Bus to form the node name and click OK To change the color of the bus right click on it and choose Color from the pop up menu that appe
129. Transfer Function Analysis Parameters Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and decide on an output node a refer ence node and an input source Transfer Function Analysis Parameters are set in the following screen Transfer Function Analysis Choose a voltage or current source For Voltage only point in circuit for which you want to see results JUtBUGSGUTGE For Voltage only reference voltage Transfer function analysis produces a chart showing the transfer function output input input resistance at the input source and output resistance across the output voltage nodes or at the output variable Multisim User Guide 8 37 s s jeuy Analyses Analyses Setting Transfer Function Analysis Parameters for Normal Use For normal use you only need to choose an input source from the Input source drop down list enable Voltage and select an output node from the Output node drop down list and an output reference node usually ground or node 0 from the Output reference drop down list enable Current and select a source current from the Output source drop down list For more advanced use a source current as well as output node voltage can be used for this analysis Setting Transfer Function Analysis Parameters for Advanced Use You can filter the variables displayed to include internal nodes such as nodes inside a BJT model or inside a SPICE subcircuits open pins as well as output variab
130. Use to edita The symbol assigned symbol to this component if any This is what will appear when this com ponent is placed on the circuit window Useto create a new symbol Use to copy a symbol from one compo nent to another Click to ignore changes to a symbol and continue using the original one The symbol set ANSI or DIN of the displayed symbol m component s Electronics Workbench 5 10 1 Copying a Component s Symbol gt To copy a symbol from another component 1 From the Component Properties screen click Select From Database The Select Symbol Data screen appears Select Component Select Symbol Data x r Database Name MultiSIM Master Family Name 74ALS 3 Po H Component Name 74ALS00M A poro gt 2 Use the drop down lists to identify the component whose symbol you want to copy and click Select Click Exit to cancel You return to the Component Properties screen where the symbol associated with the selected component appears 3 If you want to change the symbol set to be associated with this component select ANSI or DIN from the Symbol Set drop down list The appropriate symbol appears in the upper part of the screen 4 To confirm the association of this symbol with your component click Save Tf desired you can also edit the copied symbol using the Symbol Editor as described in the following sections Multisim User Guide Rev 1
131. X Conductor length Conductor width lt Strip Line Model gt lt Strip Line Model gt Electronics Workbench RF Model Makers 14 6 6 Stripline Bend For the Stripline Bend models enter values in the two tabs shown below Use the following diagram for assistance in identifying the values refer to the Stripline diagram in 14 6 5 Strip Line Model on page 14 32 for Relative dielectric constance e Dielectric thickness and Conductor thickness Stripline con ductor width T Bend angle Multisim User Guide 14 33 du RF lt Stripline Bend Model gt lt Stripline Bend Model gt 14 6 7 Lossy Line For Lossy Line models enter values in the two tabs shown below Use the following catalogue excerpt for assistance in identifying the values 14 34 Electronics Workbench RF Model Makers 50 Ohm Transmission Cable RG 188A U QPL Phase velocity en 26 AWG 1 800 BELDEN 1 Characteristic m AWG strano Nom vel i Trade Number Units Type dia Core ui Shields Imp of Nom impedance Industry Stds Abs Nom D C R Nom oD Nom 5 2S R ohms Prop Cap 14 26 7 0067 058 in a 69 5 6 4 SCCCS 0 02 in 124 84 1 ohms 8 5 ohms 29 2 prit Line length Metric 27 9 ohmskm Description Nominal atten uation lower Insulation bound Plenum n a Version s Attenuation
132. a Mn Adv Search gt ommon Parameters List of components Thermal Resistance Junction fo 00 Cancel that matched the Thermal resistance Case po search criteria Power E po Derating Knee Point o 00 Details of the Min Operating Temperature om compon ent Max Operating Temperature m 00 selected from ESD o 00 the list From the Component drop down list select the component you are interested in To view information about any component found by the search simply choose it from the drop down list and the display fields change accordingly 5 To place the selected component click OK You return to the circuit window where you can place the component by clicking the desired location on the screen Toreturn to the Browser screen click Back or Cancel 4 4 Types of Information Stored for Components The Multisim database stores information about components in pre defined fields that is fields that are pre filled in Multisim and user fields that is fields you can use to capture information that you want to record about a component Both types of information appear in the Browser and Search screens User fields only appear if you have the Project Team Design module Multisim also offers a detailed report of information about components their models and their packages Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 23 sjueuodujoj5 Components Components gt To see this report Fro
133. a PCB are in general best simulated with a SPICE simulation Digital cir cuits to be implemented in Programmable Logic Devices are usually simulated at the behavioral language level most commonly with VHDL or Verilog HDL See Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic for details Multisim User Guide 7 1 uoneinwig Simulation Simulation For very complex digital devices LSI or VLSI chips such as microprocessors or memory SPICE models are not usually practical and in these cases VHDL or Verilog HDL is the pre ferred solution 7 2 2 What Kind of Simulation Does Multisim Support Multisim offers multiple simulators optimized to meet the needs of various types of circuit designs and implementation These simulators include e SPICE including specialized RF simulation VHDL e Verilog HDL e Co simulation of all three together When designing with programmable logic devices such as Field Programmable Gate Arrays FPGAs or Complex Programmable Logic Devices CPLDs VHDL or Verilog HDL simu lators have traditionally been used separately from each other and from SPICE With Multi sim these simulators can be also used in combination For example to simulate a PCB designed using Multisim s schematic capture front end Multisim uses SPICE for most of the simulation that is components will use SPICE models and VHDL or Verilog HDL for mod eling the most complex digital parts including programmable devices all brought to
134. a node T1 NLT PQ 4 16 System generated node number Tip If the connection was not successful you may be trying to place the wire too close to other surrounding components Try to make the connection at a slightly different loca tion or use manual wiring as described in the following section For information on changing the color of the wire see 3 6 6 Controlling Wire Color on page 3 14 Note Aftera wire is connected between two pins the cursor returns to its normal mode and is ready for your next command gt To delete a wire click on it and press DELETE or right click on it and choose Delete from the pop up menu that appears Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 11 eunjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 3 6 2 Wiring Components Manually To wire two components together manually 1 Click on a pin from the first component to start the connection your pointer turns into a sign and drag A wire appears attached to your cursor 2 Control the flow of the wire by clicking on points as you drag Each click fixes the wire to that point For example ei The mouse button was I A clicked at these loca 1 0F i tions R1 rn 1 0kohm By default Multisim skips over avoids components to which it is not connected For example The wire skips this v4 component E 42V gt Sh 1 0F 1 0kohm To pass through intermediary components instead position the wire
135. a point acquired for the circuit Ini tially the frequency points are selected in decade The default frequency sweep range is between 1 MHz and 10 GHz You can also use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keyboard keys to navigate the data set 14 4 2 4 Trace Controls Use the Trace buttons to show and hide each individual trace on the chart When the network analyzer is opened S11 and S22 are shown in the trace area The trace buttons change depending on what parameter or analysis is being looked at The possible sets in Measure ment mode are S11 12 S21 S22 Z11 Z12 Z21 Z22 H11 H12 H21 H22 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 K IAI The possible sets in RF Characterizer mode are P G T P G A P G V G and Zin Zout For more about these modes see 14 4 2 7 Mode Con trols on page 14 18 14 4 2 5 Format Controls Parameter Options Select the set of parameters to be displayed on the chart The parameters available depend on the network analyzer s mode In Measurement mode you can choose from S Y H Z parameters and stability factors K and IAI In RF Characterizer mode select from Power gains Voltage gains and Impedances Format Buttons Use these buttons to display data using different chart formats The formats available depend on the selected parameter group Use the Scale button to change the scaling of the current chart Only Polar plot Real Imagi nary plot and Magnitude Phase plot can be c
136. able in certain version of Multisim or to users who have purchased add in modules Multisim manuals use the convention Menu Item to indicate menu commands For example File Open means choose the Open command from the File menu Multisim manuals use the convention of an arrow gt to indicate the start of procedural infor mation Multisim manuals use the construction CTRL KEY and ALT KEY to indicate when you need to hold down the Ctrl or Alt key on your keyboard and press another key The Multisim Documentation Set Multisim documentation consists of a Getting Started and Tutorial manual this User Guide and on line help All Multisim users receive PDF versions of the Getting Started and Tutorial manual and the User Guide Depending on your version of Multisim you may also receive a printed version of the manuals Getting Started and Tutorial The Getting Started and Tutorial manual introduces you to the Multisim interface It also offers an introductory tutorial that takes you through the stages of circuit design simulation analysis and reporting User Guide The User Guide describes Multisim and its many functions in detail The manual is organized based on the stages of circuit design and explains all aspects of using Multisim in detail On Line Help Multisim offers a full help file system to support your use of the product Choose Help Multisim Manual to display the help file that explains the Multisim pro
137. active circuit window Tip To select all but a few items use the Select All command and then deselect the ones you don t want by CTRL clicking 2 6 2 15 Edit Flip Horizontal Alt X Flips the selection horizontally For details see 3 8 Rotating Flipping Components on page 3 15 2 6 2 16 Edit Flip Vertical Alt Y Flips the selection vertically For details see 3 8 Rotating Flipping Components on page 3 15 2 6 2 17 Edit 90 Clockwise Ctrl R Rotates the selection 90 degrees clockwise For details see 3 8 Rotating Flipping Compo nents on page 3 15 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 15 eoepeju Jasn User Interface User Interface 2 6 2 18 Edit 90 CounterCW Shift Ctrl R Rotates the selection 90 degrees counter clockwise For details see 3 8 Rotating Flipping Components on page 3 15 2 6 2 19 Edit Set Sheet Size Sets the sheet size on which the circuit is designed Choose from the drop down list and mod ify settings orientation and size if necessary For details see 3 3 1 Setting up a Sheet Size on page 3 2 2 6 2 20 Edit Set Title Block Lets you enter data to appear in the circuit s title block For details see 3 11 3 Adding a Title Block on page 3 23 2 6 2 21 Edit Description Opens a window in which you can enter comments or information about the circuit For details see 3 11 4 Adding Miscellaneous Text on page 3 24 2 6 2 22 Edit User Preferences Ctrl U Lets y
138. age of a circuit with both AC and DC components connect an AC voltmeter as well as a DC voltmeter across the appropriate nodes and mea sure the AC and DC voltage The following formula can be used to calculate RMS voltage when both AC and DC components are in the circuit Be advised that this is not a universal formula and should be used in conjunction with Multisim only RMS voltage J Va Vac 6 10 3 Internal Settings 6 22 Ideal meters have no effect on the circuit being measured An ideal voltmeter would have infi nite resistance so no current could flow through it while it is attached to a circuit An ideal ammeter would present no resistance to a circuit Real meters do not achieve this ideal so their readings will very closely match theoretical calculated values for a circuit but never with absolute precision The multimeter in Multisim like a real multimeter is nearly ideal It uses very small and very large numbers that approximate zero and infinity to calculate near ideal values for the circuit For special cases however the meter s behavior can be changed by changing these values used to model its effect on the circuit The values must be higher than 0 For example if testing the voltage of a circuit with very high resistance increase the voltme ter s resistance If measuring the current of a circuit with very low resistance decrease the ammeter s resistance even further Electronics Workbench Networ
139. al nodes such as nodes inside a BJT model or inside a SPICE subcircuit open pins as well as output variables from any sub mod ules contained in the circuit To filter the variables displayed 1 Click Change Filter The Filter Nodes screen appears 2 Enable one or more settings 3 Click OK DC and AC Sensitivity Analyses 8 11 1 About the Sensitivity Analyses Sensitivity analyses help to identify the components which affect a circuit s DC bias point the most This will focus efforts on reducing the sensitivity of the circuit to component variations and or drift or it may provide evidence that a design is too conservative and that less expen sive components with more variation and or drift may be used Sensitivity analyses calculate the sensitivity of an output node voltage or current with respect to the parameters of all components DC sensitivity or one component AC sensitivity in your circuit Sensitivity analyses produce the relevant parameters with their original values and their sensitivities Sensitivity is expressed as the change in output per unit change of input both in values and percentages Multisim User Guide 8 27 sos A euy Analyses Analyses Both analyses calculate the change produced in an output voltage or current by perturbing each parameter independently The results of the DC sensitivity analysis are sent to a table whereas the AC sensitivity analysis plots the AC graphs for each parameter of the
140. al property is best met Note The operating frequency to achieve the best unilateral property for the amplifier does not necessarily coincide with the maximum gain for the circuit The unilateral gain cir cles are developed to identify the best load and source impedances to minimize the error due to unilateral assumption and maintain a satisfactory level of gain The gain circles are also used for a trade off between the gain and the bandwidth Wide Band Amplifier gt To design a wide band amplifier first find the maximum gain delivered by the circuit Double click the network analyzer icon on the circuit window From the Mode drop down list select RF characterizer Read the value of TPG transducer power gain or Gr This value is printed in dB From the Mode drop down list select Match Net Designer From the Match Net Designer screen click the Unilateral Gain Circles tab Qv m opu VEIT Ed Change the value of Gs and Gl manually and individually until the circles become a dot on the Smith Chart 7 Calculate the maximum transferable power Gmax Gs dB TPG dB Gl dB Multisim User Guide 14 23 du RF RF 14 24 The maximum gain is achieved only for a narrow band Since the slightest change in the cir cuit component would change its performance the maximum gain is not achievable in reality For a wider band of frequency use a gain of less than the maximum Knowing the level of gain you want to achie
141. all signal Digital pins are treated as large resistances to ground 8 16 2 Setting Pole Zero Analysis Parameters Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and decide on input and output nodes positive and negative The input nodes are the positive and negative points in the circuit which are the transfer function inputs Likewise the output nodes are the positive and nega tive points in the circuit which are the transfer function outputs You can use 0 ground for both positive nodes or both negative nodes Pole Zero Analysis Parameters are set in this screen 0 Analysis output voltage input volt age Impedance Analysis output voltage input current Input Type Impedance voltage current as 9 e seen from the input terminals 2 impedance Analysis output voltage input current Output Impedance voltage cur ee C Output Impedence rent as seen from the output termi nals Nodes Analysis Parameters Miscellaneous Options Summary a Input 7 Change Filter Choose input nodes on opposite _ 7 da sides of the input Input 7 y __Change Fiter Output 7 E Change Filter Choose output nodes on opposite Ti Output PS Change Fite sides of the output Analyses performed Pole And Zero Analysis b Choose analyses to be performed Pole Analysis finds poles of transfer function Zero Analysis finds zeros Desciesion of transfe
142. along that axis For example choose the Bottom Axis tab to zoom along the horizontal dimension Check the Traces tab to see which axis is used for the range you want to zoom Graph Properties Type a new minimum and maximum S gt To restore a graph to its original scale click the Restore button 8 25 4 Title gt To apply a title to a graph 8 60 1 2 3 4 Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it Click the Properties button The Graph Properties screen appears Choose the General tab Type a new title To change the title s font click the Font button Electronics Workbench Working with Graphs 8 25 5 Axes You can change several characteristics of a graph s axes from the four axes tabs in the Graph Properties screen The options are identical in each of the tabs General Left Axis Bottom Axis Right Axis Top Axis Traces m Label Label m Eont Axis M Enabled Pen Size o Bros Font r Scale Linear Logarithmic Decibels Octave Autorange m Range Minimum f 0 684712652755013 Maximum o4 647089017432 m Divisions Number 3 Frequency 3 Precision a E Scale fi gt To change the characteristics of an axis 1 Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it xl 2 Click the Properties button The Graph Properties screen appears 3 Click the axis tab for the axis you want to change 4 Change any of the axis characteristics
143. als fills up with the necessary combinations of ones and zeros to fulfill the input conditions The values in the output column on the right are initially set to 0 2 Edit the output column to specify the desired output for each input condition To change an output value click on it to move among the three possible settings 0 1 and x an x indicates that either 1 or 0 is acceptable To convert a truth table to a Boolean expression click the Truth Table to Boolean Expres sion Zelt AB button The Boolean expression is displayed at the bottom of the logic converter To convert a truth table to a simplified Boolean expression or to simplify an existing Boolean colo Ip AB bos expression click the Simplify The simplification is performed by the Quine McCluskey method rather than the more famil jar Karnaugh mapping technique Karnaugh mapping works for only small numbers of vari ables and requires human intuition while Quine McCluskey has proved to be exhaustive for any number of variables but is too cumbersome for manual solutions Note Simplifying a Boolean expression requires substantial memory If not enough memory is available Multisim may not be able to complete this operation Entering and Converting a Boolean Expression A Boolean expression can be entered in the box at the bottom of the logic converter using either sum of products or product of sums notation To convert a Boolean e
144. also export simulation results to programs such as MathCAD and Excel For details on the functions associated with this but ton see Chapter 12 Transfer Communication Customizing the Interface About User Preferences You can customize virtually any aspect of the Multisim interface including the toolbars the colors used in your circuit page size zoom factor time for autosave symbol set ANSI or DIN and printer setup Your customization settings are saved individually with each circuit file you use so you could for example have one color scheme for one circuit and another for a different circuit You can also override the settings for individual instances for example change one particular component from red to orange or for the entire circuit To change settings for the current circuit only you generally right click on the circuit window and select an option from the pop up menu To change the default settings to be used for all subsequent circuits you use the Edit User Preferences command Any newly created circuit will use these settings Electronics Workbench Customizing the Interface 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display You can control the way your circuit and its components appear on the screen and the level of detail which appears gt To set the default circuit display options for subsequent circuits choose Edit User Prefer ences The User Preferences screen appears offering you four tabs of options wit
145. alyses 8 22 On the analysis parameters tab specify input noise reference source output node reference node Setting Noise Analysis Parameters for Advanced Use On the analysis parameters tab you can specify how often the noise contributions of each noise generating device are produced by enabling Set points per summary and entering a value Setting Noise Analysis Frequency Parameters Noise Analysis Frequency Parameters are set in the following screen Noise Analysis x Analysis Parameters Frequency Parameters Output variables Miscellaneous Options Summary Start frequency for the sweep 18 Start frequency FSTART fi Hz v Stop frequency FSTOP fi 0 GHz y End frequency for the sweep E values weep type Decade lumber of points per decade fi 0 Choose from Decade Linear Vertical scale Decibel Reset to default Octave For linear number of frequency points between start and end fre quencies Choose from Logarithmic Linear Decibel Octave Description Setting Noise Analysis Frequency Parameters for Normal Use The default settings on the Frequency Parameters tab are appropriate for most cases You just need to define a frequency range by typing a value in the Start Frequency field and in the Stop Frequency field Once the required variables are selected and the frequency range has been defined you can then run the analysis Electronics Workbench Distorti
146. ange is the range of frequencies over which the spectrum analyzer will analyze signals There are two frequencies that you manually set f start minimum value 1kHz is entered in the Start field and f end maximum value of 4 Ghz is entered in the End field Zero frequency is not allowed for any of the frequency settings 14 4 1 4 Frequency Spans This parameter indicates the following frequency range to be displayed Span Control Set Span Zero Span Full Span If Full Span is selected the entire instrument range which is 1kHz to 4GHz is displayed If Zero Span is selected a single frequency defined by the Center field is displayed If Set span is selected the frequency span is determined using either span control or fre quency control as explained in 14 4 1 5 Frequency Analysis on page 14 11 Electronics Workbench RF Instruments 14 4 1 5 Frequency Analysis There are two methods to select the frequency range span control frequency control Span Control This technique sets the span and the center frequencies i e f center and f span To set the span and the center frequencies click Enter in the Frequency area of the instru ment s display to automatically calculate the values of f start and f end using the following expressions f start f center f span 2 f end f center f span 2 Frequency Control You can define the starting and ending frequencies manually In order to do
147. anized component groupings and detailed information fields Database Levels Components are stored in a database made up of three levels the Multisim master level stores the components as originally designed by Electronics Workbench and shipped with Multisim these remain the same for all users of Multisim the corporate library level available only for users with the Project Team Design mod ule stores components selected and possibly modified or created by an individual user these remain available to any other selected users the user level stores components modified imported or created by you these are avail able only to you Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 1 sjuseuodwoy Components Components 4 2 2 4 2 The user and corporate library levels of the database are empty when you first use Multi sim You can use the user level to store frequently used components favorite components or components that you create or import using Component editing which is described in the fol lowing chapter The corporate library level of the database available only for users with the Project Team Design module is primarily intended for companies or individuals who work on projects where components with specific attributes are shared within a group or project It can be set up by your company or if you wish by Electronics Workbench Contact us for more informa tion about this service If you modify a
148. ansfer Export Simulation Results to MathCAD 00 2 25 Transfer Export Simulation Results to Excel 0 0000 cee eee 2 25 Transfer Export Netlist llle 2 25 Tools Meli m e a c Up ehe br M ne qe Cete de eda 2 25 Tools Create Component 0 00 eee 2 25 Tools Edit Component 00 00 2 25 Tools Copy Component ooo 2 26 Tools Delete Component 0 000 cee eee nn 2 26 Tools Database Management 0 00 cece eee eee eee 2 26 Tools Update Models 0 000 cece eee 2 26 Tools Remote Control Design Sharing 20 0 cece eee eee 2 26 Window Menu cosin err Rede eb ee aad bared en 2 26 Window Cascade ooocooocc nennen nennen 2 26 Window Tile nehm rad exem ar Pn eek 2 26 Window Arrange Icons ssssssseee ees 2 27 Window open files llle 2 27 Help Menus vetet aa ind hale x Rt ERE NIS at WR ae ratae 2 27 Help Multisim HelD o oocccoccccccoc RI nn 2 27 Help Multisim Reference 2 222222 eee eee eee essen 2 27 Help Release Notes 0 00 e eee teens 2 27 Help About Multisim 0 2 0 0 0000 tees 2 27 Chapter 3 Schematic Capture About this Chapter 0000s 3 1 Introduction to Schematic Capture 0 3 1 Multisim User Guide iii Setting up Your Circuit Window llle RII II 3 1 Setting up a Sheet Size l l leere 3 2 Displaying or Hiding the Grid Title Block and Page Borders
149. ant gain less than the maximum possible gain for better fre quency response 1 2 Open the DC biased transistor circuit discussed previously Open the network analyzer and change settings as follows select RF Characterizer from the Mode drop down list select Power Gain from the Parameter drop down list select dB MAG from the Marker drop down list setthe frequency to 3 02 GHz click TPG Transducer Power Gain under Trace and set its value to 4 3652 dB for our example From the Mode drop down list select Match Net Designer and in the Match Net designer screen click Unilateral Gain Circles Change the value of Gs and Gl manually and individually until the circles become a dot on the Smith Chart The example shows Gs 0 042 dB and Gl 1 2650 dB Electronics Workbench Tutorial Designing RF Circuits 5 Calculate the maximum transferable power Pmax 0 042 4 3652 1 2650 5 6722 dB 6 Select the gain desired This gain should be less than 5 6752 dB 3 5302 dB was selected as the power gain 7 Choose Gs and Gl so that Gs 4 3652 G12 3 5302 dB and Gs 0 042 dB and Gl lt 1 2650 dB You selected Gs 0 08350 dB and Gl 0 dB 8 Enter the selected values for Gs and Gl and observe the circles Select point or points on the circles which are closest to the center of the Smith Chart The circle for Gl 0 dB always passes through the center Therefore the best point of the Gl is the ce
150. appears 2 Select the file you want to open Graph files have the file extension gra 3 Click Open To save a graph file 1 Click the Save button A file browser appears 2 Selecta file you want to overwrite or type a new filename Graph files have the file exten sion gra The file extension is automatically added 3 Click Save Print and Print Preview gt To view the printed pages before you print 1 Click the Print Preview button One or two pages appear in the window Use Next Page and Prev Page to scroll through the pages Use One Page Two Page to toggle between viewing one or two pages at a time Use Zoom In Zoom Out to control the zoom on the pages Electronics Workbench Analysis Options 2 Click the Print button to open the print screen and print the pages amp Or Click Close to close print preview gt To print pages 1 Click the Print button on the toolbar or from the print preview The print screen appears 2 If desired enable Print to file 3 Choose a print range 4 Choose the number of copies 5 Enable Collate if required 6 Click OK Printed graphs indicate a key to the line colors or styles for black and white printers and label the names of all traces Note Colored lines are distinguished through different line styles for black and white print ers 8 29 Analysis Options Multisim lets you control many aspects of the simulation used within the analyses such as resettin
151. ar click the button of the instrument you want to use Move the cursor which a small icon with an arrow indicating the left most connection point to the location on the circuit window where you want to place the instrument and click The instrument icon and the instrument identifier appear The instrument identifier identifies the type of instrument and its instance For example the first multimeter you place on a circuit is called XMM1 the second is XMM2 and so on This numbering is unique within each circuit That is if you create a second circuit the first multimeter placed in it is XMM1 and so on 6 2 Electronics Workbench Introduction to the Multisim Instruments Note Not all Multisim versions support multiple instances of an instrument 4 To wire the instrument into the circuit click on a terminal on the instrument s icon and drag the wire to the desired location in the circuit a pin wire or junction All the rules for component wiring described in Chapter 3 Schematic Capture apply to instruments as well Note To change the color of the Instrument icon right click on it and choose Color from the pop up menu that appears Choose the desired color and click OK For educational purposes you may wish to prevent students from being able to to place instru ments on the circuit window You can restrict students access to the Instruments tool bar by using restrictions as described in 13 4 Using
152. ars To change the reference ID of the bus by default Multisim gives it the reference ID bus double click the bus and change the reference ID in the properties screen that appears Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 29 eunjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 3 15 Using the Pop up Menu 3 15 1 From Circuit Window with no Component 3 30 Selected If you right click on the circuit window with no component selected a pop up menu of appro priate commands appears These commands are Command Description Place Component Lets you browse the entire database Multisim master level corpo rate library level and user level for components to be placed For details see 3 5 1 Choosing a Component and Using the Browser Screen on page 3 4 Place Junction Places a connector when you click For details see 3 7 Manually Adding a Junction Connector on page 3 14 Place Bus Places a bus with segments created as you click For details see 3 14 Placing a Bus on page 3 29 Place Input Output Places an input output node to connect a subcircuit to the current cir cuit For details see 3 12 3 Adding Subcircuits to a Circuit on page 3 27 Place Text Lets you place text on the circuit For details see 3 11 4 Adding Mis cellaneous Text on page 3 24 Paste as Subcircuit Macro Places an external circuit within the current circuit For details see 3 12 3 Adding Subci
153. ase Multisim divides components into logical groups each represented by a Parts Bin Each Parts Bin contains families of related components The Parts Bins are listed below e Sources Basic e Diodes Transistors Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 3 sjueuodujoj5 Components Components Analog ICs TTL e CMOS Miscellaneous Digital ICs Mixed Chips Indicators Miscellaneous Controls RF for users with RF module Electro mechanical Each toolbar has two versions ANSI American standard and DIN European standard The two standards use different icons to represent the components Both are shown in the sections that follow Note The content of the toolbars may change as the database expands To switch between ANSI and DIN symbol sets choose Edit User Preferences In the Prefer ences tab select the standard you wish to use 4 2 3 1 Component Families List To see the contents of any family 1 From the Browser screen that appears when you are placing a component click List Report 2 A Notepad window appears listing all the components stored within the currently selected family For example amp j ListReportFile dat Notepad Jol x File Edit Search Help nultiSIM Database Fanily 7hF 74F 00N 74F 62D 74F 62N 74F O4N 74F 68D 74F 68N 74F109N 74F10D 74F16N 74F112N 74F113D 74F113N 74F114N 74F11D 74F11N 74F125N 74F126D 74F126N 74F138N 74F139D 74F139N 74F148N 74F151D 74F151N 74F153
154. at the desired location beside the intermediary component and press SHIFT while dragging the wire For example nea R1 Po o M M PAS En 42 TAA HAT T 1 0kohm The wire passes through this component 3 Click on the desired pin of the second component to finish the connection The wire snaps to an appropriate configuration and the connection is numbered Note To stop the wiring process at any time press ESC gt To delete a wire click on it and press DELETE or right click on it and choose Delete from the pop up menu that appears 3 12 Electronics Workbench Wiring Components 3 6 3 Combining Automatic and Manual Wiring You can combine the two methods of wiring when placing a single wire Multisim assumes you always want to perform automatic wiring until you click somewhere which locks the wire to that point this is manual wiring Multisim then continues with automatic wiring until you click once more either at a destination pin or wire to complete the connection or at another interim point on the wire you are placing This method allows you to use automatic wiring for most connections and use manual wiring only for difficult paths or portions of paths 3 6 4 Setting User Preferences for Wiring You can set your preferences for how Multisim controls the automatic wiring gt To set your preferences 1 Choose Edit User Preferences and select the Preferences tab 2 In the wiring section of this tab you
155. atabase llle 5 2 5 4 Editing COMpONenfS o ococcocccco nennen nen 5 5 5 5 Editing a Component General Properties oo oooooocoroocoooo 5 7 5 6 Editing a Component Electronic Parameters llli illii 5 8 5 7 Adding Gomponents iss liae Bii eig uk bh Ws EP EE eee be 5 9 5 8 Removing Components 00 ccc cette teens 5 14 5 9 Copying Components sere nipe dA ana ee ne 5 15 5 10 Editing and Creating a Component Symbol a n anasa aaaea 5 16 5 10 1 Copying a Components Symbol 00 sen seen 5 17 5 10 2 Creating and Editing a Component s Symbol with the Symbol Editor 5 18 5 10 2 1 Symbol Editor Menus 000000 eee 5 19 5 10 2 2 Symbol Editor Palette 0 00 c eee ee 5 20 5 10 2 3 Working with the Symbol Editor 00 0c eee eee 5 21 5 10 24 Labels wu 24 A ein 5 21 5 10 2 5 Shap68 Jii slg a Radha Sere ih adage eae 5 21 5 10 2 6 Pins 2 2 A Sent eR dae ease herent ed 5 22 5 11 Creating or Editing a Component Model 00 0c cece eee eee 5 25 5 11 1 Copying a Components Model 22m sense eee eee 5 27 5 11 2Loading an Existing Model 0 cece ee eee 5 28 5 12 Creating and Editing Component Footprints 02000 0 eee eee eee 5 29 5 12 1Pin Group Naming Convention 000 0c eee eee 5 30 5 12 2Pin Type Naming Convention 000 0c cee eee 5 30 Multisim User Guide J01Ip3 jusuodwoy
156. ault to e assign to the Co T selected terminals C Short Leakage OK Cancel Info Help 3 Select the terminals to which the fault should apply 4 Enable the type of fault you want assigned to a terminal The options are Option Description None No fault Open Assigns a very high resistance to the terminals as if the wire leading to the terminals was broken Short Assigns a very low resistance to the terminal so the component has no mea surable affect on the circuit Leakage Assigns the resistance value specified in the fields below the option in paral lel with the selected terminals This causes the current to leak past the termi nals instead of going through them Electronics Workbench Using Restrictions 5 To cancel your changes click Cancel To save your changes click OK 13 3 2 Using the Auto Fault Option When you use the Auto Fault option you specify the number of faults or optionally the num ber of faults per different type of fault that you want Multisim to assign to placed components in the circuit gt To use the auto fault option 1 Choose Simulate Auto Fault Option The Auto Fault screen appears Auto Fault Lx Enter the number and type of faults that you un i want inserted in your circuit Multisim will randomly insert as many faults as you specify for each fault type The any option selects arandom combination of
157. ay it from the View menu choose Show Hide Simulation Error Log Audit Trail For more detailed information about simu lation see Chapter 7 Simulation In most cases you can make changes to the circuit for example moving components or adjusting instrument settings while it is activated unless the changes invalidate the sim ulation for example if you add a component gt To pause or resume the simulation click the Simulate button on the Design Bar and choose Pause Resume from the pop up menu that appears The simulation is paused Multisim User Guide 6 3 Sjuoeuuny su Instruments Instruments 6 3 D A gt To stop the simulation click the Simulate button on the Design Bar and choose Run Stop from the pop up menu that appears The simulation ends with the final results shown on the instrument face and in the audit trail You can also run stop pause or resume using commands from the Simulate menu Working with Multiple Instruments A single circuit can have multiple instruments attached to it including for some versions multiple instances of the same instrument In addition each circuit window can have its own set of instruments Setting up many different instruments or multiple instances of one instru ment is done in exactly the same way as setting up one instrument Instruments that sample for an amount of time cause a transient analysis to be run If you use multiples of such instruments only one
158. be used in analysis Choose types of output variables to display NIE Variables in circuit Selected variables for analysj fa variables All variables Filter types of E variables dis Analysis Parameters Output variables Miscellaneous Options Summary played Possible output variables from the Output vari circuit of the ables to be used in analy selected type sis Filter variables displayed Show all device parameters at end of simulation in the audit trail Filter variables displayed Add device model parameter Delete Selected Waraules Multisim User Guide 8 3 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 4 You can choose to display only certain types of output variables voltage only current only and so on or whether or not to display internal nodes submodules open pins and device parameters You can also add parameters from a specific device or model to the list of variables 8 3 3 1 Choosing How Output Variables are to be Handled To determine how the output variables are to be handled for a particular analysis select a vari able from the list on the left and toinclude the output variable in the plot click Plot During Simulation tosave the output variable for post processing only click Keep Only for Postprocessing To remove an item from the right hand list select it and click Remove Using the Output Variables tab you can also filter the variables l
159. bed in this chapter may not be available in your version of Multi sim Such features have an icon in the column next to their description See 1 5 Multisim Features Summary on page 1 3 for a description of the features available in your version Multisim User Guide 10 1 SICH HDLs HDLs and Programmable Logic 10 2 Overview of HDLs within Multisim 10 2 1 About HDLs HDLs are designed specially to describe the behavior of complex digital devices For this rea son they are referred to as behavioral level languages They can use behavioral level models instead of transistor gate level like SPICE to describe the behavior of these devices Using HDLs avoids the unwieldy task of describing such devices at the gate level greatly simplify ing the design process Designers typically choose from two different HDLs VHDL and Verilog HDL Multisim sup ports both of these languages HDLs are commonly used for modeling complex digital ICs that could not easily be modeled in SPICE or for designing circuits in programmable logic Multisim supports both of these applications of HDLs 10 2 2 Using Multisim with Programmable Logic 10 2 Designing circuits using programmable logic is becoming increasingly common as engineers deal with the need for shorter design cycles smaller products and lower cost results Pro grammable logic devices PLDs generally fall into three broad categories listed in order of increasing complexity
160. block add sub circuits and buses and control the color of the circuit window background components and wires Setting up Your Circuit Window Multisim lets you set up the circuit window to match your design requirements In particular you can set sheet size e whether or not the grid page bounds page borders and title block are visible e the symbol set ANSI or DIN you want to use Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 1 elnideo oneuieuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 2 When you create a component file the current settings in your user preferences as described in 2 4 1 About User Preferences on page 2 4 are used as the defaults for these options You can override the defaults with your new settings being stored with the circuit file This allows you to have unique settings for each file you create Setting up a Sheet Size gt To set up the sheet size for this circuit 1 Choose Edit Set Sheet Size The Sheet Size screen appears E Custom size IA Width 85 z Orientation 3 Height n 3 Portrait f Inches Landscape Centimeters Cancel 2 Choose the desired sheet size from the drop down list 3 Change any of the characteristics orientation or size necessary 4 To confirm the sheet size click OK To cancel it click Cancel Displaying or Hiding the Grid Title Block and Page Borders Multisim lets you display a background grid on the ci
161. cated on the left hand side of the complex plane In this situation the circuit is stable that is it does not generate sig nals on its own The following diagram illustrates the behavior of a stable circuit jw If there are poles present on the right hand side of the complex plane then the circuit will gen erate a signal of its own and therefore be considered unstable The following diagram illus trates the behavior of an unstable circuit jw Multisim User Guide 8 43 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 44 As stated earlier for absolute stability there can be no poles with positive real parts since these may cause the output signal to become unbounded Using the poles and zeros of the transfer functions of the circuit you can get a graphical representation of the behavior of the circuit in the frequency domain You can obtain the approximate plots of magnitude and phase of the transfer function using Bode plots 8 16 1 2 About the Bode Phase Plot To obtain the Bode plot for the magnitude of transfer function the asymptotic plot for each pole and zero is first drawn The slope of the high frequency asymptote of the curve corre sponding to a zero is 20dB decade and that for a pole is 20dB decade Then the plots are added together and the overall curve is shifted vertically by an amount determined by the multiplicative constant of the transfer function in this case K The Bode phase plot is done using the same conc
162. ccuracy of the results Electronics Workbench Noise Analysis results display format by doing one or all of the following choosing a vertical scale linear logarithmic decibel or octave from the Vertical Scale list choosing a display option chart graph or chart and graph from the Display list enabling Display phase to display results as phase enabling Display as line graph to display the results as a line graph instead of a bar graph enabling Normalize graphs to normalize the results with respect to the frequency under test transient analysis options by enabling Set transient analysis and clicking Edit analysis to edit the transient analysis setup For details see Setting Transient Analysis Parameters for Normal Use on page 8 14 8 8 Noise Analysis 8 8 1 About the Noise Analysis Noise is any undesired voltage or current appearing in the output One common result of noise is snowy television reception caused by fluctuations across all frequencies of the television signal Multisim can model three different kinds of noise 1 Thermal noise also known as Johnson or white noise is temperature dependent and caused by the thermal interaction between free electrons and vibrating ions in a conductor Its frequency content is spread equally throughout the spectrum The power of this generated noise is given by Johnson s formula P kxTxBW where k 23 Boltzmann s constant 1 38 x 10 J K T
163. ch as PALASM ABEL CUPL and others will find the concurrent features of VHDL quite familiar Those who have only pro grammed using software programming languages will have some new concepts to grasp One area where hardware design differs from software design is in the area of testing One of the most important and under utilized aspects of VHDL is its use as a way to capture the performance specification for a circuit in the form of a test bench Test benches are VHDL Electronics Workbench Overview of HDLs within Multisim descriptions of circuit stimulus and corresponding expected outputs that verify the behavior of a circuit over time Test benches should be an integral part of any VHDL project and should be created in parallel with other descriptions of the circuit VHDL is also useful as a low level form of communication between different tools in a com puter based design environment VHDL s structural language features allow it to be effec tively used as a netlist language replacing or augmenting other netlist languages such as EDIF 10 2 5 1 VHDL A Standard Language One of the advantages of using VHDL is that it is a standard in the electronic design commu nity As a result you will be able to use your design concepts because the design entry method you have chosen is supported in a newer generation of design tools You will also be able to take advantage of the most up to date design tools and have access to a knowl
164. cide on the nodes for analysis Transient Analysis Parameters are set in the following screen Set initial conditions Zero Transient Analysis x User Defined Calculate DE Analysis Parameters Output variables Miscellaneous Options Summary Operating Point or Automati TM iia cinis cally Determine Initial Condi 58 gt tions Analysis Start time of transient analysis An Start time TSTART o s must be greater than or equal End time TSTOP 0 001 1d andicssthar eng ume Iv Set maximum timestep TMAX Reset to default End time of transient analysis C Minimum number of time points fico must be greater than Start Maximum time step TMAX ies 7 s time Generate time steps automatically Click to enter minimum num ber of time points number of Set initial timestep points between start and Timesten METER exs A stop times Click to enter the maximum time step the simulation can handle Click to generate time steps automatically Description ee The result of the transient analysis is a calculation of voltage versus time If you have the oscilloscope connected to your circuit and activate the circuit a similar analy sis is performed Note To re set all parameters to their default values click Reset to default Setting Transient Analysis Parameters for Normal Use The default settings are appropriate for normal use providing the transient response of th
165. clear them click New 8 23 Viewing the Analysis Results Grapher To have the Grapher appear from the View menu choose Show Hide Grapher The Grapher is a multi purpose display tool that lets you view adjust save and export graphs and charts It is used to display the results of all Multisim analyses in graphs and charts agraph of traces for some instruments for example oscilloscope and Bode Plot The display shows both graphs and charts In a graph data are displayed as one or more traces along vertical and horizontal axes In a chart text data are displayed in rows and columns The window is made up of several tabbed pages Each page has two possible active areas indicated by the red arrow the whole page or the chart graph displayed on that page Some functions such as cut copy paste affect only the active area so be sure you have selected the desired area before performing a function Analysis Graphs OF x File Edit View Help Name of page Click t oeaan tae eea sE Elm display that page Oscilloscope Circuitl4194304 SCOPE 9241911211 Oscilloscope gt Chart or graph area of FEF page Note the red arrow showing that this is the active area 2 3 gt E T E E T T T T t 15 81 6n 163 1n 2447n 3262n 407 3n Time s 8 54 Electronics Workbench Viewing the Analysis Results Grapher Multisim User Guide The window offers a number of but
166. component thereby creating your own version you must store it in either the user or corporate library level You cannot modify the Multisim master level this is a safety precaution to prevent corruption of the component database shipped as part of Multi sim You choose which database levels you want displayed by selecting from the database selector as explained in 4 2 2 Displaying Database Level Information on page 4 2 For educational purposes you can also hide databases and their associated Parts Bins from students view by using restrictions See 13 4 Using Restrictions on page 13 3 Displaying Database Level Information A separate Component toolbar exists for each database level letting you build a circuit that combines components from any or all of the available levels By default only the Multisim master level Component toolbar is displayed To control which Component toolbars are displayed in the database selector enable each level of database you want to use Corporate LeS User x Note If the database selector does not appear on your screen choose View Toolbars Data base to show it Electronics Workbench Structure of the Component Database The associated Component toolbars appear as follows Multisim Only Multisim master and All levels selected master level User level selected selected 4 2 3 Classification of Components in the Datab
167. ct a sweep type decade linear or octave Defines how points to be calculated are distributed across the frequency range Enter the number of points to be calculated during the analysis For a linear sweep type use the number of points between start and end Select a vertical scale linear logarithmic decimal or octave Vertical scale con trols the y axis scaling on the output graph Note To reset all parameters to their default values click Reset to default The result of the AC frequency analysis is displayed in two parts gain versus frequency and phase versus frequency If you have the Bode plotter connected to your circuit and activate the circuit a similar analy sis is performed Setting AC Analysis Frequency Parameters for Normal Use In most cases you only need to setaStart Frequency seta Stop Frequency 8 12 Electronics Workbench Transient Analysis Setting AC Analysis Frequency Parameters for Advanced Use In addition to the frequency range you can also choose a desired sweep type decade linear or octave from the Sweep type drop down list enter the number of points to be calculated in the Number of points per decade field choose the vertical scale linear logarithmic decimal or octave from the Vertical scale drop down list Note The greater the number of points calculated the more accurate the results will be however the simulation speed will be adversely affected 8
168. cting the compo nent and using commands from the Edit menu The instructions below describe the pop up menu method only gt To rotate a component 1 Right click on the component 2 From the pop up menu that appears choose 90 Clockwise to rotate the component 90 degrees clockwise or Choose 90 CounterCW to rotate the component 90 degrees counter clockwise For example Unrotated Rotated 90 degrees clock Rotated 90 degrees counter wise clockwise 7T4LSOO0D q b l4 3 zoe O u1 va 74LS00D 74LSO0D T 3 1 Note Text associated with the component such as labels values and model information may be repositioned as a result of your action but is not rotated Any wires attached to the component are rerouted automatically gt To flip a component 1 Right click on the component 2 From the pop up menu that appears choose Flip Horizontal to flip the component hori zontally Or Choose Flip Vertical to flip the component vertically Note Text associated with the component such as labels values and model information may be repositioned but is not flipped Any wires attached to the component are rerouted automatically Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 15 einjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 3 9 3 9 1 3 16 For example Unflipped Flipped horizontally Flipped vertically u1 u1 74LS00D 1 1 3 3 E c zs 74LS00D 74LSOOD 1 u1 Placed Component Properties Each
169. cur rent variable settings appear Modify the variables as desired and click OK to save To delete a tolerance from the list select it and click Delete tolerance entry To manually add a tolerance click Add tolerance The Tolerance screen appears Choose type of sweep to be per Tolerance x formed Model Parameter or Device Parameter Parameter Type Model Parameter When selected the current value Parameter and a description of the parame Device Type BJT zl ter appear N Name q2n22222_bit_npn_40 Present Value Choose the type of distribution Parameter ron Gaussian or Uniform Description NPN type device Choose Unique each random En number generation is distinct or a Den Guassian numbered lot the same random WES uie number generation for various Pacem Tolerance Type Percent parameters Tolerance value fo Oo Choose Absolute to enter a escription value or Percent to vary the parameter by the specified per centage of its stated value Enter a percentage value or a set value depending on the tolerance Cancel Help type selected Enter the desired variables in the appropriate fields Electronics Workbench Worst Case Analysis 8 15 2 Setting Worst Case Analysis Parameters Worst Case Analysis Parameters are set in the following screen Choose DC Operating Point or AC Analysis For details on either Worst Case Analysis x
170. d by employing non zero terms only This method is called Sparse Matrix Technique Generally a sparse matrix approach requires less memory consumption and achieves faster simulation 7 4 5 Equation Solution Multisim solves circuit equations for linear and nonlinear circuits using a unified algorithm The solution of a linear DC circuit is treated as a special case of general nonlinear DC circuits LU factorization is used to solve the system of sparse modified nodal matrix equations described previously a set of simultaneous linear equations This involves decomposing the matrix A into two triangular matrices a lower triangular matrix L and an upper triangular matrix U and solving the two matrix equations using a forward substitution and a backward substitution Multisim User Guide 7 7 uone nuis Simulation Simulation Several efficient algorithms are used to avoid numerical difficulties due to the modified nodal formulation to improve numerical calculation accuracy and to maximize the solution effi ciency These include e A partial pivot algorithm that reduces the round off error incurred by the LU factorization method A preordering algorithm that improves the matrix condition e A reordering algorithm that minimizes nonzero terms for the equation solution A nonlinear circuit is solved by transforming it into a linearized equivalent circuit at each iter ation and iteratively solving the linear circuit using the ab
171. dd text 1 Choose Edit Place Text 2 Click on the location where you want the text placed A text box appears 3 Type the text XL T Textappears where i you click This is a battery 4 Click elsewhere on the circuit window to stop adding text gt To delete text right click on the text box and choose Delete from the pop up menu that appears or press DELETE gt To change the color of text right click on the text box choose Color from the pop up menu that appears and choose the desired color 3 24 Electronics Workbench Labelling 3 11 5 Adding a Description In addition to adding text to a particular portion of a circuit you can also add general com ments to your circuit These comments can be edited moved around the circuit window and printed gt To add a description 1 Choose Edit Description The Description window appears Description X Print 2 Enter text by typing directly into the window 3 When you are finished entering text click OK to save the text and close the description window or Cancel to close the window without saving gt To print your description from the Description window click Print gt To add to or modify the description choose Edit Description again The Description window appears with the text saved from the last time you saved it Use the scroll bar on the right side of the window to find the desired location in the text gt To move the descripti
172. dependent variable The standard deviation s is calculated from the parameter tolerance according to tolerance percentage nominal value 100 The percentage of the population included in the tolerance band is determined by a compo nent s nominal parameter value plus or minus O times the number of standard deviations SD in the tolerance band SD is related to the percentage of population included as shown SD Percentage of Population Included 1 0 68 0 1 96 95 0 Multisim User Guide 8 47 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 48 2 0 95 5 2 58 99 0 3 0 99 7 3 29 99 9 For example if you set the tolerance percentage to 596 then for a 1 kQ resistor in your cir cuit is 50 Q One standard deviation leads to a tolerance band of 0 95 KQ to 1 05 KQ 1 kQ 50 Q and 68 0 of the population is included At 1 96 standard deviations the tolerance band is 0 902 KQ to 1 098 KQ 1 KQ 98 Q and 95 0 of the population is included Note that the tolerance percentage is applied globally to all components Assumptions See the assumptions for the selected analysis DC operating point analysis described in 8 4 DC Operating Point Analysis on page 8 9 transient anal ysis described in 8 6 Transient Analysis on page 8 13 or AC frequency analysis described in 8 4 DC Operating Point Analysis on page 8 9 Setting Monte Carlo Analysis Tolerance Parameters Before you perform
173. displays the magnitude and frequency variations of electronic signals It can provide a graph of the strength of one or two signals over time or allow com parison of one waveform to another scilloscope XSC1 x Graphical display Reverses background color toggles between white and black Save results in an ASCII file ad T 45ms T2 12 11 Exa c VAI 103 0mV WAZ VA2 VAI Save ee wei 9465nv ve2 VB2 VB1 is Timebase Channel A Channel B r Grounds the oscilloscope Soale 500 us piv Scale 5 v Div 5 wos Edge mt X position 0 Y position 0 0 Y podttion 0 0 Level 0 v VAT Add ejaj e ac o pc acl foe sing Nor fito N 515 Trigger Readouts at vertical Readoutsatvertical Difference between read cursor 1 cursor 2 outs at vertical cursors 6 24 Electronics Workbench Oscilloscope 6 12 1 Time Base 0 1 ns Div 1s Div Timebase Value in seconds of the divisions on the x axis Scale 500 us Div y Slanal s staril int on th ignal s starting point on the x axis X position 0 0 YT Add BA AB Determines the axes of the oscilloscope display Y T is voltage magnitude against time Adds trace A and trace B The time base setting controls the scale of the oscilloscope s horizontal or x axis when com paring magnitude against time Y T To get a readable display adjust the time base in inverse proportion to the frequency setting on the functi
174. diting the component follow the instruc tions below 1 You are prompted to select a database and family destination for the new component 2 Select a component family and database and click OK 3 Your new component has been saved Tocontinue editing the component please see the subsequent sections of this chapter which give detailed information on the tabs of the Component Properties screen the General tab see 5 5 Editing a Component General Properties on page 5 7 the Symbol tab see 5 10 Editing and Creating a Component Symbol on page 5 16 the Model tab see 5 11 Creating or Editing a Component Model on page 5 25 the Footprint tab see 5 12 Creating and Editing Component Footprints on page 5 29 Electronic Parameters tab see 5 6 Editing a Component Electronic Parameters on page 5 8 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JO1JIp3 1ueuoduio 5 Component Editor 5 8 Removing Components gt To delete an existing component 1 Click the Component editing button on the Design Bar and choose Delete Component from the pop up menu that appears Choose Tools Delete Component The Delete Component screen appears Select Component Delete ws 0 5x 744LS00M 2 From the list choose the database level containing the component you want to remove corporate library and user only 3 From the Family list choose the component family contain
175. e CASE finds any string starting with CASE e 646 finds any string with 646 inside it For more information about fields in the Search screen see 4 4 1 2 Common Parame ters on page 4 25 The following example shows the value you would enter to find a transistor component with a footprint of TO 18 Manufacturer Footprint fr 0 18 earch gt m Common Parameters ses Thermal Resistance Junction AND y Cancel Thermal resistance Case ND Help Power Dissipation I a z Derating Knee Point a Min Operating Temperature ano Max Operating Temperature fa ESD 4 To carry out the search click Search When the search is complete the Search Results screen appears Tip The more specific your search criteria the smaller the number of matching components 4 22 Electronics Workbench Types of Information Stored for Components To select a component from the search results When the search is complete the Search Result screen appears displaying information about the first component that matched your criteria The Component drop down list contains a list of all the components that matched your criteria For example using the search example above the results look like this Search Result BJT NPN x Number of compo EM found nents that matched Manufacturer the search criteria Footprint uis lt Back Motorol
176. e selected output variables starting at time 0 seconds and stopping after 1 ms You can if you wish change the start time by entering a value greater than or equal to 0 and less than the End time in the Start time field change the end time by entering a value greater than the Start time in the End time field Electronics Workbench Transient Analysis Setting Transient Analysis Parameters for Advanced Use For advanced use you can define the initial conditions at time 0 seconds by selecting an initial condition Zero User Defined Calculate DC Operating Point or Automatically Determine Initial Conditions from the Initial conditions drop down list You can have the initial conditions set to zero or you can use the steady state values of the circuit under analysis During and or after circuit construction you can specify node volt ages These forced values can also be used as initial conditions for the analysis Note If you select Automatically determine initial conditions Multisim will attempt to use steady state conditions to run the analysis If this is unsuccessful Multisim will set initial conditions to zero If simulation is still not possible Multisim will use the spec ified user defined conditions define the maximum time step to be taken by the simulation engine by enabling Maximum timestep TMAX and entering the desired time step define the minimum time step to be taken by enabling Minimum number of ti
177. e 2 4 3 Controlling Circuit Window Display on page 2 6 Help Opens the Multisim Help file 3 15 2 From Circuit Window with Component or Instrument Selected If you right click on the circuit window with a component or components selected a pop up menu of appropriate commands appears These commands are Cut removes the selected components circuits or text Copy copies the selected components circuits or text For details see 3 5 4 Copying a Placed Component on page 3 8 Paste pastes the selected components circuits or text that have been cut or copied For details see 3 5 4 Copying a Placed Component on page 3 8 Flip Horizontal flips the selection vertically For details see 3 8 Rotating Flipping Components on page 3 15 Flip Vertical flips the selection horizontally For details see 3 8 Rotating Flipping Components on page 3 15 90 Clockwise rotates the selection 90 degrees clockwise For details see 3 8 Rotat ing Flipping Components on page 3 15 90 CounterCW rotates the selection 90 degrees counter clockwise For details see 3 8 Rotating Flipping Components on page 3 15 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 31 einjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture e Color changes the color of the placed component from its default values For details see 3 5 6 Controlling Component Color on page 3 10 Help opens the Multisim help file 3 15
178. e 10 2 Using Multisim for Modeling Complex Digital ICs o ooo oooooo 10 3 How to Use HDLs in Multisim 0 0 00000 B 10 3 Introduction to VEIDL re 4 423 224 222 eu i Aes ee dpe ies UA 10 4 VHDL A Standard Language coooccccccccc eee 10 5 A Brief History of VADE rerea aa EK EE EAN eee 10 5 Chapter 11 Reports About this Chapter s ira Trta dd b Phone ee AE RA EG eee S 11 1 Bill of Materials BOM 2 22 aaea 11 1 xii Electronics Workbench Database Family Bist 4 2 2 2 bee ra ee e hr YE TRE RES 11 3 Component Detail Report l l 11 4 Instrument Maps ces Gree ds re BE KEG px aad dea a ede a 11 6 Chapter 12 Transfer Communication About this Chapter 0 00000 12 1 Introduction to Transfer Communication llle eee 12 1 Transferring Data sce irra errie eee es 12 1 Transferring from Multisim to Ultiboard for PCB Layout 0 12 1 Transferring to Other PCB Layout 0 0 00 c cece eee eee 12 2 Exporting Simulation Results 00 00 cee 12 3 Exporting to MathCAD se i ga ga irka i a aoe eee 12 3 Exporting to Excel rix ir a da e e ee 12 3 Chapter 13 Educators Guide About this Chapter 4 424 rires 2a ahnt gg use v T E imi e E 13 1 Circuit Creators Name 13 1 Assigning Faults to Components 0 00 0c 13 1 Setting a Placed Component s Faults 000 cece eee eee eee 13 2 Using the Auto Fault Option 2 000 cet ee 13
179. e 10 7 Multisim also deals with the communication between the various simulation engines without manual intervention This function is unique to Multisim and is described in 10 3 Simulating a Circuit Containing a VHDL Modeled Device on page 10 7 To use Multisim for writing simulating and debugging HDL source code and or for synthe sizing HDLs click the VHDL Verilog HDL button on the design bar From the pop up menu that appears select from the following options Multisim User Guide 10 3 SICH HDLs HDLs and Programmable Logic e VHDL simulation described in 10 4 Designing Simulating and Debugging with Multisim s VHDL on page 10 8 e VHDL synthesis described in 10 5 VHDL Synthesis and Programming of FPGAs CPLDs on page 10 49 e Verilog HDL simulation described in 10 6 Simulating a Circuit Containing a Verilog HDL Modeled Device on page 10 61 10 2 5 Introduction to VHDL 10 4 VHDL is a programming language that has been designed and optimized for describing the behavior of digital hardware circuits and systems As such VHDL combines features of a simulation modeling language a design entry language a test language and a netlist lan guage VHDL is an extremely comprehensive and extensive language and cannot be entirely cov ered in this manual However an introduction to programming in VHDL including a detailed primer and a set of examples can be found in the appendices As a simulation
180. e De e ei 6 6 Magnitude or Phase a ee een en 6 7 Vertical and Horizontal Axes Settings 22 cn sen eere 6 7 B se Settlhngs urere a eR S RR ate Gon cR e 6 7 Horizontal Axis Scale 1 mHz 999 9 GHz o oococcccccccooo o 6 8 Vertical Axis Scale 0 0 ren 6 8 miles M 6 8 Distortion Analyzer is aui 2 12 nop leh tebe UR Reed beg UNTERE RR E 6 9 Harmonic DIstortloni adobe RID ORE PPEIS RR ERU reine 6 10 SINAD 4 ETE 6 10 FUNCTION Generator ee ea rn y E E ne 6 11 Waveform Selection oooooooccocco ees 6 12 Signal Options 00 nennen nennen nennen nen 6 12 Frequency 1Hz 999 MEGHZ ocoocccccccc een nenn 6 12 Duty Cycle 196 9996 2 22 n nennen e 6 12 Amplitude 999 kV 2 2 con nennen nennen eh 6 12 Offset 999 kV and 999 KV 2 2 22 nnes nennen nennen nenn 6 12 Rise Time ur ee an a ge ee 6 12 I ogic Converter neis a A AO neus 6 13 Deriving a Truth Table from a Circuit llli 6 13 Entering and Converting a Truth Table ils 6 14 Entering and Converting a Boolean Expression lille lesen 6 14 Logic Analyzer 2 oe e eee XE e ye e a HERE ot CORE a er 6 15 Start Stop amp Reset c uox He arce eor ace ade a OR RATE d edi Ra aces 6 16 Clock u teed e EIE e n Xue RA Pea hae cee 1 6 17 Uere EE 6 18 Multime ter oia alado pia Stade ag e rae eU UR DA dated deans
181. e Transform of the input signal is referred to as Vi 5 where the parameter s j or more commonly s j2mf A transfer function is in general a complex quantity the magnitude of which gives the magni tude response or transmission and the angle of which gives the phase response One way of expressing the transfer function is the following Ts Vo s _ KC Ez Poze GS T JG 23 Vis s py s po s p3 5 pa The numerator of the function contains the zeroes of the function Z Z5 Z 39 Zp e and the denominator contains the poles of the function p4 p P3 P4 gt The zeroes of the function are those frequencies at which the transmission will be zero The poles of the function are the natural modes of the network and define natural frequencies Both poles and zeros can contain either real complex or purely imaginary numbers Electronics Workbench Pole Zero Analysis 8 16 1 1 About Circuit Stability As stated earlier the stability of the circuit can be determined by examining the transfer func tion of the circuit Since the transfer function is a representation of the circuit in the frequency domain the location of the poles and zeros will be referred to the Complex plane The com plex plane is the set of axes in which the horizontal is defined as the Real Axis Re and the vertical is the Imaginary Axis jw When all the poles of the circuit have negative real parts the poles are lo
182. e by students you can hide components values faults and uses in analyses and you can lock subcircuits to make them unavailable for open ing by students 13 6 Electronics Workbench Using Restrictions Note Remember that circuit restrictions only apply to the current circuit i e when you cre ate a new circuit only the global restrictions will apply see 13 4 1 Setting Global Restrictions on page 13 4 for details If you want circuit restrictions to apply to a new circuit you will need to reset those restrictions each time you create a new circuit gt To set general circuit restrictions 1 Choose Edit Circuit restrictions If you have created a password you will be prompted for it See 13 4 3 Setting Passwords for Restrictions on page 13 9 for more informa tion Enter your password in the Password screen and click OK The Circuit restrictions screen appears 2 If it is not displayed click the General tab The creator of the circuit This information is supplied by the installation program Enable to set the schematic as read only Enable checkboxes to hide com ponent properties and lock subcir cuits Enable the appropriate check boxes to hide desired parts bins databases and In Use list Schematic read only Circuit restrictions x General Analysis Circuit creater Name Richard Smith Serial 385mc85fc9348n m Component data Hide compon
183. e error tolerence Voltage error tolerence Truncation error overestimation factor Charge error tolerence Minimum acceptable pivot Minimum acceptable ratio of pivot Nominal temperature DC iteration limit DC transfer curve iteration limit Upper transient iteration limit Default MOSfet length Default MOSfet width Default MOSfet area of drain Default MOSfet area of source Allow bypass of unchanging elements Maxi Do not use Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Use default Analysis options shown in blue are set to the non SPICE default value 3 Select the analysis options whose value you want to change The bottom of the screen changes to reflect the choices available to you For those analysis options that you simply turn on or off the bottom of the screen looks like this prre To control whether or not the option takes effect enable or disable the Use this option option To reset the default value for the option click Reset value to default For those analysis options for which you set values the bottom of the screen looks like this E To use the default value enable Use default value To set a specific value disable Use default value and type a value in the Value field To re set the value to its default setting c
184. e following techniques to solve many convergence problems and analysis failures Before you proceed identify which analysis is causing the problem keep in mind that DC operating point analysis is often performed as the first step of other analyses In each of the following solutions begin with step 1 then continue performing the subsequent steps in order until the problem is solved 1 Check the circuit topology and connectivity Make sure that The circuit is correctly wired and includes no dangling nodes or stray parts e You haven t confused zeros with the letter O Your circuit has a ground node and every node in the circuit has a DC path to ground Make sure no sections of your circuit are completely isolated from ground by trans formers capacitors etc Capacitors and voltage sources are not in parallel Inductors and current sources are not in series All devices and sources are set to their proper values All dependent source gains are correct Your models subcircuits have been correctly entered 2 Increase the operating point analysis iteration limit to 200 300 This allows the analysis to go through more iterations before giving up 3 Reduce the RSHUNT value by a factor of 100 4 Increase the Gmin minimum conductance by a factor of 10 5 Enable the option Use zero initial conditions Electronics Workbench AC Analysis 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 AC Analysis About the AC Analysis In AC analysis t
185. e identifying prefixes in the equation or when the trace is plotted PostProcessor The default analysis The default analysis is identified on the Postprocessor screen at the bottom of the Analysis Results list gt To change the default analysis select the desired analysis and click Set Default Analysis Results The equation changes to reflect your choice Multisim User Guide 9 5 JosseooJdisog Postprocessor Postprocessor 9 3 1 2 Creating Multiple Traces The Postprocessor screen uses the same conventions as the Grapher screen as shown below Page name PostProcessor Analysis Graphs time v 5 E Interactive Image echnolog All 1 0000m Graph or ch rt name gt To add another trace to a page 1 Click on the tab of the page to which you want to add the trace 2 Create the trace as usual 3 When you click Draw the trace is added to the current page To add it without drawing click Add Trace 9 6 Electronics Workbench Using the Postprocessor 9 3 2 Working with Pages Graphs and Charts gt To add another page for holding traces click New Page You are prompted for a name for the page When you click OK a tab with that name is added to the Postprocessor These tabs Transient Analysis tran01 Click the arrows to represent the Graph tranD1 browse through the available available pages pages gt To add a graph or chart to an existing page 1 Click on the tab of the
186. e measurement make sure that there is no source in the component network thecomponent or component network is grounded e the multimeter is set to DC for more details see 6 10 2 Signal Mode AC or DC on page 6 22 there is nothing else in parallel with the component or component network The ohmmeter generates a 1 mA current which can be changed by clicking Set See 6 10 3 Internal Settings on page 6 22 for details If the ohmmeter has been attached to different nodes re activate the circuit to get a reading 6 10 1 4 Decibels This option measures decibel voltage loss between two nodes in a circuit To measure the decibels select this option and attach the multimeter s probes in parallel with the load as shown in diagram below XMM1 1 D1 2 D2 R1 R2 1 gt 2 1 0ohm 2 1 0ohm Multisim User Guide 6 21 sjuaun1su Instruments Instruments The Decibel standard for calculating dB is preset to 1 V but can be changed by clicking Set See 6 10 3 Internal Settings on page 6 22 for details Decibel loss is calculated as follows dB 20 logi Ve 6 10 2 Signal Mode AC or DC an The Sine wave button measures the root mean square RMS voltage or current of an AC signal Any DC component of the signal will be eliminated so only the AC component of the signal is measured The Straight wave button measures the current or voltage value of a DC signal Note To measure the RMS volt
187. e models different from those used in low fre quencies Connections between two nodes at high frequencies would exhibit different behav ior from those at low frequencies and are modeled using capacitances and inductances These connections behave as transmission lines when implemented on a Printed Circuit Board PCB The board itself becomes part of the circuit interfering with the normal circuit func tion That is why low frequency circuit simulation EDA tools can become unreliable at higher frequencies Standard RF components include capacitors inductors toroids ferrite beads couplers circu Jators transmission lines or striplines waveguides and high frequency active devices such as transistors and diodes More complex components such as quadrature hybrids mixers filters and attenuators are built using these standard components This chapter deals with the stan dard components and their models in high frequencies 14 3 2 Multisim s RF Components 14 2 The RF Design module contains over 100 parts and models specifically built for accuracy at higher frequencies This ability to handle higher frequencies helps overcome a typical prob lem with SPICE models which tend to perform poorly at such frequencies Electronics Workbench Components These parts are found in the Component toolbar near the bottom in the Parts Bin that looks like this RF component tool bar Parts Bin RF component family toolbar You acces
188. eNt ooccocccccccco eee 3 9 3 5 6 Controlling Component Color 6 ele 3 10 Wiring Components ooo 3 10 3 6 1 Wiring Components Automatically 0000 0c eee 3 11 3 6 2 Wiring Components Manually lisse 3 12 3 6 8 Combining Automatic and Manual Wiring liliis 3 13 3 6 4 Setting User Preferences for Wiring liliis 3 13 3 6 5 Modifying the Wire Path 0 0 2 0 cee 3 13 3 6 6 Controlling Wire Color 0 00 eee eee 3 14 Manually Adding a Junction Connector oocccccocco 3 14 Rotating Flipping Components 0 0 0 c eee 3 15 Placed Component Properties 0000 cece ee ttt eee 3 16 3 9 1 Displaying Identifying Information about a Placed Component 3 16 3 9 2 Viewing a Placed Component s Value Model 00000000 3 18 3 9 3 Controlling How a Placed Component is Used in Analyses 3 20 Multisim User Guide elnideo oneuieuos Schematic Capture 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 Finding Components in Your Circuit llle eres 3 21 CADENA MT C 3 21 3 11 1 Modifying Component Labels 0 0 nase seen ee 3 22 3 11 2Modifying Node Numbers 22222022 seen e 3 23 3 11 3Adding a Title Block llli 3 23 3 11 4Adding Miscellaneous Text oooocooccocooococ eee 3 24 3 11 5Adding a Description ooooocoocccooocrr nen 3 25 Subcircuits and Hierarchy 60 0c eee nennen 3 26 3 12 1 Subcircui
189. edge base of thousands of other engineers many of whom are solving problems simi lar to your own 10 2 5 2 A Brief History of VHDL VHDL VHSIC Very High Speed Integrated Circuit Hardware Description Language was developed in the early 1980s as a spin off of a high speed integrated circuit research project funded by the U S Department of Defense During the VHSIC program researchers had to describe circuits of enormous scale for their time and manage very large circuit design prob lems that involved multiple teams of engineers With only gate level design tools available it soon became clear that better more structured design methods and tools would be needed There are a number of progressively more advanced standards that define VHDL in detail as described in Appendix A VHDL Primer All are supported by Multisim The major mile stones in the VHDL standards evolution are summarized below first introduction of publicly available version of VHDL 1985 e IEEE Standard 1076 basis of almost all of today s products released in 1987 and updated in 1993 94 e IEEE Standard 1164 solves the problem of non standard types IEEE Standard 1076 3 the standard for synthesis IEEE Standard 1076 4 adds timing information known as VITAL Multisim User Guide 10 5 SICH HDLs HDLs and Programmable Logic 10 6 Electronics Workbench Chapter Reports 11 1 About this Chapter 11 2 Bill of Materials BOM
190. eds to be maximum matching between the output of the amplifier and the out put impedance and the input of the amplifier and the source impedance There are eight pos sible structures for each port although only a few of these provide complete matching To use impedance matching to find a matching network 1 Connect the network analyzer to your amplifier as described in Stability Circles on page 14 21 Do not forget the capacitors in order to prevent DC loading of the network ana lyzer Run the simulation Double click the network analyzer icon From the Mode drop down list select Match Net Designer Y 2 On the Match Net Design screen click the Impedance Matching tab Electronics Workbench RF Analyses 6 Change the frequency to the desired operating point 7 Enable Auto Match The instrument provides the structure as well the numerical values of components You can click on the left and right sides of the Impedance Matching window and change the structure However only a few of the eight structures can provide matching 14 5 3 Noise Figure Analysis A measure of signal quality is its signal noise ratio Noise accompanies any signal at the input to a two part device such as an amplifier or attenuator Designers are interested to know how much noise is added to the output signal of a two part network since these networks contribute to the output noise Passive components i e resistors add Johnson noise while
191. ee 8 11 Transient Analysis iier ee augen a Up xw eR ed ded ec fed dene 8 13 About the Transient Analysis llle 8 13 Setting Transient Analysis Parameters 0000 0c eee eee eee 8 14 Troubleshooting Transient Analysis Failures 20 0 00 eee eee eee 8 15 Fourier Analysis ze vet eI EHE ehr ee REEL e 8 16 About the Fourier Analysis lile es 8 16 Setting Fourier Analysis Parameters llle 8 17 Noise Analysis n 2 20 eta n hone Sd WR rn el Ze Di nad teria Dc 8 19 About the Noise Analysis 0 0 0 0 00 cee eh 8 19 Noise Analysis Example 0 0 00 eee 8 20 Setting Noise Analysis Parameters 00 00 cee eee tee eese 8 21 Distortion Analysis 2 ec 222 DAG Swe ARUM IG NI 8 23 About the Distortion Analysis lille 8 23 Setting Distortion Analysis Parameters illii 8 24 DG Sweep Analysis une AA demus oat une Rei pe Duet gt 8 25 Setting DC Sweep Analysis Parameters 0 0 ccc eee eee eee 8 26 DC and AC Sensitivity Analyses oocooccccooccn n 8 27 About the Sensitivity Analyses llle 8 27 Sensitivity Analyses Example ssssss eese 8 28 Setting Sensitivity Analysis Parameters 00 0c eee eee eee 8 30 Parameter Sweep Analysis 22m cc cece ete 8 31 About the Parameter Sweep Analysis 000 0 0c cece eee eee 8 31 Setting Parameter Sweep Analysis Parameters 2222222 seen 8 31 Temperature Sweep Analysis
192. een The output variable is the node from which the analysis extracts the voltage waveform Fourier Analysis Parameters are set in the following screen Set to the frequency of an AC source in your circuit If you have several AC sources use the lowest common fac tor of frequencies Click to have Multisim estimate funda mental frequency Set the number of harmonics of the fundamental frequency that are calcu lated Click to enter the amount of time dur ing which sampling should occur or use Set Transient Analysis Enable this option and click Edit anal ysis to set parameters for associated transient analysis Fourier Analysis Frequency under test Number of jos Fourier Output variables Miscellaneous Options Summary F Estimate 3 r j is options Stopping time for sampling TSTOP C Set transient analysis fe s Eqiteralysis Sampling options Sampling points per period Sampling frequency fia Get Detault Hz SetDefautt Degree of polynomial for interpolation Results Vertical scale Display phase Logarithmic Enable to enter number of points to be sampled during period IY Display as line graph chan and Graph y Normalize graphs Display Enable to specify a sampling frequency Enable to enter degree to be used when interpolating between points on simulation
193. eisdem epe me een ee 3 21 Modifying Component Labels 22m nennen een een ees 3 22 Modifying Node Numbers 2222222 n eee ete 3 23 Adding a Title Block 2 comes nennen een I n 3 23 Adding Miscellaneous Text 0 00 cee 3 24 Adding a Description lt s sosie eka n E AREE eee 3 25 Subcircuits and Hierarchy 2 0 00 rr 3 26 Subcircuits vs Hierarchy rsa seoed eaea a a ea ne 3 26 Setting up a Circuit for Use as a Subcircuit aaaea 3 27 Adding Subcircuits to a Circuit liliis 3 27 Printing the Circuit liess mmn 3 28 Electronics Workbench Placing a BUS expen UAR ESI NE nb ER ee ULIS 3 29 Using the Pop up Menu 0 0 eR een 3 30 From Circuit Window with no Component Selected o o o o ooooo o 3 30 From Circuit Window with Component or Instrument Selected 3 31 From Circuit Window with Wire Selected ooooooooooooooo 3 32 Chapter 4 Components Aboutthis Chapter eR waste i eret P TEE EM e d ee Ed a 4 1 Structure of the Component Database 2 nun sen nennen rennen nn 4 1 Database LevelS oooooooo ee ee eer 4 1 Displaying Database Level Information 0 0 0 0 eee eee 4 2 Classification of Components in the Database 00 cee eee eee 4 3 Component Families List 2 4 4 Sources Toolbar e rr o ao aee e ic den ORE A 4 5 Basic TOOolbQE iD aetate des ata che DER a deo e b ea ee
194. elete Analysis To remove all anal yses click Remove All Analyses 8 20 User Defined Analyses The user defined analysis presents you with the following screen into which you can type SPICE commands to be executed to perform the analysis User Defined Analysis x Miscellaneous Options Summary Enter the list of spice commands to execute Enter the list of SPICE commands to execute Description You require a working knowledge of SPICE to use this interface It provides an advanced fully customizable way for you to set up your own analyses 8 52 Electronics Workbench Noise Figure Analysis 8 21 8 22 Noise Figure Analysis This analysis is part of Multisim s RF Design module standard in the Power Professional ver sion optional in the Professional version and is described in Chapter 14 RF Viewing the Analysis Results Error Log Audit Trail When you click Simulate to begin simulating the circuit using the chosen analysis or analy ses you may see one or both of the following views of the results the error log audit trail which displays the results in text format explained here e the Grapher which displays the results in graphical format explained in 8 23 Viewing the Analysis Results Grapher on page 8 54 If you set the analysis option ACCT on the error log audit trail also includes errors or warn ing messages generated during simulation and a chart of simulatio
195. ent is identified by the following types of information general information such as name manufacturer date and author see 5 5 Editing a Component General Properties on page 5 7 for details symbol pictorial representation of the component for schematic capture see 5 10 Editing and Creating a Component Symbol on page 5 16 for details Multisim User Guide JOJIp3 1ueuoduio5 Component Editor 5 3 model information used to represent the actual operation behavior of the component dur ing simulation necessary only for a component that will be simulated See 5 11 Cre ating or Editing a Component Model on page 5 25 for details footprint the package that Multisim uses when exporting a schematic containing this component to a PCB Layout package such as Ultiboard see 5 12 Creating and Edit ing Component Footprints on page 5 29 for details electronic parameters of the component see 5 6 Editing a Component Electronic Parameters on page 5 8 for details user fields if used to further define the components In addition all components can be organized by using Database Management which lets you e add and remove component families from the user database e modify user field titles for any database e add and change toolbar button symbols Note If you modify any information about a component in the Multisim master level you must store the modified in the user or corporate l
196. ent values T Hide component analysis tab Hide component faults Lock subcircuits m Parts Bin F Hide MultiSIM DB Hide User DB F Hide instruments parts bin T Hide In Use list Password OK l Cancel Help Set the desired options by enabling the appropriate checkboxes Select from the following options Prevents students from saving the circuit and hides parts bins Students will only be able to draw wires between instruments and an open pin on an existing connector Also they can only remove wires that are between an instrument and a connector Hide component values Marks the Values tab of components properties screens with an X and hides values You may wish to provide false values using labels Multisim User Guide 13 7 apind suojyeonpy Educators Guide Educators Guide 16 Hide component analysis Hides the Analysis setup tab of components proper tab ties screens Hide component faults Marks the Faults tab of components properties screens with an X and hides faults Lock subcircuits Prevents students from opening subcircuits and seeing their contents Students must measure the input and ouput of a hidden subcircuit to determine its contents Hide Multisim DB Hides the Multisim database and Parts Bins from the current circuit Hide User DB Hides the user database and Parts Bins from the cur rent circ
197. ents They look and feel just like the instruments you ve seen and used in a lab Using virtual instruments is one of the best and easiest ways of examining your circuit s behavior and showing the results of a simulation These instruments can be placed in any level of cir cuit or subcircuitfor information on subcircuits see 3 12 Subcircuits and Hierarchy on page 3 26 but they are active only for the currently active circuit or subcircuit Multisim User Guide 6 1 SjueuunJ su Instruments Instruments Virtual instruments have two views the Instrument icon you attach to your circuit and the opened instrument where you set the instrument s controls and display screen Opened instrument Multimeter XMM1 ee ie ES Instrument identifier ud li Instrument icon Terminal input output indicators The instrument s icon indicates how the instrument is connected into the circuit A black dot inside the terminal input output indicators shows that the instrument is connected to a node gt To add an instrument to a circuit ra 1 Click the Instruments button on the Design Bar The Instruments toolbar appears includ zal ing one button for each instrument Distortion analyzer Logic converter Multimeter Oscilloscope Wattmeter Click to select objects o the circuit window Word generator Bode plotter Function generator Logic analyzer Network analyzer Spectrum analyzer From the Instruments toolb
198. ents analyses and components You will not see a separate access to the RF Design Module in Multisim s interface Instead for example the RF components go into their own Parts Bin on the component toolbar and the RF instruments are accessed through the Design Bar s Instrument button Multisim User Guide 14 1 du RF RF 14 3 Components 14 3 1 About RF Components Components in the electronics field fall into two categories lumped components and distributed components Lumped components are smaller than the wavelength where A eit f In these cases the wavelength of the voltages and currents at which they are operating is sig nificantly larger than the components themselves Ohm s Law in this case is valid For exam ple a 1 4 Watt resistor is about 0 270 inch long and 0 090 inch in diameter RF components on the other hand are most often distributed elements where the phase of a voltage or current changes significantly over the physical extent of the device because the device dimensions are similar to in some cases even larger than the wavelength Standard cir cuit theory is therefore not always applicable to circuits that are working at a few MHz to above GHz The usual models for lumped components are often not valid in the RF world For example a capacitor can behave as an inductor or an inductor can behave like a capacitor at high frequen cies RF components exhibit parasitic effects and hav
199. ept however there are some differences The asymptotic plots consists of three lines The first line is a horizontal one at a level of zero up to s 0 1 p1 the second line has a slope of 45 decade and extends from s 0 1 p1 to s 10lpll and the third line has a slope of zero at a level of 90 The complete phase response can be found by adding the plots of the poles and zeros The frequency response of the low pass filter is an example of the above discussion The circuit is defined by the following transfer function a E O s 0 s 15924 where the natural frequency expressed in radians is 0 159KHz 2n 5uF 20Q and the dc gain 20Q ag 050 As can be seen from the cursors the break frequency in Hertz is 1 59KHz This is the point at which the slope of the magnitude plot is 20dB decade due to the pole present at this fre quency The phase plot displays a slope of 45 decade between 159 Hz and 159KHz In the case of higher order circuits for example the transfer functions contain multiple poles or zeros at certain frequencies The order of the pole or zero n is determined by the number of times this pole is present at a certain frequency In this case when plotting the Bode magni Electronics Workbench Pole Zero Analysis tude plot each higher order pole has an asymptote of 20 ndB decade and each higher order zero has an asymptote of 20 ndB decade Assumptions Applied to an analog circuit sm
200. erature 0 00 shown in the detail Max Operating Temperature 70 00 Be Dope click Device parameters vary ESD Rating 0 00 parameter do not depending on component use an equal or Device Parameters semicolon symbol Label Value Function QUAD 2 NPUT NAND Number 4 Package M144 tee The screen consists of two sets of fields The device parameters vary depending on the type of component The Appendices of this manual describe each component family s parameters in detail The common parameter fields are common to all components These are Field Description Thermal Resistance Junction Enter or modify the thermal characteristics within the component from the junction to the case in watts or degrees centigrade Thermal Resistance Case Enter or modify the thermal characteristics of the whole package component in watts or degrees centigrade Power Dissipation Enter or modify the power dissipation of the component in watts Derating Knee Point Enter or modify the temperature at which the power of the compo nent package begins ro be de rated in order to operate the device in its safe operating range Use degrees centigrade Min Operating Temperature Enter or modify the lowest ambient temperature at which the compo nent can operate reliably Use degrees centigrade Max Operating Temperature Enter or modify the highest ambient temperature at which the com ponent can opera
201. erter Buck converter Buck boost converter ll Fuse ft Lossy transmission line Lossless line typel 23 2 3 Lossless line type2 Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Electronics Workbench Structure of the Component Database 4 2 3 13 Controls Toolbar ANSI Multiplier Divider Transfer function block Voltage gain block Voltage differentiator Voltage integrator Voltage hysteresis block Voltage limiter Current limiter block JL Voltage controlled limiter Voltage summer DIN Multiplier Divider Voltage gain block Voltage differentiator Voltage integrator Voltage limiter Current limiter block 7 Voltage controlled limiter Voltage slew rate block 7 E Voltage summer Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 19 sjueuodujoj5 Components Components 4 20 4 2 3 14 RF Toolbar ANSI RF capacitor RF MultiSl ES RF inductor REZBJT_NPN RF_BJT_PNP RF_MOS_3TDN Strip line Tunnel diode DIN RF capacitor RF MultiSi E3 RF inductor a m RF BJT PNP RF BJT NPN Strip line Tunnel diode Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped w
202. es Stability Factor Delta 03828 7 14 752 Mag Ph K 1 0000 Stability Unconditionally stable 1 0000 z MHz Print Help Stability Circles Stability circles are used to analyze the stability of a circuit at different frequency points In an ideal design when an input signal is delivered to the input port of a two port network the entire source signal is delivered without any loss In practice however part of the input signal bounces back to the source Then when the amplified signal is delivered to the load impedance part of this signal bounces back to the output port of the amplifier The amplifier if it is not unilateral transfers the reflected wave back to the source impedance A circuit is considered unstable if the signal reflected is equal to the signal delivered in either the input or the output port An RF engineer aims to minimize this bounce effect and deliver maximum signal to the load The stability circles in the network analyzer help achieve this goal gt To perform the analysis 1 Connect the biased amplifier to the network analyzer using two series capacitors usually 100 F The values of these capacitors are selected to minimize the numerical errors In practice however two capacitors must be used to isolate the amplifier from the pre and post stage amplifiers in DC mode Note that the impedance of these capacitors should not contribute to the attenuation of the input or ou
203. es graphs and charts 9 7 Screen 9 2 using the default analysis 9 4 variables 9 8 pre defined fields in database 4 24 print page setup 2 9 printing circuit files 3 28 graphs and charts 8 64 Programmable Logic Device See PLD properties of placed components 3 16 PSpice model 5 28 R readouts 6 8 Recent Files 2 13 reference ID assigning to components 3 22 Remote 13 10 removing components 5 14 reports Bill of Materials 11 1 component detail 11 4 database family list 11 3 resizing toolbars 2 9 restrictions about 13 3 setting circuit 13 6 setting global 13 4 RF components about 14 2 interdigital model 14 36 lossy line model 14 34 microstrip line model 14 28 microstrip open end model 14 29 RF model makers 14 27 RF spiral inductor model 14 31 strip line model 14 32 stripline bend model 14 33 waveguide model 14 27 HF instruments network analyzer 14 15 spectrum analyzer 14 9 RF module 14 1 about 14 1 components see also RF components 14 2 instruments see also RF instruments 14 9 RF simulation 7 10 RF tutorial 14 37 rise time 6 12 rotating components 3 15 S schematic capture 3 1 search results 4 23 searching for components 4 21 setting circuit restrictions 13 6 setting global restrictions 13 4 setting up a circuit as a subcircuit 3 27 settings oscilloscope channel 6 26 sheet size 2 6 sheet size setting up 3 2 show grid 2 6 page bounds 2 6 title block 2 6 vi signal mode 6 22 signal options 6 12 Si
204. es virtual resistor capacitor inductor parts and numerous oth ers Virtual parts also include other ideal devices intended to provide theoretical equiva lents of for example the perfect opamp For educational purposes you can hide the values of all components in a circuit from stu dents view by using circuit restrictions See 13 4 2 Setting Circuit Restrictions on page 13 6 for details Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 19 eunjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 3 9 3 Controlling How a Placed Component is Used in Analyses For some components you can determine how they are to be used in any analyses you might perform on the circuit These components offer an additional properties screen tab Anal ysis Setup For educational purposes you can hide analysis information for all components in a circuit See 13 4 2 Setting Circuit Restrictions on page 13 6 for details gt To control how the component is used in analyses 1 Double click on the component The properties screen for the component appears 2 Click the Analysis Setup tab AC Current x Enable the options for the analyses in Label Display Value Analysis Setup Faut l Choose which which you want magnitude and or the component phase is to be used AC Magnitude fi A used during the AG Phase ot Bs analysis IV Distortion Option Frequency 1 Magnitude fi A Phase fo Deg v Distortion Option Frequency 2 Mag
205. eshed a few times to obtain accurate readings of the frequency components and their magnitudes At this time the internal frequency resolu tion is equal to the user defined frequency resolution Both of these values are shown on the device Using the cursor on the screen you can read the amplitude and frequency of each component In the example the readings are the same as the calculated values that is two fre quency components at 2MHz and 0 4 MHz with 40 V magnitude Example 2 In order to run another example you need to choose Run Stop and stop the simulation run ning for the previous example The second example has the same circuit structure as shown below Y Ty Ad 10 1 2MHz E Tviv 1 However DC offsets 1 V to the input and the output signals are introduced Due to the off sets you will have components at DC as well as 0 8 MHz and 1 2 MHz The spectrum ana lyzer shows the components and their amplitude on the screen if the same setting used in the previous example is also used here Electronics Workbench RF Instruments 14 4 2 Example 3 This example considers an active device that works in saturation This structure is shown below 250kOhm c1 k 01 x2 fi 3 BFR106 0 1v 2MHz dur 2 WS 0 1 4MHz l gt To initialize the spectrum analyzer 1 Double click on the spectrum analyzer 2 Set Start to IKHz and End to 11MHz 3 Click Enter The frequency value of f
206. essor 9 4 default instrument settings 6 5 default path 2 8 deleting components 5 14 Description window 3 25 description adding to circuit 3 25 design bar 2 3 DIN symbols 3 3 display details 2 5 displaying information about placed components 3 16 displaying or hiding grid title block and page borders 3 2 distortion analysis 8 23 distortion analyzer 6 9 harmonic distortion 6 10 SINAD 6 10 dual channel oscilloscope 6 24 E Edit menu 2 13 editing component symbol 5 16 components 5 5 equation solution 7 7 error log audit trail 8 53 Excel exporting simulation results to 12 3 exporting simulation results to Excel 12 3 simulation results to MathCAD 12 3 F faults assigning to components 13 1 Field Programmable Gate Array See FPGA Multisim User Guide File menu 2 11 flipping components 3 15 Footprint tab 5 29 Fourier analysis 8 16 FPGA 10 3 frequency 6 33 function generator about 6 11 rise time 6 12 signal options 6 12 G general component properties 5 7 General tab 5 7 global components using 4 26 global restrictions passwords 13 9 setting 13 4 Gmin stepping 7 9 Grapher 8 54 Grapher window 8 54 graphs about Grapher window 8 54 cut copy paste 8 63 printing 8 64 using in post processor 9 7 viewing 8 57 grid displaying or hiding 3 2 showing 2 6 grounding oscilloscope 6 25 H hardware description language See HDL harmonic distortion distortion analyzer 6 10 HDLs about 10 2 in Multisim 10 3 hie
207. f Analysis Display Graphs 8 55 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 24 Working with Pages Every analysis you perform on a circuit displays its results on a separate page Every trace may also appear on a separate page if that is how you have set up your analysis ii 8 56 To view a page click its tab To scroll through pages when there are too many tabs to fit in the available space click the forward or reverse arrow buttons that appear at the right edge of the tabs To change page properties 1 Select a page by clicking its tab 2 Click the Properties button The Page Properties screen appears Page Properties m Tab Name TabName MEUSENE MENASE r Title Tite Eont Page Properties Background Color C white Show Hide Diagrams on Page To change Do this Name of the tab OK BETTE Cancel pw Epp modify Tab Name field Title of chart or graph modify Title field Title s font click Font button and choose from fonts displayed Background color of page select from Background Color drop down list box Which diagrams appear on the page click Show Hide Diagrams on Page and select from the list that appears 3 To apply the change and close the screen click OK To apply the change and leave the screen open for additional selections click Apply Electronics Workbench Working with Graphs 8 25 Worki
208. for active circuits only The connection should look like this JH 100F Q1 q MRFS27T1 258kO0hm 2 Choose Simulate Run and wait until the AC analyses are complete Ignore the warning for DC analyses 3 Double click on the Network Analyzer icon on circuit window and from the Mode drop down list select Match Net designer 4 On the Match Net designer window that appears do the following setthe frequency to 3 02 GHz since the circuit is unconditionally stable for this frequency point click Impedance Matching Multisim User Guide 14 41 du RF RF 14 42 since the circuit is unconditionally stable automatic impedance matching is possi ble Click Auto Match The window provides the structure and the values necessary for conjugate matching hence maximum power transfer is achieved Below is our design for maximum power transfer at f 3 02 GHz R1 L2 R3 0 01 3 02GHz l 1 2175pF 91 MRFS27T1 10 9 4 693nH 50kOhm ca 0 8062pF j HA Note 1Fis needed to isolate the active network from its matching network to keep the tran sistor in its biasing state Impedance matching yields maximum power transfer for a very narrow bandwidth In real applications however you need to balance the power transfer and the bandwidth For this rea son mismatching is intentionally introduced to the circuit gt To design the amplifier for a const
209. formation on these components RF Instruments Multisim s RF Design module provides two key instruments for successful RF circuit design and analysis the Spectrum Analyzer and the Network Analyzer 14 4 1 Spectrum Analyzer 14 4 1 1 About the Spectrum Analyzer The spectrum analyzer is used to measure amplitude versus frequency This instrument is capable of measuring a signal s power and frequency components and helps determine the existence of harmonics in the signal One area that has an interest in spectrum measurement is communications For example cel lular radio systems must be checked for harmonics of the carrier signal that might interfere with other RF systems Other interesting applications of spectrum analysis are distortions of the message modulated onto a carrier The spectrum analyzer displays its measurements in the frequency domain rather than the time domain Usually the reference frame in signal analysis is time In that case an oscillo scope is used to show the instantaneous value as a function of time Sometimes a sine wave form is expected but the signal rather than being a pure sinusoidal has a harmonic on it As a result it is not possible to measure the waveform s level If the same signal were displayed on a spectrum analyzer its amplitude would be displayed but so would its frequency compo nents that is its fundamental frequency and any harmonics it may contain Time domain measurements such as rise a
210. g a Component General Properties liliis 5 7 Editing a Component Electronic Parameters 00 000 c eee eee 5 8 Adding Components 0 00 e ects 5 9 Removing Components ooo 5 14 Copying Components 6 00 eaea 5 15 Editing and Creating a Component Symbol 0 000 cece eee eee 5 16 Copying a Component s Symbol 0000 cee eee ssh 5 17 Creating and Editing a Component s Symbol with the Symbol Editor 5 18 Symbol Editor Menus lisse nes 5 19 Symbol Editor Palette 2 0 0 cece eee 5 20 Working with the Symbol Editor 0000 0c eee eee ee 5 21 Labels a vE Ioa new ea ee RI PPS gh ole tad ere tiet s 5 21 Shape ae ann T 5 21 RIAS o ra e PE o aa 5 22 Creating or Editing a Component Model 2 222222 ees 5 25 Copying a Component s Model occcccccc nenn 5 27 Loading an Existing Model sseeeseeeeee nen 5 28 Creating and Editing Component Footprints llle 5 29 Pin Group Naming Convention 22 sense nennen nennen een 5 30 Pin Type Naming Convention 2 22 0000 nennen nn 5 30 vi Electronics Workbench Chapter 6 Instruments About this Chapter rarus n oi 0 00 0 cette een 6 1 Introduction to the Multisim Instruments 00000 ee eee 6 1 Working with Multiple Instruments lisse III 6 4 Default Instrument Analysis Settings liliis 6 5 Bode Plotter ws reser lan d
211. g error tolerances selecting simulation techniques and viewing the results Simulation efficiency is also dependent on the options you choose This section briefly describes the simulation options you have for controlling simulation used within the analyses and lists their default values You will find these options through the Mis cellaneous Options tabs of the various analyses screens as explained in 8 3 4 The Miscella neous Options Tab on page 8 6 Multisim User Guide 8 65 sos A euy Analyses Analyses Code Option Name Description Default Unit Recommendation ACCT Printsimulation Turns on off display of statisti Off statistics cal data on simulation related information Data may be use ful for debugging simulation related problems Data appears in the Grapher screen GMIN Minimum con Resets the minimum conduc 1 0e 12 mho Do not change default ductance tance used in any circuit branch Cannot be zero Increasing this may positively improve the convergence of the solution however it will also negatively affect simulation accuracy RELTOL Relative error Resets the relative error toler 0 001 Use typical values tolerance ance of the simulation which is between 1 0e 06 and the universal accuracy control 0 01 The value can significantly affect the convergence of the solution and the simulation speed Value must be between 1 and 0 ABSTOL Absolute error Resets the absolute current
212. ger qualifier drop down list select the desired trigger qualifier The trigger qualifier is an input signal that filters the triggering signal If it is set to x then the qual ifier is disabled and the trigger signal determines when the logic analyzer is triggered If it is set to 1 or O the logic analyzer is triggered only when the triggering signal matches the selected trigger qualifier 6 Click Accept The possible trigger combinations are A B C AorB Aor C BorC AORBORC A AND B A AND C B AND C A AND B AND C NOB ANOC BNOC A THEN B Electronics Workbench Multimeter A THEN C B THEN C A OR B THEN C ATHEN BORC ATHENBTHENC ATHEN B WITHOUT C 6 10 Multimeter XMM1 Negative terminal B restive terminal Use the multimeter to measure AC or DC voltage or current and resistance or decibel loss between two nodes in a circuit The multimeter is auto ranging so a measurement range does not need to be specified Its internal resistance and current are preset to near ideal values which can be changed see 6 10 3 Internal Settings on page 6 22 654 598 mV Measurement options Click to display internal settings Signal mode 6 10 1 Measurement Options Decibels Ammeter E Voltmeter Ohmmeter Multisim User Guide Sjueuuny su Instruments Instruments al 6 10 1 1 Ammeter This option measures current flowing through the circuit in a branch between
213. gether in the co simulation mode Multisim s simulation engine checks which type of model SPICE VHDL Verilog HDL etc is used as indicated in the component database and calls the appropriate simulator It then controls the passing of information between these various simu Jators all without requiring your intervention To simulate a system or board level design these simulators are used together in a co simula tion environment This means that for example a chip that is modeled using VHDL or Ver ilog HDL whether a CPLD FPGA or a complex digital chip such as a microcontroller can be a component in a PCB design Multisim will simulate most of the board using SPICE but automatically simulate the VHDL or Verilog HDL modeled chip with VHDL or Verilog HDL simulation This co simulation environment is described in this chapter Communica tions between the multiple simulation engines in co simulation mode are extremely complex yet remain very easy for you to use All the results are combined together so they can be dis played on a common set of instruments and analyses as if all the devices were modeled using the same technology 7 2 Electronics Workbench Using Multisim Simulation 7 3 7 3 1 E Using Multisim Simulation This chapter explains the simulation of PCB level circuits This by default is primarily the function of the Multisim SPICE simulator In cases where the PCB circuit makes use of a complex digital
214. gin simulation as described in 7 3 Using Multisim Simulation on page 7 3 and a component that is part of your system or board level circuit is modeled in Verilog HDL For details on Verilog HDL simulation see Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic You need not do anything different to simulate in this co simulation mode than you do to simulate a circuit with only SPICE modeled parts Just begin simulation as nor mal and Multisim takes care of the rest recognizing when Verilog HDL models exist and reacting accordingly As part of the programmable logic design process in which you write simulate and debug Verilog HDL source code For details on this type of Verilog HDL simulation see Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic Electronics Workbench Chapter 8 Analyses 8 1 About this Chapter x ca Gia A IEA Del 8 1 8 2 Introduction to Multisim Analyses llle eee 8 1 8 3 Working with Analyses lees m 8 2 8 3 1 General InsStructiONS ooooococoooooo een ern 8 2 8 3 2 The Analysis Parameters Tab 0 0 00 c ee eee 8 3 8 3 3 The Output Variables Tab 8 3 8 3 3 1 Choosing How Output Variables are to be Handled 8 4 8 3 3 2 Filtering the Variable Lists llle 8 4 8 3 3 3 Adding Parameters to the Variable List 8 5 8 3 4 The Miscellaneous Options Tab 2000 cece esee 8 6 8 3 5 The Summary Tab sssseselee nennen nenn
215. gram in detail or choose Help Multi sim Reference to display the help file that contains reference material from the appendices such as details on all the components families provided with Multisim Both are standard Windows help files offering a table of contents and index In addition you can display context sensitive help by pressing Fl from amy command or window or by clicking the Help button on any screen that offers it Adobe PDF Files Both the Getting Started and Tutorial manual and the full User Guide including appendices are provided on the Multisim CD as Adobe PDF files and are accessible from the Multisim program folder on the Windows Start menu To open PDF files you will need Adobe s free Acrobat Reader program available for download at www adobe com License Agreement Please read the license agreement included in the Multisim Getting Started and Tutorial Manual carefully before installing and using the software contained in this package By installing and using the software you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this license If you do not agree to the terms of this license simply return the unused software within thirty days to the place where you obtained it and your money will be refunded Chapter 1 Introduction Whatis Multisim 00 es ieiunus ur EPI mE 1 1 Multisim Educational Editions lle a 1 1 Chapter 2 User Interface About this Chapter zs seo voe ER ee re ut Mn adiuti e ntm eda
216. h the Cir cuit tab being the active tab Use this tab to control the colors and display details for your circuit Shows the results of enabling the options on the right Circuit Workspace Preferences Print page setup r Show IV Show component labels 1 0kohm Test Enable those items you want by default to be shown You can override your choices for a particular component as described in 3 9 1 Displaying Identify ing Information about a Placed Component on page 3 16 Background Wire Active component Passive component Set up the desired color scheme see below LLLI Virtual component gt To set the circuit options for the current circuit right click on the circuit window and choose either Show which displays a screen identical to the Show options in the Circuit tab of the User Preferences screen shown above or Color which displays a screen identical to the Color options in the Circuit tab Multisim comes with several color schemes that affect the circuit window background color wire color and component color You can also develop your own color scheme to meet your individual needs Touseone of the built in color schemes 1 Choose the scheme from the drop down list A representation of the scheme s settings appears in the preview box below the list 2 To save your settings and close the screen click OK To cancel your settings click Cancel
217. hanged Use the Auto Scale button to automatically scale the data so that it can be displayed within the current chart Use the Setup button to change the various display properties of the network analyzer Multisim User Guide 14 17 du RF RF 14 5 14 5 1 14 18 14 4 2 6 Data Controls Use the Save button to save the current S parameter data set to file Use the Load button to load a previously saved S parameter data set into the network ana lyzer Once the data is loaded you can use all the functions provided by the network analyzer to view and analyze the data The saved S parameter file has the file extension sp Use the Exp button to export the data set of the selected parameter group to a text file For example if the selected parameter group is Z parameters displayed in magnitude phase chart format Z parameters will be exported and their values will be in magnitude phase format Use the Print button to print the selected chart 14 4 2 7 Mode Controls From the Mode drop down list select the network analyzer mode measurement mode which provides the parameters in different formats RF Characterizer mode which provides the power gains voltage gains and impedances seen from input and output ports e Match Net designer mode which opens a new window explained in 14 5 2 Matching Network Analysis on page 14 20 Use the first of the above choices to use the Network analyzer to perform measu
218. he DC operating point is first calculated to obtain linear small signal models for all nonlinear components Then a complex matrix containing both real and imaginary components is created To construct a matrix DC sources are given zero values AC sources capacitors and inductors are represented by their AC models Nonlinear components are rep resented by linear AC small signal models derived from the DC operating point solution All input sources are considered to be sinusoidal The frequency of the sources is ignored If the function generator is set to a square or triangular waveform it will automatically switch inter nally to a sinusoidal waveform for analysis AC analysis then calculates the AC circuit response as a function of frequency Assumptions Applied to an analog circuit small signal Digital components are treated as large resistances to ground Setting AC Analysis Frequency Parameters Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and decide on the nodes for analysis You can specify magnitude and phase of a source for AC frequency analysis through the placed component s parameters as described in 3 9 3 Controlling How a Placed Component is Used in Analyses on page 3 20 Multisim User Guide 8 11 sos A euy Analyses Analyses AC Analysis Frequency parameters are set in the following screen Ac Analysis Enter the start frequency for the sweep Enter the stop frequency for the sweep Sele
219. he Design Bar 2 From the list that appears choose Remote Control Design Sharing Netmeeting is launched Multisim User Guide 13 11 epinc siojeonp3 Educators Guide Educators Guide 13 12 Electronics Workbench Chapter 14 RF 14 1 14 2 14 8 144 About this Chiaptet ede ede RR an a Re 14 1 Introduction to the Multisim RF Module lesser eene 14 1 COMPONENTS ie teen ERIS Pas Ep EET IE DURER 14 2 14 3 1 About RF Components ree 14 2 14 3 2Multisim s RF Components 0000 0c ees 14 2 14 3 3Theoretical Explanation of the RF Models 00200 eee eee 14 8 14 3 3 1Striplines Microstrips Waveguides o oooococccccoooo ooo 14 3 14 3 3 2RFResist rs oi ia di UP 14 5 14 3 3 9HF Capacitors inl erahnen at 14 5 14 3 3 ARE Inductors iiu cet Saree bees be iuda Gg REM nat 14 6 14 3 3 5Active Devices es Son aa ughe e e nes 14 7 RE Instruments enir ee en ea 14 9 14 4 1 Spectrum Analyzer lisse 14 9 14 4 1 1About the Spectrum Analyzer 0 000 eee ee 14 9 14 4 1 2Using Multisim s Spectrum Analyzer lisse 14 9 14 4 1 3Frequency Range 0 eee eee 14 10 14 4 1 4Frequency Spans o ooccococcocc 14 10 14 4 1 5Frequency Analysis 0 0 0 0 00 ccc eee 14 11 14 4 1 6Amplitude Range llle 14 12 14 4 1 7Reference Level 0 0 0 cee nn 14 12 14 4 1 8Frequency Resolution llli 14 13 14 4 1 9Examples ea Rep ERE 14 13 14 4 2Network
220. he following screen Noise Analysis x Choose an AC voltage Analysis Parameters Frequency Parameters Dutput variables Miscellaneous Options Summary source as input 0 Input noise reference source wi zl _ Changefie 1 y Change Filter This is the node at which oo Duput node all noise contributions will Reference node fi y _ Change Filter be summed Reference voltage When enabled generates a trace of the selected compo nent s noise contribution Number of frequency steps is divided by the points per sum mary which reduces the res olution of the output graph Description pol Simulate Accept Cancel Help Setting Noise Analysis Parameters for Normal Use Noise analysis performs an AC analysis to determine the noise To copy the settings from the current AC analysis to this analysis click Reset to main AC values Noise analysis produces an output noise spectrum an input noise spectrum and optionally a component contribution spectrum When the analysis is finished its results are displayed as a graph of voltage squared V versus frequency The thick trace identifies the total output noise at node 13 while the thin trace identifies the equivalent input noise at the AC source VO For this example the output noise power is con stant for all frequencies within the frequency sweep specified in the window Multisim User Guide 8 21 sos A euy Analyses An
221. hing at the input and or the output ports to improve the bandwidth even though the resulting power transfer is not maximal Low Noise Amplifier Design In receiver applications you need a pre amplifier with as low a figure noise as possible since the first stage of a receiver front end has a dominant effect on the noise performance of the overall system It is not possible to obtain both min imum noise figure and maximum gain for an amplifier e Oscillators To produce a sinusoidal steady state RF signal you can use active elements and intentionally introduce negative resistance The network analyzer provided by Multisim is not intended for high power RF amplifiers because the network analyzer performs small signal analyses of the RF network only In this tutorial we will design the amplifier for maximum power transfer Then we will pro vide design steps for constant gains gt To prepare for the tutorial open a new circuit window 14 7 2 Selecting an RF Transistor 14 38 Different types of transistors are designed for a broad range of applications For example you may find many transistors for low noise applications Cost of the transistor plays a significant role in choosing from those offered In this tutorial we will choose MRF927T1 because it is used for low power low noise applications at relatively high frequencies To select the MRF927T1 transistor in Multisim do the following 1 Click the RF Parts Bin 2
222. i y Use NODESET for DC p Y Sets nodes values to be used for these anal yses 2 Make the desired settings 3 To confirm your settings click OK To cancel them click Cancel Note You should exercise caution when changing node names as they are critical to your circuit s connectivity as understood by simulation or PCB layout gt To move a node label simply select it and drag it to a new location 3 11 3 Adding a Title Block You can enter information about your circuit including title description and size using the Title Block screen Whether or not the title block appears is controlled as described in 3 3 2 Displaying or Hiding the Grid Title Block and Page Borders on page 3 2 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 23 eunjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture gt To enter information about your circuit 1 Choose Edit Set Title Block The Title Block screen appears 2 Enter information about your circuit and click OK The title block appears at the bottom right corner of the sheet If the title block does not appear it may be set to be hidden See 3 3 2 Displaying or Hiding the Grid Title Block and Page Borders on page 3 2 for details gt To edit the contents of a title block choose Edit Set Title Block and modify the text 3 11 4 Adding Miscellaneous Text Multisim allows you to add notes to a circuit for example to explain a particular part of a cir cuit To a
223. ibrary levels to prevent corrup tion of the Multisim master level Warning If you modify any piece of information about any compo nent in the corporate library or user levels of the Multisim data base you are prompted for a new name for the component If you do not give a new name Multisim saves the changes to the original location so the original user level or corporate library level com ponent information is lost It is recommended that you do provide a new name even for minor variations to the original For educational purposes you may choose to disallow component editing by students You can use restrictions to prevent students from editing components See 13 4 Using Restric tions on page 13 3 for more information Managing the Database The Database Management screen allows you to e add and remove component families from the user or corporate library database You can not add or remove families in the Multisim master database set up or modify user field titles for any database e add or change toolbar button symbols for component families in user or corporate library Electronics Workbench databases gt To invoke the Database Management screen 1 Click the Component editing button on the Design Bar and choose Database Management from the pop up menu that appears LF W or Choose Tools Database Management The Database Management screen appears Database Maintainance Le
224. ick Cancel to return to the Model Tab of the Component Properties screen 4 For analog model makers refer to subsequent sections of this chapter for procedures on using specific Model Makers For RF model makers see Chapter 14 RF 5 When you have entered in all the required information in the Model Maker screens click OK The data for the model you have just created will appear in the Model tab fields gt To load or import an existing VHDL Verilog HDL Code Model or SPICE model for your component 1 Click Load Model From File A standard file browser appears allowing you to choose the file type name and location of the files to be loaded Before loading a netlist make sure you know what folder it is in Most Bspice Xspice and Pspice netlists end in exten sions cir and net 2 Select the file to load and click OK The model data appears in the Model tab fields Note PSpice is not an industry standard but is proprietary to the Orcad SPICE simulation tool Since some component vendors make models for their components available in PSpice format Multisim has been designed to support PSpice models as extensively as possible However you will not be able to share models or circuits with other SPICE users or tools Electronics Workbench 5 12 Creating and Editing Component Footprints The Footprint tab of the Component Properties screen allows you to specify modify package information for a component and map physical and
225. ified analyses and provides all the data for direct output or post processing Output stage You view the simulation results You can view results on instruments such as the oscilloscope on graphs that appear when you run an anal ysis or in the log file audit trail 7 6 Electronics Workbench Multisim SPICE Simulation Technical Detail 7 4 4 Equation Formulation In a circuit each common point created by wires and connectors is called a node The simula tor calculates the voltage at each node Each branch joining two nodes will have a separate current flowing through it To calculate a circuit solution a circuit is represented internally as a system of equations in the form A X B where A modified nodal admittance matrix with dimension n x n X vector of unknowns with dimension n B vector of constants also with dimension n n number of unknowns The system of equations is formulated using a general circuit analysis method called the Mod ified Nodal Approach MNA The unknowns 7 include each node voltage excluding ground as well as the voltage source currents B contains the voltage and current source constants and the entries in the admittance matrix A are determined by Ohm s law and Kirchhoff s current and voltage laws The modified nodal admittance matrix is deemed sparse because it contains more zeros than non zeros Making use of a linked list the solution of circuit equations can be performe
226. ill display the results in the Grapher It is also the name given to the Postprocessor page on which the trace will be stored Depending on the trace you are prompted for a Grapher graph name plot name or both If prompted for both and you do not want to create one of them click Cancel when prompted for that name The results of the Postprocessor plotting the trace appear in the Grapher screen on pages with the names you specified that is one for a plot one for a graph along with the results of the analyses previously performed Results including errors are also recorded in the audit trail If the audit trail is not already open you can open it from the View menu The equation as shown in the Traces to plot window moves down a line leaving the top line free for a new trace For more on working with multiple traces see 9 3 1 2 Creating Multiple Traces on page 9 6 9 3 1 1 Using the Default Analysis The equation you build using the Postprocessor contains variables that are prefixed with their analysis code To simplify the equation and the trace displayed on the graph you can set one of the analyses to be the default analysis Electronics Workbench Using the Postprocessor The Analysis Results list always contains one analysis defined as the default The default is the analysis that in the absence of any other indication the Postprocessor uses for calcula tions Variables from the default analysis do not hav
227. imulation data for transfer together For example when transferring your schematic to per form a PCB layout Multisim can include optimized trace width information calculated using the Trace Width Analysis during simulation Transferring Data Transferring from Multisim to Ultiboard for PCB Layout One of the most common applications to which you may want to transfer data is a PCB layout program Ultiboard also from Electronics Workbench is one of the industry s leading PCB layout tools and offers many advantages over other layout programs including trace width optimization synchronized with Multisim simulation gt To transfer a circuit design from Multisim to Ultiboard in order to perform a PCB layout Multisim User Guide 12 1 J9 SUeA Transfer Transfer Communication e 1 Click the Transfer button on the Design Bar 2 From the menu that appears choose Transfer to Ultiboard A standard file browser appears 3 Specify the name and location of the file to be created Multisim then creates files that can then be loaded into Ultiboard 4 Load the created files into Ultiboard following the instructions in the Ultiboard User Guide Note If changes are made to your design while in Ultiboard you may want to backannotate them in Multisim This is done using the Transfer menu not the Design Bar button and is explained in 2 6 5 Transfer Menu on page 2 24 12 3 2 Transferring to Other PCB Layout If you are using
228. ine which data will be transferred to MathCAD By default Math CAD will assign the x and y coordinates of the current trace to the variables in and in2 If necessary move the trace to the correct location by clicking on it to check which trace is current enable the cursors a 5 Click the Transfer to MathCAD button 6 A new MathCAD session is started Note MathCAD will shut down when Multisim shuts down 12 4 2 Exporting to Excel You can export your simulation results to Excel allowing you to use the data for further pro cessing in a spreadsheet Note This function is only available if you have Excel installed on your computer gt To export the simulation results to an Excel spreadsheet e 1 Click the Transfer button on the Design Bar 2 From the list that appears choose Export Simulation Results to Excel A prompt screen appears asking you to confirm that you want to open the Grapher and continue with the export process 3 Click OK The Grapher appears showing the results of your simulation and or analysis 4 Use the Grapher to define which data will be transferred to MathCAD The Excel spread sheet will contain the x and y coordinates of the current trace If necessary move the trace Multisim User Guide 12 3 JeisueJ Transfer Transfer Communication to the correct location by clicking on it to check which trace is current enable the cur sors Al 5 Click the Transfer to Excel button A new Exce
229. ing the component you want to remove 4 From the Component list choose the component you want to remove 5 To continue click Delete You are prompted to confirm the deletion To cancel click Exit Electronics Workbench 5 9 Copying Components gt To copy an existing component 1 Click the Component editing button on the Design Bar and choose Copy Component from the pop up menu that appears LF Y Choose Tools Copy Component The Copy Component screen appears Select Component Copy x r Database Name MultiSIM Master Family Name pes y 5 Component Name 744LS00M Manufacturer National Model Level ID Lo TAALSODA 2 Using the drop down lists identify the component you want to copy and click Copy You are prompted to select a destination 3 Select the component database and component family that you want to copy the compo nent to and click OK A confirmation screen appears assuring you that the component has been copied 4 Click OK to return to the Copy Component screen 5 When you are finished copying components click Exit Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JOHP3 1ueuoduio5 Component Editor 5 10 Editing and Creating a Component Symbol The Symbol tab of the Component Properties screen allows you to edita component s symbol give acomponent the same symbol as another component create a symbol for a component Component Properties
230. int page setup When disabled colored Prntmede components print in JEN printing mode the way circuit will appear in printing shades of grey rjv Output In Black White Output Background Enable to include Fei background in El Set page margins Type or select the distance in inch or printed copy Use for centimeters i i op os 24 color printers or white MeesaemeniUnie Hosen 77 3 on black output Po n E E C Centimeters Right 3 3 Set page margins for printed output m Magnification Select how large or small you want your circuit to appear in printing as a percentage of its normal size Select an option to C FitToOnePage C 75 scale the circuit ___ Ta C 140 C 50 down or up in 100 C Custom setting 100 printed output Cancel Help gt To set these options for the current circuit choose File Print Setup and click Page Setup The above options are presented on a series of tabs 2 4 6 Other Customization Options You can also customize the interface by showing or hiding dragging to a new location and optionally resizing any of the following system toolbar Design Bar e In Use list database selector These changes apply to all circuits you are working with Moved or resized items will return to that location and size when next opened Finally you can use the View menu to display or hide various elements as described in 2 6 3 View Menv on page
231. ion is interactive You can simply change the values of interactive components those whose behavior can be controlled through the keyboard and see the simulation results instantly Interactive components include such devices as the potentiometer variable capacitor variable inductor and multiple switcher For example changing a 100 kohm resistor to the next smaller resistor may alter the results more than desired but with Multisim you could use a variable resistor reducing its value gradually all the time seeing the simulation result change until you reach the correct result Circuit Consistency Check When you simulate your circuit or perform an analysis a circuit consistency check is per formed to determine if the circuit is legal for example if a ground is present Errors are written to the error log This function speeds your simulation process since it alerts you to items that may cause simulation errors and allows you to correct them before simulating Keep in mind that the types of problems found by the circuit consistency check are those that will cause simulation errors The circuit consistency check does not necessarily indicate a cir cuit s viability Miscellaneous SPICE Simulation Capabilities Multisim offers the following SPICE specific simulation capabilities 7 3 4 4 Component Tolerances As explained in 4 5 Component Nominal Values and Tolerances on page 4 26 Multisim allows you to use real wo
232. is operating point analysis increase the ITL1 value to 500 or 1000 and rerun the analysis ITL2 DC transfer Resets the DC transfer curve 50 curve iteration iteration limit limit ITL4 Uppertransient Resets the upper bound limit to 10 If you receive the error iteration limit the number of Newton Raph message Time step too son iterations at each transient small or No convergence time point Increasing the value in transient analysis may slow down transient simu increase the ITL4 value to lation time Decreasing the 15 and rerun the analysis value increases the chance of in convergence DEFL Default MOS Resets the value for MOS 0 0001 Um Use default value unless FET length channel length you know how to specify a value from a MOS device datasheet DEFW Default MOS Resets the value for MOS 0 0001 Um Use default value unless FET width channel width you know how to specify a value from a MOS device datasheet DEFAD Default MOS Resets the value for MOS drain 0 m Use default value unless FET area of diffusion area you know how to specify a drain value from a MOS device datasheet Multisim User Guide 8 67 sos A euy Analyses Analyses DEFAS Default MOS Resets the value for MOS 0 m Use default value unless FET area of Source diffusion area you know how to specify a Source value from a MOS device datasheet BYPASS Allow bypass Turns off on the device bypass On
233. isplay on page 2 5 To change the color of the placed wire from its default values right click on the wire and choose Color from the pop up menu that appears You are presented with a color palette Choose a color and click OK to apply it to the selected item To change the color scheme including the default wire color for the current circuit only right click on the circuit window The window that appears allows you to set a different color scheme For more on color schemes see 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display on page 2 5 Manually Adding a Junction Connector If you want to start a wire at a position that is neither a pin nor a junction you must add a junction Multisim automatically inserts junctions when you connect one wire to another wire to differentiate them from wires that are crossing but not connected gt To manually add a junction 1 Choose Edit Place Junction Your cursor changes to indicate that a junction is ready to be placed 2 Click on the location where you want the junction placed A connector appears at the selected location gt To make a connection from a placed junction 1 Move your cursor close to the junction until the cursor looks like this l 2 Click and drag a wire from the junction to the desired location Electronics Workbench Rotating Flipping Components 3 8 Rotating Flipping Components You can rotate or flip a component by either using the pop up menu or sele
234. ist filter the variables dis played as well as add a wide range of device or model parameters By default all variables are initially included in the Variables in Circuit list 8 3 3 2 Filtering the Variable Lists To filter the variables list according to general variable type 1 Click the Variables in Circuit drop down list 2 Click the general variable type such as voltages currents device model parameters to include in the list You can filter the variables displayed to include internal nodes such as nodes inside a BJT model or inside a SPICE subcircuits open pins as well as output variables from any sub modules contained in the circuit To filter the variables displayed 1 Click the Filter Variables Displayed button The Filter Nodes screen appears Enable the desired settings T Display internal nodes j F Display submodules Cancel Display open pins 2 Enable one or more settings 3 Click OK Electronics Workbench Working with Analyses 8 3 3 3 Adding Parameters to the Variable List gt To add a parameter from a specific device or model to the list of variables 1 7 Click Add Device Model Parameter The Add Device Model parameter screen appears allowing you to specify which parameter is to be added For example Gloss whilst to add either a Device Type Resistor y device or model Parameter Type parameter evice Paramete dH eer Parameter resistance
235. itations with a specific power dissipation because of your design with a specific electrostatic discharge because of its relationship to other components or with a specific manufacturer because of company requirements To perform a standard search of the database 1 Display the Browser screen normally by clicking on the appropriate Parts Bins and com ponent family in which you want to search or by choosing Edit Place Component Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 21 sjueuodujo 5 Components Components 2 Click Find The Search screen appears Manufacturer Footprint earch gt m Common Parameters Thermal Resistance Junction Cancel Help Thermal resistance Case Power Dissipation az D oo I Po Derating Knee Point lo jJ ano I EN Min Operating Temperature Max Operating Temperature ESD 3 In the desired fields enter your search criteria you must enter at least one item Enter text or numbers using scientific notation Numbers must be prefixed with a symbol for example You can also use gt lt gt and lt in conjunction with numbers to set a range For text case is not considered and you can use the wildcard to find par tial strings For example in the Footprint field e CASE646 06 finds only the exact string CASE646 06 e 06 finds any string ending with 06
236. ith Multiple Instruments slleseeee BB 6 4 6 4 Default Instrument Analysis Settings illii 6 5 6 5 Bode Plotter 52 ese RR ated RU waste A e uM uoa EAR a ame 6 6 6 5 1 Magnitude or Phase den eect ee 6 7 6 5 2 Vertical and Horizontal Axes Settings liliis ils eee 6 7 6 5 2 1 Base Settings s c Seta bae pads rr ente Rd d pius 6 7 6 5 2 2 Horizontal Axis Scale 1 mHz 999 9 GHz 6 8 6 5 2 3 Vertical Axis Scale llle eee 6 8 0 5 3 Headouts ar Aare ee ee uber ruta 6 8 6 6 Distortion Analyzer 0 0 m ren 6 9 6 6 1 Harmonic Distortion 0 0 0 ee re 6 10 6 6 2 SINAD scan aa PRESE REESE E p at a eA es 6 10 6 7 Function Generator ionad enaa toa eiken a a maea hh hr 6 11 6 7 1 Waveform Selection nunana neuan 6 12 6 7 2 Signal Options isis es e pep mde s ERA BED RE YE 6 12 6 7 2 1 Frequency 1Hz 999 MEGHZ ssssels nee 6 12 6 7 2 2 Duty Cycle 1 99 ee 6 12 6 7 2 3 Amplitude 999 kV 0 0 eee 6 12 6 7 2 4 Offset 999 kV and 999 kV lisse ee 6 12 G TA RISING e A et Pd ox E Reel ende 6 12 6 8 Logic Converter sa saaie siea ia w i E E a ei i Ea a eee 6 13 6 8 1 Deriving a Truth Table from a Circuit llle 6 13 6 8 2 Entering and Converting a Truth Table 000 000 lessen 6 14 6 8 3 Entering and Converting a Boolean Expression 2 0005 6 14 69 Logic Analy
237. ith Multisim 4 2 3 15 Electro mechanical Toolbar ANSI Sensing switches Electro M Momentary switches Supplementary contacts ___ Line transformer Coils relays Timed contacts Protection devices _____ Output devices Electronics Workbench Locating Components in the Database 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 DIN Same as ANSI Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Locating Components in the Database You can locate components in a specific component family within a specific database level by either browsing through the available data or by searching for a component that meets spe cific criteria Browsing for Components When you are placing a component the Browser screen that appears lets you browse for com ponents anywhere in the Multisim database For details see 3 5 1 Choosing a Component and Using the Browser Screen on page 3 4 Standard Searching for Components Multisim comes with a powerful search engine to help you quickly locate components if you know some information about the type of component you need Multisim searches its data base for components that meet your criteria and presents them to you enabling you to choose the component that most suits the needs of your application from the list of candidates You might need to select a component with a specific package because of space lim
238. ith the oscilloscope s probe As on a real oscilloscope using AC coupling the first cycle displayed is inaccurate Once the signal s DC component has been calculated and eliminated during the first cycle the waveforms will be accurate With DC coupling the sum of the AC and DC components of the signal is displayed Select ing O displays a reference flat line at the point of origin set by Y position 6 26 Electronics Workbench Oscilloscope Note Do not place a coupling capacitor in series with an oscilloscope probe The oscillo scope will not provide a path for current and the analysis will consider the capacitor improperly connected Instead choose AC coupling 6 12 4 Trigger Descending edge Ascending edge Triggering level Mese E Triggering signal ES T Fue External trigger terminal These settings determine the conditions under which a waveform is first displayed on the oscilloscope 6 12 4 1 Trigger Edge gt To start displaying the waveform on its positive slope or rising signal click the ascending edge button gt To start with the negative slope or falling signal select the descending edge button 6 12 4 2 Trigger Level 999kV 999 kV The trigger level is the point on the oscilloscope s y axis that must be crossed by the wave form before it is displayed Tip A flat waveform will not cross the trigger level To see a flat signal make sure the trig gering signal is set to
239. itude in dB or dBm of some components is above a certain limit in dB or dBm For example say you were interested in the 3dB amplitude By locating 3dB points you can estimate the bandwidth of the amplifier By clicking Display Ref you can set the reference level to 3dB and using the cursor at the same time you can find the lower edge and upper edge of the pass band You can also find out whether the amplitude of the signal is less than a certain value for a cer tain band of frequency To do this observe signals on the spectrum analyzer and use the refer ence button The maximum reference value in dB is set to 30 dB Display Ref is available only if either dB or dBm are activated Electronics Workbench RF Instruments 14 4 1 8 Frequency Resolution The frequency resolution is initially set to a minimum value of A f f end 1024 However you can change it to a greater value and observe the spectrum You need to select the fre quency resolution so that the frequencies are integer multiples of frequency resolutions Note For an accurate reading the frequency components should not be below A f 14 4 1 9 Examples Example 1 The following figure shows a mixer which is often used in communications applications Y 2 LE a vA 10V 1 2MH Ye i z 8V 0 8MHz Tviv OV x There are two input sinusoidal waveforms Their frequencies are 0 8 MHz and 1 2 MHz The amplitudes are set at 8 V and 10 V re
240. k 4 7 Diodes Toolbar coc isi ue aa a ein 4 9 Transistors TOOIDAR 5 52 d rec me ERE C ce Ue oe CR poo 4 10 Arialog Toolbar ne M evene ER LA RO edd 4 12 WADE OOIDAR 2 LE dia o ao 4 13 CMOS Toolbar us dr d ewe ae a EC Se Re RU RR ace RU Et Rc ur 4 14 Miscellaneous Digital Toolbar llle 4 15 Mixed Chips Toolbar 000 RII 4 16 Indicators Toolbar riae aE a rE ee RR II 4 17 Miscellaneous Toolbar llle RII 4 18 Controls Toolbar a od RUE Po XU e Vt a X oye Ad Tx 4 19 FF TODA a ne a a 4 20 Electro mechanical Toolbar 0 0 0 ccc cee ee ee es 4 20 Locating Components in the Database 0 00 cece eens 4 21 Browsing for Components 0 0c cece eee tenes 4 21 Standard Searching for Components 0 00 0c e eee eee eee 4 21 Types of Information Stored for Components 0 00 cece eee eee eee 4 23 Pre Detined Flelds ust Lr ee eom Waited oo sop evil e NE de Eae oe 4 24 General Information cccleeee RR RR n 4 24 Common Parameters aua dea AR RE ede Nein 4 25 Component Specific Data 0 0 0 0 ccc en 4 26 Multisim User Guide V Component Nominal Values and Tolerances 0000 cece eee nee eens 4 26 Chapter 5 Component Editing About this Chapter 0 0 0 0 cette 5 1 Introduction to Component Editing 0 0c cette ee 5 1 Managing the Database 2 0 teens 5 2 Editing Components said Seen A oe ale A AERA 5 5 Editin
241. k Analyzer Note Very low ammeter resistance in a high resistance circuit may result in a mathematical roundoff error gt To display the default internal settings 1 Click Set The Multimeter Settings screen appears Ammeter resistance R roo z4 hOhm voltmeter resistance R ro GOhm Ohmmeter current 1 10 000 pA Cancel 2 Change the desired options 3 To save your changes click OK To cancel them click Cancel Network Analyzer The network analyzer is used to measure the scattering parameters or S parameters of a cir cuit commonly used to characterize a circuit intended to operate at higher frequencies These S parameters are used to derive matching cells using other Multisim analyses The network analyzer also calculates H Y Z parameters The circuit is idealized as a two port network To properly use the network analyzer the cir cuit must be left open at its input and output ports During simulation the network analyzer completes the circuit being analyzed by inserting its sub circuits You need to remove these sub circuits from the circuit before performing other analysis and simulation The network analyzer is part of the RF Design Module For more details see Chapter 14 REF Multisim User Guide 6 23 Sjueuuny su Instruments Instruments 6 12 Oscilloscope Ground terminal Trigger terminal A channel terminal B channel terminal The dual channel oscilloscope
242. l spreadsheet is created with data from the X coordinates in column one and data from the y coordinates in column two 6 If desired save the Excel spreadsheet 12 4 Electronics Workbench Chapter 13 Educators Guide 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 About this Chapter o oococcooccccoc eee 13 1 Circuit Creator s Name estama ieir ei a aaO nennen len 13 1 Assigning Faults to Components 2 22m sun cece es 13 1 13 3 1 Setting a Placed Component s Faults 0 000 e eee nennen 13 2 13 3 2Using the Auto Fault Option lisse 13 3 Using Restrictions ise eg te eek eee eed EE EM METRE ERE RE Ee 0 13 3 13 4 1 Setting Global Restrictions liiis 13 4 13 4 2 Setting Circuit Restrictions liliis 13 6 13 4 3 Setting Passwords for Restrictions nusa saaana 13 9 Remote Control Circuit Sharing 2 aaea 13 10 Multisim User Guide apiny suoyeonpg Educators Guide Electronics Workbench Chapter 13 Educators Guide About this Chapter This chapter describes the tools that Multisim offers to allow you to exercise greater control over the program s interface and functionality when sharing circuits with students as well as to set certain aspects of a circuit s behaviour for instructional purposes These features include assigning faults to components in a circuit setting global and circuit restrictions and sharing controlling files over a network 13 2 Circuit Creator s Name
243. lated by measuring the difference between the voltages and the current and multiplying them together The power factor is the cosine of the phase angle before the voltage and cur rent 10kohm R3 Multisim User Guide 6 29 S USWNJ Su Instruments Instruments 6 15 Word Generator XWG1 Least significant 16 bits in the 32 bit word N External trigger terminal Most significant 16 bits in the 32 bit word Data ready terminal Use the word generator to send digital words or patterns of bits into circuits to provide stimu lus to digital circuits Creates a subset of words for output Word Generator XwWG1 Address Hex equivalent of ae Edit 0000 Input rate 32 bit binary Cument 0000 00000000 ta oor Saves word words for output 00000000 Final 03FE patterns or Trigger generates pre 00000000 mem Extemal For set patterns Indicates break 00000000 F E eo i 00000000 apa point 1 KHz Data 7 A AAA A Hexadecimal Scroll to view 00000000 Hex 00000000 equivalent of other words in 00000000 Binary ASCII oooo current word the pattern 00009009 y o0000000000000000000000000000000 El ASCII equiva lent of cur i rent word Output terminals correspond to Binary equivalent of current those on the word generator icon word 6 30 Electronics Workbench Word Generator 6 15 1 Entering Words The left side of the word generator instrument face displays rows of 8 digit hexadecimal num
244. les from any sub modules contained in the circuit Filtering the variables shortens the list of results To filter the variables displayed 1 Click the Change Filter button The Filter Nodes screen appears Filter nodes x Display internal nodes Display submodules Cancel Display open pins 2 Enable one or more settings 3 Click OK 8 15 Worst Case Analysis 8 15 1 About the Worst Case Analysis 8 38 Worst case analysis is a statistical analysis that lets you explore the worst possible effects of variations in component parameters on the performance of a circuit The first simulation is performed with nominal values Then a sensitivity run AC or DC is performed This allows the simulator to calculate the sensitivity of the output waveform volt age or current with respect to each parameter Expressing a specific component s sensitivity as a negative number yields the component s minimum value for the worst case analysis For Electronics Workbench Worst Case Analysis example if the sensitivity of resistor R1 is 1 22V Ohm then the minimum sensitivity value of this component is calculated with the following formula Rl 12 To x RI nom where Rd cm minimum value of the R1 resistor Tol tolerance specified in the dialog box divided by 100 Rl aom nominal value of the resistor R1 Expressing a specific component s sensitivity as a positive number yields the component s maximum value
245. lgebraic minus s Algebraic times Algebraic divided by Algebraic to the power of Algebraic percentage Algebraic complex 3 4 3 j 4 abs Algebraic absolute value sqrt Algebraic square root sin Trigonometric sine cos Trigonometric cosine tan Trigonometric tangent atan Trigonometric inverse tangent gt Relationship greater than It Relationship less than ge Relationship greater than or equal to Electronics Workbench Available Functions Symbol Type Description le Relationship less than or equal to ne Relationship not equal to eq Relationship equal to and Logic and or Logic or not Logic not db Exponential 20 log10 mag vector log Exponential logarithm base 10 In Exponential natural logarithm base 3 exp Exponential e to the vector power jo Complex i sqrt 1 times vector real Complex real component of vector image Complex imaginary part of vector vi Complex vi x image v x vr Complex vr x real v x mag Vector magnitude ph Vector phase norm Vector vector normalized to 1 that is the largest magni tude of any component is 1 rnd Vector random mean Vector results in a scalar a length 1 vector that is the mean of the elements of the vector Vector number Vector results in a vector of length number with elements 0 1 number 1 If number is a vector than just
246. lick Reset value to default Multisim User Guide s s jeuy Analyses Analyses 4 To save your changes click OK To close without saving click Cancel For a complete list of the available analysis options see 8 29 Analysis Options on page 8 65 8 3 5 The Summary Tab 8 8 This tab offers a quick overview of all the various settings for your analysis It does not require you to set any options but you can use it to view summary information about your analysis Click here to roll up and conceal underly ing information Click here to reveal underlying information Frequency Parameters Output variables Miscellaneous Options Summary Plot title AC Analysis 1 Analysis settings Sweep type Decade Number of points per decade 10 Starting frequency for sweep 1 Ending frequency for sweep 1e 010 Vertical scale Decade Variables from analysis Representation as SPICE commands Results saved to file CNWINDOW SNSTEMPSEWB 12 R amp w Analysis Options Description You navigate through this display as you do with Windows Explorer The beside an item indicates that it has information underneath it which can be revealed by clicking the The beside an item indicates that all its information is being revealed That information can be hidden by clicking the This window also shows you the SPICE representation of your analysis o
247. licking Edit Analysis Under the Analysis Parameters screen that appears enter a start and stop value in the Start and End fields enter the number of points in the Number of time points field The increment value will be calculated and automatically set Note Tf the analysis is unedited the last values set for the analysis will be used If the analy sis has not been run previously the default values will apply e if want to sweep other than the list type the desired parameter values separated by a space in the Values field Setting Parameter Sweep Analysis Parameters for Advanced Use You can use the Analysis Parameters screen to select different sweep variation types while setting Analysis Parameters You can also perform nested sweeps combining various levels of device model parameter sweeps To set the sweep variation type and specify the range and number of points to sweep 1 Choose the type of distribution linear decade or octave from the Sweep Variation Type drop down list Click Edit Analysis A new Analysis Parameters screen appears Enter a start value for the sweep in the Start Time field Enter a stop value for the sweep in the Stop Time field SE Enter the number of points in the Time points field The increment value will be calcu lated and automatically set Multisim User Guide 8 33 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 13 Temperature Sweep Analysis 8 13 1 About the Temperature Sweep Analysi
248. llow Waveguides come in a variety of types simple parallel plate structure cylindrical structures with conduct ing boundaries rectangular waveguides and circular waveguides A transmission line or a stripline is a special case of waveguide n 14 3 3 2 RF Resistors Resistors find many applications as terminators or attenuators The equivalent circuit of a resistor at radio frequency is shown in the following figure The inductor is calculated using the physical geometry of the resistor L 0 0021 23 10e 47 0 75 J UH l length of wire in cm d diameter in cm 14 3 3 3 RF Capacitors Capacitors are used for interstage coupling for bypassing in resonant circuits and in filters RF capacitors must be chosen carefully to ensure the best performance for specific applica tions RF capacitors consist of two metal plates separated by a dielectric The capacitance of an ideal capacitor has a direct relationship with the area A and is proportional inversely to the thickness of the dielectric d Its relationship is expressed in the following formula where is the dielectric constant of the dielectric material A C ez Multisim User Guide 14 5 du RF RF The actual capacitor shows imperfection One type of capacitor is modeled as shown in the following figure R2 AIA In order to find the numerical values of the ideal elements in the model above we need to con sider a number of factors Let
249. ltage source AC current source Clock source AM source FM voltage source FM current source FSK source Voltage controlled voltage source Voltage controlled current source Voltage controlled sine wave Current controlled volt age source Current controlled current source Voltage controlled square wave Voltage controlled piece wise linear source v Voltage controlled triangle T wave Piecewise linear voltage 1 source 1 Pulse voltage source Piecewise linear current source os Pulse current source 13 Exp voltage source Nonlinear dependent source Controlled one shot E Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Electronics Workbench Structure of the Component Database 4 2 3 3 Basic Toolbar ANSI Resistor Resistor virtual Capacitor e Inductor A B beet rn Potentiometer i Variable capacitor Capacitor virtual Inductor virtual Variable potentiometer Virtual variable capacitor o Variable inductor Virtual variable inductor Rpack Pullup Non linear transformer Switch Transformer Coreless coil Magnetic core Relay Sockets Connectors E Capacitor smt Inductor smt Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 7 sjueuodujoj5 Components Components DIN Resistor AR Mult F3 Resistor virtual Capaci
250. lysis Results list click the sign beside the item naming the first analysis whose results you want to work with Each analysis is identified with a name followed by Electronics Workbench Using the Postprocessor a code in brackets That code will be used to identify the variables from that analysis when the trace is plotted The variables that resulted from that analysis appear in the Analysis Variables list For more about the syntax of these variables see 9 4 Postprocessor Vari ables on page 9 8 To filter the Analysis Variables list to show only certain variables choose from the drop down list of options to show all variables top level variables only not those in subcircuits subcircuit variables only open pins variables only device parameters variables only From the Analysis Variables list select the variables you want included in the equations being used to define the trace and click Copy Variable to Trace The variable appears in the Traces to plot window prefixed with the code of the analysis from which it is drawn unless the selected analysis is the default analysis for details on using the default anal ysis see 9 3 1 1 Using the Default Analysis on page 9 4 Traces to plot Here is the equation you New Page _LoadPages Load Pages Delete Page are building which will y New Graph Save Pages _ SayePages Pages Delete Diagram be used to plot the Ne New Chart trace No
251. lysis determines the DC operating point of a circuit For DC anal ysis AC sources are zeroed out and steady state is assumed that is capacitors are open cir cuits and inductors are short circuits The results of DC analysis are usually intermediate values for further analysis For example the DC operating point obtained from DC analysis determines approximate linearized small signal models for any nonlinear components such as diodes and transistors for the AC frequency analysis Assumptions Digital components are treated as large resistances to ground Results include node DC voltages and branch currents Note You can specify whether or not specific node trace widths are to be used for this type of analysis For details see 3 11 2 Modifying Node Numbers on page 3 23 8 4 2 Setting DC Operating Point Analysis Parameters There are no analysis parameters to be set for this analysis Multisim User Guide 8 9 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 4 3 8 10 Troubleshooting DC Operating Point Analysis Failures DC operating point analysis may fail to converge for various reasons The initial guesses for the node voltages may be too far off the circuit may be unstable or bi stable there may be more than one solution to the equations there may be discontinuities in the models or the cir cuit may contain unrealistic impedances Note All error messages generated during an analysis appear in the error log audit trail Use th
252. m User Guide 14 27 du RF RF i lt Waveguide Model gt lt Waveguide Model gt 14 6 2 Microstrip Line For the Generic Microstrip Line models enter values in the two tabs shown below Use the following diagram for assistance in identifying the values Conductor width Conductor thickness Conductor length Relative dielectric J constant ej Dielectric thickness 14 28 Electronics Workbench RF Model Makers lt Microstrip Line Model gt lt Microstrip Line Model 14 6 3 Open End Microstrip Line For Open End Microstrip models enter values on the following tabs Multisim User Guide 14 29 RF lt Open End Microstrip Line Model gt lt Open End Microstrip Line Model gt 14 30 Electronics Workbench RF Model Makers 14 6 4 RF Spiral Inductor For the RF Spiral Inductor models enter values in the two tabs shown below Use the follow ing diagram for assistance in identifying the values Inner diameter Pe Outer diameter Space between y meee conductors Conductor width en y lt RF Spiral Inductor Model gt RF Spiral Inductor Model Multisim User Guide 14 31 Ju RF RF 14 6 5 Strip Line Model 14 32 For the Strip Line models enter values in the two tabs shown below Use the following dia gram for assistance in identifying the values Dielectric thickness thickness
253. m the Browser screen click Detail Report A detailed report appears for you to view or print For example Detail report Group ANSI TTL TTL E HET e Family 4RLS FAALS Ir DIN eret ettet RARAS COMPONENT fte NY B No Part Loc 74ALS 74ALSOOM 03 23 00IVT National Function QUAD 2 INPUT NAND Number 4 Package M14A 74ALS PACKAGE 4 4 1 Pre Defined Fields For each component the following information is stored in the Multisim master database general information common parameters component specific data 4 4 1 1 General Information The following fields appear on the Browser screen Field Description Example Database Name Name of Multisim database in MultiSIM Master which the component is stored Component Fam Name of family to which the compo 748 ily nent belongs Determines which tool bar icon is used to place the component 4 24 Electronics Workbench Types of Information Stored for Components Field Description Example Component Name of the individual component 74S00D Manufacturer Name of the company that manufac Texas Instruments tures the component Recorded in the Bill of Materials Model Level Used during simulation could be L O SPICE code VHDL Verilog HDL etc Footprint Footprint for the component actual DO14 components only Used in Ultiboard or other vendors PCB layout prod
254. matical functions To build equations for the Postprocessor you must have performed at least one analysis When you perform an analysis on a circuit the results appear in the Grapher screen and are stored for use by the Postprocessor Some analysis results may have been saved only for the Postprocessor For information on performing analyses see Chapter 8 Analyses Basic Steps gt Toconstruct an equation from which a trace will be plotted you select variables from previ ous analyses and mathematical operators successively moving from the left side of the equa tion to the right Follow the steps below 1 Click the Postprocessor button on the Design Bar The Postprocessor screen appears This is where you will build your Postpro Traces to plot cessor equations New Page Load Pages Delete Page RENE New Graph Save Pages Delete Diagram New Chart ae Add Trace Delete Trace This is the name of Br the circuit on which Default Analisys Results analyses have been Transient Analysis tran01 performed in this session Analysis Results Analysis Variables Available functions El net rf biasing Transient Analysis tran01 net rf biasing This is an analysis performed on this ci cuit These are the vari ables that resulted from the selected analysis Set Default Analysis Results These are the mathematical functions available for use in your equations 2 Inthe Ana
255. me points and entering the desired number of points to be calculated Note The value of TMAX is determined by dividing the interval between the specified anal ysis start and end times by the minimum number of time points specified enable Set Initial Timestep TSTEP and enter a value less than the specified maximum time step value in the Timestep TSTEP field If possible the size of the time steps taken during the simulation will begin with the initial timestep and will continue to increase to the value specified by the maximum time step 8 6 3 Troubleshooting Transient Analysis Failures If transient analysis is being performed time is being stepped and the simulator cannot con verge on a solution using the initial time step the time step is automatically reduced and the cycle is repeated If the time step is reduced too far an error message Timestep too small is generated and the simulation is aborted If this occurs try one or more of the following Check the circuit topology and connectivity See step 1 of 8 4 3 Troubleshooting DC Operating Point Analysis Failures on page 8 10 Set relative error tolerance to 0 01 By increasing the tolerance from 0 001 0 196 accu racy fewer iterations are required to converge on a solution and the simulation finishes much more quickly Increase transient time point iterations to 100 This allows the transient analysis to go through more iterations for each time step before giving
256. me position values of the two crosshair cursors T1 and T2 when sampling stopped It also automatically moves the first crosshair cursor T1 to the position of time zero when sampling stopped To change the threshold voltage use the default instrument settings as explained in 6 4 Default Instrument Analysis Settings on page 6 5 Start Stop amp Reset To restart a new signal analysis click Start The button toggles between Stop and Start To dump stored data when the logic analyzer is not triggered click Stop If the logic analyzer is already triggered and displaying data Stop has no effect To clear the logic analyzer s display click Reset Electronics Workbench Logic Analyzer 6 9 2 Clock The clock informs the logic analyzer when to read an input sample The clock can be internal or external gt To adjust the clock settings 1 Click Set in the Clock area of the logic analyzer The Clock Setup screen appears Clock frequency depends Connect to external on simulation speed signal mode Clock setup Clock Source Extemal Intemal m Internal clock rate Glock quelitier 10 KHz F zl Sampling Setting Set amount of Pre trigger samples data to show Post trigger samples 1000 before and after sample Set clock rate 100 2 Select external or internal clock mode Set the internal clock rate The clock qualifier is an input signal that filters the cl
257. measuring voltage gain the vertical axis shows the ratio of the circuit s output voltage to its voltage For a logarithmic base the units are decibels For a linear base the vertical axis shows the ratio of output voltage to input voltage When measuring phase the vertical axis always shows the phase angle in degrees Regardless of the units you can set initial I and final F values for the axis using the Bode plotter s controls Readouts Move the Bode plotter s vertical cursor to get a readout of the frequency and magnitude or phase at any point on the plot The vertical cursor is stored at the left edge of the Bode plotter display To move the vertical cursor click the arrows near the bottom of the Bode plotter Or e drag the vertical cursor from the left edge of the Bode plotter display to the point on the plot you want to measure Electronics Workbench Distortion Analyzer The magnitude or phase and frequency at the intersection of the vertical cursor and the trace are shown in the boxes beside the arrows ME gt 7943 He Phase at the vertical cursor 0 in E u Click the directional arrows to move the vertical cursor Frequency at the vertical cursor 6 6 Distortion Analyzer XDA1 A typical distortion analyzer provides distortion measurements for signals in the range of 20 Hz to 100 KHz including audio signals Distortion Analyzer XDA1 X This label changes dependi
258. more detail the waveforms may appear choppy or uneven If so activate the circuit again to get more detail You can also increase the precision of a waveform by increasing the simulation time step using the default instrument settings as explained in 6 4 Default Instru ment Analysis Settings on page 6 5 6 13 Spectrum Analyzer 6 28 The spectrum analyzer is used to measure amplitude versus frequency It performs a similar function in the frequency domain as an oscilloscope performs in the time domain It operates by sweeping through a range of frequencies The amplitude of the signal at the input of the receiver is plotted against the frequency of the signal This instrument is capable of measuring a signal s power at various frequencies and helps determine the existence of the frequency components signal The spectrum analyzer is part of the RF Design Module For more details see the RF chap ter Electronics Workbench Wattmeter 6 14 Wattmeter onnect in series with load Connect in parallel with load 0 000 W Power Factor 0 000 Average power Voltage Current Power factor between 0 and 1 m E e MONS The wattmeter measures power It is used to measure the magnitude of the active power that is the product of the voltage difference and the current flowing through the current terminals in a circuit The results are shown in watts The wattmeter also displays the power factor cal cu
259. mulate menu 2 19 simulation about 7 1 Bspice Xspice support 7 5 checking circuit consistency 7 4 choosing type 7 1 circuit 7 6 circuit equation 7 7 equation solution 7 7 Gmin stepping 7 9 interactive 7 4 maximum integration order 7 9 miscellaneous SPICE capabilities 7 4 numerical integration 7 8 RF 7 10 source stepping 7 10 stages of 7 6 starting and stopping 7 3 supported types 7 2 using 7 3 VHDL 7 11 SINAD 6 10 solution equation 7 7 source stepping 7 10 spectrum analyzer 6 28 14 9 SPICE simulation BSpice Xspice support 7 5 circuit 7 6 circuit equation 7 7 equation solution 7 7 Gmin stepping 7 9 maximum integration order 7 9 miscellaneous capabilities 7 4 numerical integration 7 8 source stepping 7 10 spiral inductor RF 14 31 standard searching 4 21 strip line model 14 32 stripline bend model 14 33 structure of database 4 1 Electronics Workbench subcircuit adding to circuit 3 27 setting up a circuit as 3 27 subcircuits 3 26 summary tab about 8 8 symbol adding pins 5 23 copying 5 17 creating 5 18 editing 5 16 labels 5 21 pin 5 22 shape 5 21 Symbol Editor menus 5 19 palette 5 20 Screen 5 18 symbol set 2 8 choosing 3 3 system toolbar 2 10 I temperature sweep analysis 8 34 time base 6 25 title block about 3 23 displaying or hiding 3 2 showing 2 6 tolerances 4 26 toolbars resizing 2 9 system 2 10 Tools menu 2 25 transfer function analysis 8 36 Transfer menu 2 24 transfer to Ultiboard PCB Layout
260. n page 4 26 for details 2 6 5 Transfer Menu 2 24 2 6 5 1 Transfer Transfer to Ultiboard Displays a file browser where you choose or enter a file name for the transferred data A file of the correct format is created If you plan to use backannotation you must save your file immediately 2 6 5 2 Transfer Transfer to other PCB Layout Displays a file browser where you choose or enter a file name for the transferred data You can also choose the appropriate file type from a list of available types 2 6 5 3 Transfer Backannotate from Ultiboard Backannotates changes made to a circuit in Ultiboard for example deleted components to the Multisim circuit file Displays a file browser where you choose the backannotation file corresponding to your circuit file The circuit file must be open before you use this command Electronics Workbench Menus and Commands 2 6 5 4 Transfer VHDL Synthesis Runs the VHDL Synthesis program on a file created from the current circuit You are prompted to save the file and then VHDL Synthesis appears with the file loaded in it For details see Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic KS 2 6 5 5 Transfer Verilog HDL Synthesis Runs the VHDL Synthesis program on a file created from the current circuit You are prompted to save the file and then VHDL Synthesis appears with the file loaded in it For details see Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic 2 6 5 6 Transfer Export Simulation Resul
261. n set the sweep type the number of points and the vertical scale Parameter Sweep Analysis 8 12 1 About the Parameter Sweep Analysis Using parameter sweep analysis you can quickly verify the operation of your circuit by simu lating it across a range of values for a component parameter The effect is the same as simulat ing the circuit several times once for each different value You control the parameter values by choosing a start value an end the sweep type and an increment value You may perform three types of sweeps DC Operating Point Transient Analysis and AC Frequency Analysis Assumptions See the assumptions for the selected analysis DC operating point analysis described in 8 4 DC Operating Point Analysis on page 8 9 transient anal ysis described in 8 6 Transient Analysis on page 8 13 or AC frequency analysis described in 8 4 DC Operating Point Analysis on page 8 9 You will find that some components have more parameters that can be varied than other com ponents The number of varied parameters depends on the model of the component That is active components such as op amps transistors diodes and others have more parameters available to perform a sweep than passive components such as resistors inductors and capac itors For example an inductor has only inductance available as a parameter for analysis whereas a diode model contains a set of approximately 25 parameters such as Saturation cur rent Ohmic
262. n Bar but ton when you choose Database Family List you are reminded that this report is accessed through the Browser screen only The Database Family List report is included in the Reports pop up menu only as a way of listing all available Multisim reports in one location gt To produce a Database Family List showing all the components in a specific family 1 Access the database as described in 3 3 Setting up Your Circuit Window on page 3 1 to select a component Parts Bin and a family within that Parts Bin for example the 74STD of the TTL group r Select Component Component List Manufacturer List Model Level List Find List Report Detail Report User Fields 2 From the Browser screen click List Report Note Normally when you use the Browser you first select a specific component This is not necessary when creating a Component Family list since the list shows all the parts in this family Multisim User Guide suodeuH Reports Reports 3 A Notepad screen appears listing all the components found within the currently selected family For example fj ListReportFile dat Notepad 5 x File Edit Search Help nultisIM Database 74F 00N 74F 62D 74F02N 74F 04N 74F 68D 74F 08N 74F109N 74F16D 74F16N 74F112N 74F113D 74F113N 74F114N 74F11D 74F11N 74F125N 74F126D 74F126N 74F138N 74F139D 74F139N 74F148N 74F151D 74F151N 74F153N 74F157AD 74F157AN 74F157N 74F158AD 74F158AN
263. n Multisim or add compo nents For details on the functions associated with this button see Chapter 5 Component Editing The Instruments button lets you attach instruments to your circuit For details on the functions associated with this button see Chapter 6 Instruments The Simulate button lets you simulate your design For details on the functions associated with this button see Chapter 7 Simulation The Analysis button lets you choose the analysis you want to perform on your circuit For details on the functions associated with this button see Chapter 8 Analyses The Postprocessor button lets you perform further operations on the results of your simula tion For details on the functions associated with this button see Chapter 9 Postprocessor The VHDL Verilog HDL button allows you to work with VHDL modeling not available in all versions For details on the functions associated with this button see Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 3 eoepelu Jasn User Interface User Interface ie 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 The Reports button lets you print reports about your circuits list of components component details instrument maps For details on the functions associated with this button see Chapter 11 Reports The Transfer button lets you communicate with and export to other PCB layout programs such as Ultiboard also from Electronics Workbench You can
264. n about that component appears 4 If you selected the wrong component family from the toolbar choose the correct compo nent family from the Component family field of the Browser screen The information in the Select Component area will change accordingly Tip To make your scroll through the Browser s Components List faster simply type the first few characters of the component s name Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 5 ejnjde2 oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture Indicates the database from which to draw Shows the symbol that will be used to the component defaults to the database of represent the component selected in the the selected Parts Bin Component List Indicates the component family with which you are working defaults to Companent Browser the selected family toolbar EB MutsiM Master z Component Fami CaPaciTon m Symbol ANSI T gF Information about the component Component E selected in the Component List Mametuer feneric Model Level Lo Footprint capi Lists the components available in the family named in Component Family field Select Component Component List Manufacturer List Model Level ID List Lists the manufacturers of the component selected in the Com ponent List Lists the model levels available for the component selected in the Component List Shows the model data for the com ponent selected in the Componen
265. n bandwidth is maximum at Ic 5mA 14 7 4 Selecting the Biasing Network There are a number of possible structures to select from for proper DC biasing of the network It is important to note that the performance of the transistor and the amplifiers depends on DC operating points The following figure shows one possible biasing network R34 A 2kOhm mod MRFS27T1 Multisim User Guide 14 39 du RF RF 14 40 This is the simplest structure for a biasing network However its thermal stability is poor To find the resistor values for this structure you need to know five values Vce Ic Vcc Vbe and Beta which is the DC current gain of the transistor and is given in most data books Beta relates Ic to Ibas Beta Ic Ib Vbe is the base emitter voltage of transistor when it is active and is typically 0 7 V Both Beta and Vbe depend on the values of Ic and Ib The initial design process starts with typical values of Rc and Rb in the structure shown above However if accuracy is critical you should use Multisim to ensure that the values of Ic and Vce are as intended In this tutorial these selections are used e Vce 3V c 3mA e Vcc 9V Vbe 0 7V e Beta 100 The initial values of Rc and Rb are calculated as shown below Rc Vcc Vce Ic 9V 3V 3mA 2 KOhm Ib Ic Beta 3mA 100 30 yA Rb Vece Vbe Ib 9V 0 7V 30 WA 277 KOhm To select the DC operating points 1 Draw the circuit shown above with Rb
266. n statistics For more on analysis options see 8 29 Analysis Options on page 8 65 gt To have the error log audit trail appear from the View menu choose Show Hide Simulation Error Log Audit Trail The error log audit trail display is useful for diagnosing the analysis and its results Here is an example display Simulation Error Log Audit Trail x Instrument operation performed 2000 May 05 Friday 03 Instrument Analysis Transient Analysis 0 Dutput from instrument analysis nstrument operation performed 2000 May 05 Friday 09 Instrument Analysis Transient Analysis 0 Ful Output from instrument analysis C Simple Warning losing old state for circuit S amplhld 9 gt I Each analysis you perform either individually or in batch during this Multisim session is stored in the audit trail The file is cleared when you exit Multisim As with the summary information you can expand or contract the contents of the display to show or hide details You can also choose to display all the errors Full only the simple errors Simple or none of the errors None by choosing one of the options on the right of the screen Regardless of the option you choose the full set of errors is saved You can also Multisim User Guide 8 53 s s jeuy Analyses Analyses save the results of the audit trail in a separate file click Save and choose a file name and loca tion or
267. nal is the same as V G given by Multisim Note however that V G is calculated using S parameters Input Output Impedances These values are calculated assuming T s T 0 For this condition we have Zin 1 Tin 1 Tin where Tin 11 and Zout 1 Vout 1 Vout where Tout S22 One must note that these values are normalized The simulator prints denormalized values of Zin and Zout Matching Network Analysis While designing RF amplifiers using Multisim RF engineers need to analyze and if neces sary modify circuit behavior The Matching Network Analysis provides three options for ana lyzing circuit behavior e Stability circles e Unilateral gain circles Impedance matching These options are described in detail in this section Depending on the application one or more of the options is used For example to design oscillators only stability circles are used On the other hand to match an unconditionally stable circuit the simulator first analyzes the stability properties of the circuit then uses automatic impedance matching The three options are accessed from the Match Net Designer window Electronics Workbench RF Analyses gt To open the Match Net Designer window 1 Double click the Network Analyzer on the circuit window 2 From the Mode drop down list select Match Net Designer The Match Net Designer screen appears Match Net Designer x Impedance Matching Unilateral Gain Circl
268. nalysis Monte Carlo Remove all Analyses Sensitivity Run Selected Analysis Run All Analyses Cancel 2 To add an analysis to the batch select it and click the Add Analysis button The parame ters screen for the selected analysis so you can set the parameters for the analysis How ever instead of an Accept button the screen has an Add to Batch button 3 When you have finished the settings for the analysis click Add to Batch The analysis is added to the Analyses to Perform list on the right Summary information can be revealed by clicking the beside the analysis 4 Continue to add analyses as desired Note that the settings for one instance of an analysis become the default settings for that analysis during this operation For example if you set Multisim User Guide 8 51 s s jeuy Analyses Analyses your first DC Sweep to an increment of 0 6 the 0 6 increment is the default value when you add your next DC Sweep to the batch 5 Torun just one of the analyses in the batch select it and click Run Selected Analysis To run all of them click Run All Analyses The Summary tab shows the results of the analyses performed in the session gt To edit an analysis parameters in the batch select it and click Edit Analysis The selected analysis parameters screen appears allowing you to make any modifications you wish to the analysis gt Toremove an analysis from the batch select it and click D
269. nd fall times pulse width repetition rates delays etc cannot be easily obtained in frequency domain measurements Therefore both tech niques are important 14 4 1 2 Using Multisim s Spectrum Analyzer The spectrum analyzer in Multisim does not generate the noise one normally expects in a real spectrum analyzer In reality the noise generated by the spectrum analyzer itself due to the random electron motion through the various circuit elements of an analyzer is amplified by Multisim User Guide 14 9 du RF RF 14 10 the various gain stages in the analyzer and ultimately appears on the CRT as a noise signal below which measurement cannot be made With Multisim s spectrum analyzer no additional noise is introduced by the instrument itself A number of parameters characterize a spectrum analyzer frequency range in which the instrument operates frequency spans reference level measurement range These are all represented on the Multisim spectrum analyzer and must be set manually XSA1 Spectrum Analyzer XSA1 x Span Control Set Span Zero Span Full Span f start and f end Frequency Amplitude can be set manu mero a8 a amp m un ally Span Joo KHz Range 2 Div Start E KHz Ref 00 dB Center 51 KHz Resolution Frequency 1 KHz End 101 KHz Start Pop Triger set Bregrsyener Input Trigger 14 4 1 3 Frequency Range Frequency r
270. nd palette in more detail 5 10 2 1 Symbol Editor Menus Menu Use File Use the File menu to create a symbol for a component or open an existing file containing a symbol This menu also lets you preview save close or print the symbol You also use this menu to close the Symbol Editor Edit Use the Edit menu to make changes to a symbol You can choose to cut copy paste or delete selected text or graphics displayed in the Symbol Editor screen This menu also con tains commands used to flip or rotate the displayed graphic View Use the View menu to show hide the following screen elements toolbar status bar palette grid and page boundaries It also contains commands that let you change the grid and the magnification of the symbol Structure Use the Structure menu to group together selections and position them in front of or behind each other Align Use the Align menu to change the position of the selections in the window in relation to each other or to the grid Graphics Use the Graphics menu to change the characteristics color font pattern pen style or arrowheads used for graphics and their accompanying text labels You can also use this menu to import a bitmap file into the currently opened file in the Symbol Editor Window Use the Window menu to move among the different open symbol files in the Symbol Editor Multisim User Guide Rev 1 Jop 1ueuoduio5 Component Editor
271. ng programmable logic devices such as CPLDs and FPGAs complex digital chips such as memory CPUs microcontrollers and other devices which could not be reasonably modeled using SPICE Even if you are not using such devices today you will likely find it increasingly necessary to do so in the future Multisim offers the perfect environment for experienced and novice VHDL users alike The Multisim VHDL simulator can be used in two ways e As part of the board system design process when components are modeled in VHDL instead of SPICE Multisim automatically invokes the VHDL simulator as needed this is called co simulation In this method you do not need extensive VHDL knowledge but can simply take advantage of the broader library of simulatable models for complex digi tal chips If you have VHDL simulation it is invoked automatically by Multisim when you begin simulation as described in 7 3 Using Multisim Simulation on page 7 3 and a compo nent that is part of your system or board level circuit is modeled in VHDL You need not do anything different to simulate in this co simulation mode than you do to simulate a circuit with only SPICE modeled parts Just begin simulation as normal and Multisim takes care of the rest recognizing when VHDL models exist and reacting accordingly e As part of the programmable logic design process in which you write simulate and debug VHDL source code This is a much more involved process and d
272. ng graphics changing their color size and fill and so on along with special additions To use the Symbol Editor to create working symbols however you need to be familiar with the elements required to make up a symbol in Multisim The three key elements needed for a symbol are e labels shape pins These are described in more detail in the following sections 5 10 2 4 Labels Each symbol has three labels variables that are replaced by values from the component s model This allows the same symbol to be used for many different components in a family The variables are e the component s reference ID represented by the string U thecomponent s value or part number represented by the string Value or Part e the component s location represented by the string Loc reserved for future use All symbols have these variables if you choose to create a new symbol in the Symbol Editor these three variables are supplied automatically although you control where they are located with respect to the shape and how they are presented for example their color and font Information for the component s reference ID identified as U and component value or part number are is extracted from the components database and automatically entered by Multisim For example R1 indicates that the component is the first resistor placed on the circuit window The R is extracted from the component da
273. ng on which type of Run measurement is selected ay Control Mode Display Mode I Ro SINAD Set ES J nad Fundamental Frequency 1 KHz 20 Hz I 20KHz Units used to present results Multisim User Guide 6 9 Sjueuunyjsu Instruments Instruments The types of measurements performed are either Total Harmonic Distortion THD or Signal Plus Noise and Distortion SINAD To set the way results are to be displayed for either type of measurement click Settings For THD only sets the definition used to calculate THD MA IEEE defines this slightly differently from ANSI IEC IEEE ANSI IEC Start Frequency 20 Hz End Frequency 20 KHz Harmonic Num 10 Cancel 6 6 1 Harmonic Distortion Harmonic distortion produces signals at harmonics of the test frequency For example for a 1 KHz signal the harmonics may be at 2 KHz 3 KHz 4 KHz etc A very sharp tunable notch is required to measure harmonic distortion The filter is tuned to the test frequency such as 1 KHz which will remove the 1KHz signal leaving only the har monics or the distortion The distortion harmonics are measured and the resulting value is compared to the amplitude of the test signal 6 6 2 SINAD This type of measurement measures the ratio of signal plus noise and distortion noise and distortion 6 10 Electronics Workbench Function Generator 6 7 Function Generator
274. ng the Analysis Results Grapher on page 8 54 Electronics Workbench DC Sweep Analysis 8 10 Setting Distortion Analysis Parameters for Normal Use The default settings on the Analysis Parameters tab are appropriate for most cases You need only define the frequency range by typing a value in the Start Frequency field and in the Stop Frequency field Note Click Reset to main AC values to set the Analysis Parameters to the values defined for the AC frequency analysis Setting Distortion Analysis Parameters for Advanced Use Using the Analysis Parameters tab you can set e the sweep type by choosing the desired sweep type decade linear or octave from the Sweep type drop down list The sweep type defines how the points to be calculated are distributed across the frequency range e the number of points to be calculated during the analysis by entering a value in the Num ber of points per decade field Note The greater the number of points calculated the more accurate the results will be however the simulation speed will be adversely affected e the type of vertical scale by choosing the desired scale linear logarithmic decimal or octave from the Vertical scale drop down list When you enable F2 F1 ratio circuit variables are calculated at F F gt F F gt and QFj F To set the F2 F1 ratio for multiple AC source circuits 1 Enable F2 F1 ratio 2 Enter a value in the appropriate box The value must
275. ng with Graphs To help you examine graphical data you can use a grid a legend and vertical cursors You can also zoom in on any part of a graph You can apply these tools separately or together In addi tion you can change several graph display characteristics from the tabs of the Graph Proper ties screen Note To display the Graph Properties screen or to use the buttons described in this section you must have a graph selected If the Page Properties screen appears you have a page selected rather than a graph Click on a graph to select it A red arrow appears to the left of the graph to indicate it is selected Note The Graph Properties screen allows you to click either OK or Apply Clicking OK applies the change and closes the screen Clicking Apply applies the change and leaves the screen open for additional selections 8 25 1 Grids and Legends ls v gt To apply a grid to a graph 1 2 Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it Click the Toggle Grid button To remove the grid click the button again or 1 Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it Click the Properties button The Graph Properties screen appears Click the General tab Graph Properties x General Left Axis Bottom Axis Right Axis Top Axis Traces r Title lile USER EE Eont Grid Trace Legend Pen Size pau Else Legend On Grid On m Cursors Cursors On gu us Trace M C Bl Traces
276. nitially a large Gmin value is applied and an approximate solution is found quickly The ini tial value is set by the Gmin value times 1065595 Gmin The Gmin value is taken from the GMIN Gmin Minimum Conductance analysis option and the number of steps from GMIN Multisim User Guide 7 9 uomne nuis Simulation Simulation 7 10 STEPS both options are described in more detail in 8 29 Analysis Options on page 8 65 The conductance is then reduced by a factor of ten and the circuit is solved again by setting the previous solution as the initial guess of the next iteration When Gmin is reduced to zero a final solution of the circuit is performed and the correct answer is obtained This actually divides one single step solution of the simple nonlinear iteration into a multi step solution which uses the same algorithm but has many smaller steps 7 4 8 2 Source Stepping Source stepping is a convergence assistance algorithm This algorithm solves a nonlinear cir cuit problem by setting a fraction of the source vector as a parameter variable to aid the con vergence of the DC solution Similar to the Gmin stepping method Source stepping converts a single nonlinear circuit problem into a multi step nonlinear circuit problem Starting from a zero source vector the source vector is slowly ramped up to its full DC value At each source step a simple nonlinear iteration solution is performed The ramp rate is controlled by the SRCSTEPS
277. nitude fi n Phase fo Deg Replace Cancel Info Help 3 To cancel your changes click Cancel To save your changes click OK 3 20 Electronics Workbench Finding Components in Your Circuit 3 10 Finding Components in Your Circuit gt To quickly find a component in the circuit window 1 Choose View Find A list of the components in your circuit appears This is the list of the Find Component x reference IDs of all components in the Please select the reference ids of the components circuit you are trying to find Components selected here will also be selected in the circuit win dow Cancel 2 Select any number of components hold down the SHIFT key while clicking to select more than one 3 Click Select Components All selected components are also selected in the circuit win dow 3 11 Labelling Multisim assigns a label to a placed component node or pin You can modify or move the component or node label Pin labels are set in Component Editing as explained in Chapter 5 Component Editing You can control which elements are displayed at the circuit or compo nent level as described in 3 9 1 Displaying Identifying Information about a Placed Compo nent on page 3 16 Multisim also allows you to add a title block described in 3 11 3 Adding a Title Block on page 3 23 and additional text to your circuit described in 3 11 4 Adding Miscellaneous Text on page 3
278. nt being used Selie fulsiel Electronics Workbench Placed Component Properties For virtual components whose value can be set manually the tab looks similar to this AC Current x Label Display Value Analysis Setup Fault Current Amplitude f A Tolerance Options let you change the default Current Offset o E settings of the vir tual component gt IV Frequency feo Hz 3 Time Delay fo sec J ja Damping Factor Jo i sec Phase fo Deg Replace You can modify any of these fields if a field is not editable be sure you have enabled its cor responding option To cancel your changes click Cancel To save your changes click OK The ability to change the value of a component is allowed only for virtual components It is important that you understand these components Virtual components are not real that is you could not go to a supplier and purchase them They are provided for your convenience Multi sim treats them slightly differently from real components in two ways First by default vir tual components are shown in a different color from that of real components on your schematic This is to remind you that since they are not real these components will not be exported to PCB Layout software Second when you place such parts you do not need to choose from the Browser since you can set the value of a virtual part to anything you want Virtual parts include all sourc
279. nter itself This means that 50 Ohm load is sufficient to produce Gl 0 dB The best point on Gs for the example is ZI 2 normalized Using this value you can design the matching network at the input port of the amplifier You must make sure that the selected point or points are stable Therefore it is recommended that you go back to Stability Circles and confirm the stability of the design Since the amplifier is unconditionally stable it would be stable for any passive load or source network Hence you need not check the stability circles The complete amplifier is shown in the following figure c2 I 500hm 258kOhm 1F 1 4 I Is MRFS27T1 R4 i 500hm 55 04nH 0 01 3 02GHz o is ig 5 a Note The matching elements are calculated manually in this example Multisim User Guide 14 43 du RF RF 14 44 Electronics Workbench Index A AC analysis 8 11 AC sensitivity analysis 8 27 adding components 5 9 adding subcircuits to circuit 3 27 addressing word generator 6 32 algorithm Gmin stepping 7 9 source stepping 7 10 ammeter multimeter measurement options 6 20 analyses about 8 1 AC 8 11 AC sensitivity 8 27 Analysis Parameters tab 8 3 audit trail 8 53 batched 8 51 cutting copying pasting pages graphs and charts 8 63 DC operating point 8 9 DC sensitivity 8 27 determining component use 3 20 distortion 8 23 Fourier 8 16 incomplete 8 9 miscellaneous options
280. numerical values Click OK 8 27 Cut Copy and Paste The Grapher window lets you cut copy and paste pages graphs and charts Note You must use the cut copy and paste buttons from this window You cannot use the Multisim menus buttons or keyboard shortcuts for these functions gt To cut copy and paste pages 1 Select a page by clicking on its tab l 2 Click the Cut or Copy button 3 Click the Paste button The cut or copied page appears Note When a page is selected the red arrow points to the tab cut copy and paste affect page properties only They do nor affect the graphs or charts on the page Multisim User Guide 8 63 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 28 al 8 64 gt To cut copy and paste graphs and charts 1 Select a graph or chart 2 Click the Cut or Copy button 3 Click the Paste button to paste the graph or chart onto the same page or to paste onto a new page 4 Click the New button 5 Choose New Page 6 Type a tab name and click OK 7 Click the Paste button Note When a graph or chart is selected the red arrow points to the graph or chart cut copy and paste affect the selected graph or chart only They do not affect overall page prop erties To open a new page click the New button and choose New Page To delete all pages click the New button and choose Delete AII Pages To open an existing graph file 1 Click the Open button A file browser
281. ock sig nal If it is set to x then the qualifier is disabled and the clock signal determines when samples are read If it is set to 1 or 0 the samples are read only when the clock signal matches the selected qualifier signal 4 Set how much data to show before Pre trigger samples and after Post trigger sam ples the sample 5 Click Accept Multisim User Guide 6 17 sjuaun1su Instruments Instruments 6 9 3 Triggering o A The logic analyzer can be made to trigger upon reading a specified word or combination of words or when meeting the increase edge or decrease edge of the clock signal Trigger Settings x m Trigger Clock Edge e Positive Cancel C Negative C Both Trigger qualifier Enter up to three Trigger Pattems triggering 16 bit Pattem A JOOODOOO000OQOEOKE words week Pattem B EN Choose among 21 Pattem C SOOO combinations of A B 4 Mager combinations A mu and C Choose a trigger filter gt To specify up to three trigger words or word combinations 1 Click Set in the Trigger box of the logic analyzer 2 Select Positive Negative or Both positive and negative clock edge 3 Click in the box labeled Pattern A Pattern B or Pattern C and enter a binary word An er x means either 1 or 0 4 From the Trigger combinations drop down list select the desired combination See below for a list of combinations 5 From the Trig
282. odel level that you want Component from the drop down Name 74 amp 500M y lists Manufacturer National y Model Level 1D L0 744L5004 v The model s data and template appear here Model Data MODEL 74A4LS004 d nand rise delay 11n fa 4 gt aZp a t1A t d t 1A 201B7 t d t 1B 2t1V e ap b t247 t d t 2A t2B9 t d t2B 2t2V y Model Tempalte gt 4 ie 2 Select from among the available databases in the Name drop down list The com ponent s icon and symbol appear here Using the Family and Component drop down lists choose the component whose model template most closely matches what you want 4 Click Select to return to the Component Properties screen Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JO1JIp3 1ueuoduio5 Component Editor 5 11 2 Loading an Existing Model The models for a component can come from a variety of sources Please note that some of X these options may not be available in your version of Multisim gt To load or import a model created by Multisim s analog or digital model maker 1 Click Model Maker The Select Model Maker screen appears Model Maker List Diode MOSFET Operational Amplifier SCR Open End Microstrip Line Interdigital Capacitor RF Spiral Inductor Strip Line Stripline Bend 2 Select the Model Maker you wish to use to make a model 3 Click Accept to continue to start the process of making a model Cl
283. oes require knowledge of the VHDL language on your part For details on this type of VHDL simulation see Chap ter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic 7 7 Verilog HDL Simulation EN Multisim employs a specialized Verilog HDL simulator which simulates not at the SPICE N level using schematic design entry but at the behavioral language level Verilog HDL is along with VHDL one of the most widely used behavioral languages commonly used for designing and modeling programmable logic devices such as CPLDs and FPGAs complex digital chips such as memory CPUs microcontrollers and other devices which could not be reasonably modeled using SPICE Multisim User Guide 7 11 uone nuis Simulation Simulation Even if you are not using such devices today you will likely find it increasingly necessary to do so in the future Multisim offers the perfect environment for experienced and novice Ver ilog HDL users alike The Multisim Verilog HDL simulator can be used in two ways 1 As part of the board system design process when components are modeled in Verilog HDL instead of SPICE Multisim automatically invokes the Verilog HDL simulator as needed this is called co simulation In this method you do not need extensive Verilog HDL knowledge but can simply take advantage of the broader library of simulatable models for complex digital chips If you have Verilog HDL simulation it is invoked automatically by Multisim when you be
284. omplex matrix containing both real and imaginary components is created For details see 8 5 AC Analysis on page 8 11 Simulate Analyses Transient Analysis Sets up and runs Transient analysis also called time domain transient analysis which com putes the circuit s response as a function of time For details see 8 6 Transient Analysis on page 8 13 Simulate Analyses Fourier Analysis Sets up and runs Fourier analysis which evaluates the DC fundamental and harmonic com ponents of a time domain signal For details see 8 7 Fourier Analysis on page 8 16 Simulate Analyses Noise Analysis Sets up and runs Noise analysis which is used to detect the magnitude of noise power in the output of electronic circuits For details see 8 8 Noise Analysis on page 8 19 Simulate Analyses Distortion Analysis Sets up and runs Distortion analysis which measures harmonic distortion and intermodulation distortion products For details see 8 9 Distortion Analysis on page 8 23 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 21 eoepelu Jasn User Interface User Interface 2 22 Simulate DC Sweep Sets up and runs DC sweep analysis which computes the DC operating point of a node in the circuit for various values of one or two DC sources in the circuit For details see 8 10 DC Sweep Analysis on page 8 25 Simulate Analyses Sensitivity Sets up and runs Sensitivity analysis which calculates the sensitivity of an output node vol
285. on Analysis 8 9 8 9 1 Setting Noise Analysis Frequency Parameters for Advanced Use On the Frequency Parameters tab you can also set sweep type by choosing the desired sweep type decade linear or octave from the Sweep type drop down list The sweep type defines how the points to be calculated are distributed across the frequency range the number of points to be calculated during the analysis by entering a value in the Num ber of points per decade field Note The greater the number of points calculated the more accurate the results will be however the simulation speed will be adversely affected the format of the analysis results by choosing the desired scale linear logarithmic deci mal or octave from the Vertical scale drop down list Note Click Reset to Default to reset all parameters on the Frequency Parameters tab to their default values Distortion Analysis About the Distortion Analysis Signal distortions are usually the result of gain nonlinearity or phase nonuniformity in a cir cuit Nonlinear gain causes harmonic distortion while nonuniform phase causes intermodula tion distortion Distortion analysis is useful for investigating small amounts of distortion that are normally unresolvable in transient analysis Multisim simulates harmonic distortion and intermodula tion distortion products for analog small signal circuits If the circuit has one AC frequency the analysis determines the complex
286. on generator or AC source the higher the frequency the lower or more magni fied the time base For example if you want to see one cycle of a 1 KHz signal the time base should be around 1 millisecond 6 12 1 1 X Position 5 00 5 00 This setting controls the signal s starting point on the x axis When X Position is 0 the signal starts at the left edge of the display A positive value for example 2 00 shifts the starting point to the right A negative value for example 3 00 shifts the starting point to the left 6 12 1 2 Axes Y T A B and B A The axes of the oscilloscope display can be switched from showing waveform magnitude against time Y T to showing one input channel against the other A B or B A The latter settings display frequency and phase shifts known as Lissajous patterns or they can display a hysteresis loop When comparing channel A s input against channel B s A B the scale of the x axis is determined by the volts per division setting for channel B and vice versa Tip To analyze waveforms in detail use the Design Bar button to stop and start Continue the simulation when ready 6 12 2 Grounding It is not necessary to ground the oscilloscope as long as the circuit to which it is attached is grounded Multisim User Guide 6 25 sjuaun1su Instruments Instruments 6 12 3 Channel A and Channel B Settings 6 12 3 1 Volts per Division 010u V Div 5 kV Div Volts per division on
287. on window around the circuit window click in the title bar area and drag the window to a new location Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 25 eunjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 3 12 Subcircuits and Hierarchy 3 12 1 Subcircuits vs Hierarchy 3 26 Multisim allows you to use one circuit inside another The embedded circuit or subcircuit appears as a single icon on the circuit window of the circuit in which it is embedded simplify ing the appearance of the circuit Subcircuit x1 ro noae cUBCIRCUIT v2 Main circuit za 3 Ri InOut2 10ohm 4TOohm LED1 w LED red For non hierarchy users the subcircuit becomes part of the circuit file in which it is embed ded The subcircuit can be modified and its changes will affect the circuit in which it is embedded but you must open the subcircuit from within the circuit in which it is embedded You cannot open the subcircuit directly When you save the file the subcircuit is saved with it Electronics Workbench Subcircuits and Hierarchy 3 12 2 Setting up a Circuit for Use as a Subcircuit To make it possible to wire a subcircuit into your circuit you should add Input Output nodes to the circuit which will be the subcircuit These appear on the subcircuit s icon when the sub circuit is embedded in a circuit so you can see where to add the connecting wires gt To add an input output node to a circuit 1 Choose Edit Place Input Output
288. ons Multisim is available in three editions for the educational community Education Lab and Student The Education edition is for use by professors teachers instructors tutors etc and is typi cally used for the creation of demonstrations examples assignments or tests The Lab edition is for use by students at school in a multi station laboratory environment It is available either in networked or standalone configurations The Student edition is for use by students for home study on their personal computer Multisim User Guide 1 1 uononpoulu Introduction Introduction Electronics Workbench Chapter 2 User Interface 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 About this Chapter 22m nennen nennen nennen een nn 2 1 Introduction to the Multisim Interface llle 2 2 Introduction to the Design Bar 2 nme nee een eh 2 3 Customizing the Interface liliis ees 2 4 2 4 1 About User Preferences llle nen nenn 2 4 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display oocoocoocoocnocn IB 2 5 2 4 8 Controlling Circuit Window Display ssseese e 2 6 2 4 4 Setting Autosave Symbol Set Default Path and Wiring Options 2 8 2 4 5 Print Page Setup Tab 0 T E E ern 2 9 2 4 6 Other Customization Options sense een ee 2 9 System Toolbar Buttons 0 0 0 eh 2 10 Menus and Commands ccoo 2 11 2 631 File Men recu up Reng HEBR EE ee S eR 2 11 2 6 1 1
289. oooooccccco 2 14 Edit Place TexE sx quoa t Pos cea datos os ce th alae nA Bid eh 2 14 EdiUUndoGt Zia oic red Ca e t cdi Re Ra ELSE E PCR 2 14 Edit RedoGtrlEY isis sas 2 db nea Rien teda uk Ud eb ES Lb xa a 2 14 EdiUGUtCtrlEX idee acra a d La Cr Fdo na e Cor ACA E 2 14 Edit CopyCttlt OG oz cix oai ep Pata Nee Yee id ite Kr aes 2 14 EdiUPaste GtEeV Sa neat Ree wl cea Ae eee Eres Sa a ENTRE 2 14 Edit Paste as Subcircuit MacroCtrl B 0 eee 2 14 Edit DeleteDel 4 22 Elias eno AN d RE 2 15 Edit Replace Part 2 00 00 cect eee 2 15 Edit Select AICHA ariaa aae eee eee es 2 15 Edit Flip HorizontalAlt X 0 20 0 eee 2 15 Edit Flip VerticalAlttY ooooocoococcoco I n 2 15 Edit 90 ClockwiseCtrl R lllllee III 2 15 Edit 90 CounterCWShift Ctrl R lllll oo 2 16 Edit Set Sheet Size gt ike ru e er C En Pete Paria 2 16 Edit Set Title Block l l RR 2 16 Edit Descriptiva ace en Eu 2 16 Edit User PreferencesCtr U llle 2 16 Edit Global Restrictions 222 RR RII 2 16 Edit Circuit Restrictions 0 cc IRI 2 16 VAC WME AU EEE ste tr tc ee Do teste NEN e Ce aS C le aA 2 17 View Toobal Sa exea an ctt ra ON a iat dia Ee ERR he dr debs 2 17 View Status Bale ua pi e a De e DAY c Da a 2 17 View Show Hide Simulation Error Log Audit Trail 2 17 View Show Hide Command Line Interface ooooocoocoooo 2 17 View Show Hide Grapher ooccoccocccccc eee 2 17 View Sh
290. or details see 5 3 Managing the Database on page 5 2 2 6 6 6 Tools Update Models Updates any newly loaded Multisim master models that are being used from the Multisim master database in the active circuit Use this option only after you have loaded a new Multi sim master database 2 6 6 7 Tools Remote Control Design Sharing Allows you to communicate with and share designs with others either across a network or using the Internet For Project Team Design module or Educational Version users only For details see Chapter 13 Educators Guide 2 6 7 Window Menu 2 26 Contains commands used to control the display of Multisim windows Lists all open circuit windows 2 6 7 1 Window Cascade Arranges circuit windows so that they overlap 2 6 7 2 Window Tile Resizes all open circuit windows so they all show on the screen Allows you to quickly scan all open circuit files Electronics Workbench Menus and Commands 2 6 8 2 6 7 3 Window Arrange Icons Lines up minimized windows 2 6 7 4 Window open files Lists the open Multisim circuit files Select one to display it Help Menu Contains commands that display on line help and Multisim version information Tip If you want to be able to refer to Help information as you work on a circuit use the Keep Help on Top function in the Help window s Options menu 2 6 8 1 Help Multisim Help Displays Multisim s basic help file The contents of this help file are
291. ou specify default preferences for this circuit For details see 2 4 Customizing the Interface on page 2 4 2 6 2 23 Edit Global Restrictions Lets you set global restrictions on Multisim s functionality for other users You control these restrictions through the use of passwords For details see 13 4 1 Setting Global Restric tions on page 13 4 2 6 2 24 Edit Circuit Restrictions Lets you set restrictions on a particular circuit s functionality for other users You control these restrictions through the use of passwords For details see 13 4 2 Setting Circuit Restrictions on page 13 6 2 16 Electronics Workbench Menus and Commands 2 6 3 View Menu 2 6 3 4 View Toolbars Shows or hides the selected toolbar Choose to show or hide any or all of the following tool bars System toolbar design toolbar components toolbar instruments toolbar database selector zoom toolbar the zoom buttons of the system toolbar Tn Use list For information on these elements see 2 2 Introduction to the Multisim Interface on page 2 2 2 6 3 2 View Status Bar Shows hides the status bar which provides useful information about the current operation and a description of the item the cursor is currently pointing to 2 6 3 3 View Show Hide Simulation Error Log Audit Trail Shows hides the simulation log which records all the events of a circuit simulation For details about this
292. ove described method Nonlinear circuits are transformed into linear ones by linearizing all nonlinear components in the circuit using the modified Newton Raphson method A general nonlinear dynamic circuit is solved by transforming the circuit into a discretized equivalent nonlinear circuit at each time point and solving it using the method for a nonlinear DC circuit described above A dynamic circuit is transformed into a DC circuit by discretizing all dynamic components in the circuit using an appropriate numerical integration rule 7 4 6 Numerical Integration 7 8 To approximate the value of the integral of the differential equations used in the time domain solution Multisim optionally uses two numerical integration methods the Trapezoidal default method the Gear order from 1 to 6 method When the trapezoidal method is applied the following approximation is used to discretize the differential equations h dVs i1 dVn Vs i2 Vac 2 dt dt where Var Present unknown voltage value V Previous time point solution h time step length n time interval The first order Gear integration is the popular Backward Euler method The second order variable step size Gear integration formula is Electronics Workbench Multisim SPICE Simulation Technical Detail 7 4 7 7 4 8 dVn 1 2hns ha 1 V Pe a en hn V db r aehat Seek 1 where Viet present unknown solution V previous first time point solu
293. ow Simulate Switch eee 2 18 View Grid Visible eee eee een 2 18 View Show Page Bounds 0 0 cece eee teen eae 2 18 View Show Title Block and Border 0 000 ee eee eee 2 18 View GolOr 4 1 sn Reece OE ee up tease at db ion ads t 2 18 VieW ShOoW xs Ss A CE es ce E DN a tea eet 2 18 VieW ZOOI 3 uu ctor db xe eld OE ERE Dea aa a DIE e dt 2 18 VieW FiFidGlrbEF 2 0 00 teach a cto rase ped tor ran ea 2 19 Simulate Mernl eni ee e dep dre ata cd edat el 2 19 Simulate Run Stop 0 0 0 0 ern 2 19 Simulate Pause RESUME 6 ee eee eee 2 19 Simulate Default Instrument Settings 0 0 00 eee eee 2 19 Simulate InstrumentsS 0 00 eee RR n 2 19 Simulate Analyses 0 0 0 0 tte eee 2 21 Electronics Workbench Simulate Postprocess ooccoocococc nn nn 2 23 Simulate VHDL Simulation lille 2 23 Simulate Verilog HDL Simulation llle 2 24 Simulate Auto Fault Option 0 0 0000 tee 2 24 Simulate Global Component Tolerances 0 00 cece eee ee eee 2 24 Transter Men bee er Regen tea A CERO Ad Pee eee eae 2 24 Transfer Transfer to Ultiboard ooooooococcoocoocr o 2 24 Transfer Transfer to other PCB Layout 0 0000 e eee nenn 2 24 Transfer Backannotate from Ultiboard 000 cece eee eee 2 24 Transfer VHDL Synthesis o oococccccooc ee 2 25 Transfer Verilog HDL Synthesis 0 00 c eee 2 25 Tr
294. playing or Hid ing the Grid Title Block and Page Borders on page 3 2 2 6 3 10 View Color Lets you choose or modify the color scheme for the circuit Overrides the defaults set in File Preferences For details see 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display on page 2 5 2 6 3 11 View Show Lets you choose what component elements appear on the circuit window Overrides the defaults set in File Preferences For details see 2 4 3 Controlling Circuit Window Display on page 2 6 2 6 3 12 View Zoom Lets you choose a magnification of 33 60 100 200 or other for viewing the circuit Electronics Workbench Menus and Commands 2 6 3 13 View Find Ctrl F Displays a list of the reference IDs in the current circuit You can select one or more of these reference IDs whose associated components are then selected in the circuit window For details see 3 10 Finding Components in Your Circuit on page 3 21 2 6 4 Simulate Menu 2 6 4 1 Simulate Run Stop Runs or stops the circuit Running a circuit starts a sequence of mathematical operations to compute values for the nodes testpoints in the circuit Tip A digital circuit can also be activated from the word generator See Chapter 6 Instru ments for more information 2 6 4 2 Simulate Pause Resume Pauses resumes the current simulation 2 6 4 3 Simulate Default Instrument Settings Allows you to set defaults settings for instruments that are based on a transien
295. point in Output nodes currents the circuit for which you want ae _ Change Fiter t results O see results Dutput reference v Change Filter C Current WDBUE source E ange Biter For Voltage only the reference TADO Absolute y voltage Analysis Type C DC Sensitivity AC Sensitivity Click Edit Analysis to edit the Analysis Parameters Description ZZ Simulate Accept Cancel Help Setting Sensitivity Analysis Parameters for Normal Use For normal use you only need to specify the output node or source current to use during the analysis by enabling Voltage and choosing an output node from the Output node drop down list or by enabling Current and choosing a source current from the Output reference drop down list e the type of sensitivity analysis to run by enabling either DC Sensitivity or AC Sensitivity Setting Sensitivity Analysis Parameters for Advanced Use From the Output scaling drop down list you can select the type of output scaling absolute or relative You can also click Change filter to access the Filter Node screen Using this screen you can include internal nodes open pins as well as output variables from any submodules in the circuit Electronics Workbench Parameter Sweep Analysis 8 12 When performing an AC sensitivity analysis you can also edit the AC frequency Analysis Parameters by clicking Edit Analysis The Frequency Parameters tab appears You can the
296. ptions as well as the name of the file to which the analysis results are being saved raw file This file is used for postprocessing Electronics Workbench DC Operating Point Analysis 8 3 6 8 4 8 4 1 Incomplete Analyses For a variety of reasons the simulator in Multisim is occasionally unable to complete a simu lation or an analysis Multisim uses the modified Newton Raphson method to solve nonlinear circuits When a cir cuit includes nonlinear components multiple iterations of a set of linear equations are used to account for the non linearities The simulator makes an initial guess at the node voltages then calculates the branch currents based on the conductances in the circuit The branch currents are then used to recalculate the node voltages and the cycle is repeated This cycle continues until all of the node voltages and branch currents fall within user defined tolerances that is convergence occurs You can specify tolerances and iteration limits for the analysis through the analysis options described in 8 29 Analysis Options on page 8 65 If the voltages or currents do not converge within a specified number of iterations an error message is produced and the simulation is aborted typical messages include Singular matrix Gmin stepping failed Source stepping failed and Iteration limit reached DC Operating Point Analysis About the DC Operating Point Analysis The DC operating point ana
297. r CPLDs or placing a routing for FPGAs physically programming the device The last two steps in the process must be done with tools provided by the programmable logic device vendor and are therefore not a part of Multisim 10 2 3 Using Multisim for Modeling Complex Digital ICs In addition to using Multisim for Programmable Logic design you may also use it to write VHDL or Verilog HDL code modeling the behavior of complex digital ICs Alternatively you may accomplish the same thing by obtaining models for certain devices through the pub lic domain from device vendors or from others in your company who have written or obtained them If you already have a model you do not need to program in VHDL or Verilog HDL Multisim will simulate such components as part of a board level circuit as long as the model exists See 10 3 Simulating a Circuit Containing a VHDL Modeled Device on page 10 7 for details 10 2 4 How to Use HDLs in Multisim To use Multisim to simulate a circuit containing a device for which the model exists in VHDL or Verilog HDL instead of SPICE just begin simulation as described in Chapter 7 Simula tion As long as the model exists in Multisim or you have added it as described in Chapter 5 Component Editing Multisim will automatically select the appropriate type of simula tion engine when you begin simulation as explained in 10 3 Simulating a Circuit Contain ing a VHDL Modeled Device on pag
298. r function Pole and Zero Analysis finds both Simulate Accept Cancel Help Pole zero analysis produces the real and imaginary coordinates of the poles and or zeros depending on which analyses are enabled The Pole Zero analysis provides precise results on circuits containing passive devices resis tors capacitors and inductors Circuits containing active devices transistor or opamps will not always display the expected results Multisim User Guide 8 45 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 46 Note The SPICE algorithm used in the pole zero analysis may occasionally result in an error message such as Pole zero iteration limit reached giving up after 200 iterations Note that the analysis may still have found all the poles and zeros even if you receive this message Setting Pole Zero Analysis Parameters for Normal Use For normal use you only need to e select the analysis type by enabling the desired type select an input node from the Input drop down list and the Input drop down list select an output node from the Output drop down list and the Output drop down list select the analysis to be performed by choosing from the Analysis performed list Setting Pole Zero Analysis Parameters for Advanced Use For more advanced use you can filter the variables displayed to include internal nodes such as nodes inside a BJT model or inside a SPICE subcircuits open pins as well as ou
299. rarchy 3 26 horizontal Bode plotter settings 6 7 l importing model 5 28 In Use list 3 8 incomplete analyses 8 9 information stored for components 4 23 instruments about 6 1 adding to a circuit 6 2 Bode plotter 6 6 default analysis settings 6 5 distortion analyzer 6 9 function generator 6 11 logic analyzer 6 15 logic converter 6 13 measurement options 6 20 multimeter 6 19 multiple 6 4 network analyzer 6 33 oscilloscope 6 24 spectrum analyzer 6 28 using 6 3 wattmeter 6 29 word generator 6 30 integration order maximum 7 9 integration numerical 7 8 interactive simulation 7 4 interdigital model 14 36 interface 2 2 customizing 2 4 design bar 2 3 elements 2 2 internal settings of multimeter 6 22 J junction adding 3 14 L labels assigning to components 3 22 assigning to nodes 3 23 levels of database 4 1 loading model 5 28 logic analyzer about 6 15 adjusting clock 6 17 reset 6 16 start 6 16 stop 6 16 triggering 6 18 logic converter 6 13 constructing a truth table 6 14 deriving truth table from a circuit 6 13 entering Boolean expressions 6 14 lossy line model 14 34 M magnitude 6 7 manual wiring 3 12 MathCAD exporting simulation results to 12 3 maximum integration order 7 9 measurement options ammeter 6 20 decibels 6 21 ohmmeter 6 21 voltmeter 6 20 menu Edit 2 13 File 2 11 pop up 3 30 Simulate 2 19 Symbol Editor 5 19 Tools 2 25 Transfer 2 24 View 2 17 Window 2 26 microstrip line model 1
300. rcuit window to help you orient your components It also lets you show or hide the component s title block explained in more detail in 3 11 3 Adding a Title Block on page 3 23 the page bounds that show the param eters of your sheet size and the page borders that display a mapping grid As described in 2 4 3 Controlling Circuit Window Display on page 2 6 the default settings that specify which of these items are displayed is set in user preferences User preferences are used when a new circuit is created You can also use the View menu to set these defaults for the current circuit only Electronics Workbench Selecting Components from the Database gt To affect what is shown or hidden in the current circuit do one of the following enable View Grid Visible View Show Page Bounds or View Show Title Block and Bor der or right click on the circuit window and choose Grid Visible Page Bounds or Title Block and Border from the pop up menu that appears 3 3 8 Selecting a Symbol Set Multisim allows you to use either ANSI or DIN symbols on your circuit window gt Tochoose the desired symbol set choose Edit User Preferences display the Preferences tab and select the desired symbol set 3 4 Selecting Components from the Database The first step in schematic capture is placing the appropriate components on your circuit win dow Multisim components are stored in a database that contains three levels of data
301. rcuits to a Circuit on page 3 27 Grid Visible Shows or hides grid in the background of the circuit window This helps you place elements in specific locations on a grid For details see 3 3 2 Displaying or Hiding the Grid Title Block and Page Borders on page 3 2 Show Page Bounds Shows or hides page boundaries in the circuit window This helps you note where circuits will appear on printed output For details see 3 3 2 Displaying or Hiding the Grid Title Block and Page Borders on page 3 2 Electronics Workbench Using the Pop up Menu Command Description Show Title Block and Border Shows or hides the circuit s title block and border For details see 3 3 2 Displaying or Hiding the Grid Title Block and Page Borders on page 3 2 Zoom Lets you choose a magnification of 50 75 100 200 or other for viewing the circuit Find Displays a list of the reference IDs in the current circuit You can select one or more of these reference IDs which are then selected in the cir cuit window For details see 3 10 Finding Components in Your Cir cuit on page 3 21 Color Lets you choose or modify the color scheme for the circuit Overrides the defaults set in Edit User Preferences For details see 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display on page 2 5 Show Lets you choose what component elements appear on the circuit win dow Overrides the defaults set in Edit User Preferences For details se
302. re circuit by using restrictions See 13 4 2 Setting Circuit Restrictions on page 13 6 for details Electronics Workbench Placed Component Properties gt To set the identifying information to be displayed for a placed component 1 Double click on the component A properties screen for the selected component appears 2 Click the Display tab RESISTOR When this option is enabled the types of identifying information displayed for this individ ual component are con trolled by this circuit s settings When the above global setting option is not enabled these options are available and deter mine which identifying information is displayed for this individual compo nent 3 Disable the Use Schematic Option global setting option 4 Enable the identifying information you want displayed for this component and disable the identifying information you do not want displayed for this component 5 To cancel your settings click Cancel To save your settings click OK Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 17 eunjde oneuieuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 3 9 2 Viewing a Placed Component s Value Model 3 18 The Values tab of the properties screen for a component shows the value model being used for the placed component Depending on the type of component you see one of two types of tabs For real components the tab looks like this Identifies the value RESISTOR information of the compone
303. rement its normal application Use the second and third options to access the two RF analyses explained in 14 5 RF Analyses on page 14 18 Use the Setup button to enter the measurement settings for computing the circuit s S parame ters RF Analyses RF Characterizer Analysis Multisim s RF characterizer analysis tool helps designers study RF circuits in terms of the power gains voltage gain and input output impedances A typical application is an RF ampli fier The source signal at the input of an amplifier is usually provided by a receiver and its power is relatively small The RF designer often intends to magnify the input signal and pro vide an output signal in terms of both voltage and current i e the output power delivered to the load is considerably higher than that of the input signal That is why the power transfer ability of the designed circuit is of interest The power gains in Multisim are calculated by assuming that source and load impedances are 50 Ohm You can change these values by click Electronics Workbench RF Analyses ing the Setup button next to the Mode drop down list to specify that the RF simulator assumes Zl Zo and Zs Zo or Ts Tl 0 Another aspect of a circuit is the input and output impedances of the amplifier An RF ampli fier usually has more than one stage of amplification Each stage of the amplifier is loaded by the input port of the next stage The loading effect is best unde
304. rent circuit and subsequent circuits To set the autosave options symbol set default path and folder and wiring options choose Edit User Preferences and click the Preferences tab Enable or disable autosave and specify the interval at which autosave will be per formed Select the symbol set to be used for components The graphic changes to represent the selected symbol set To override this set ting for individual components see 5 10 2 Creating and Editing a Com ponent s Symbol with the Symbol Edi tor on page 5 18 User Preferences x Circuit Workspace Preferences Print page setup r Environment When Autosave is enabled schematics creates a temporary file with the same name as the active working file lfn you have a power outage system failure you can retrieve your work from the file IV Autosave Autosave interval 20 E Control the degree of m Symbols Switch between ANSI and DIN standards ANSI C DIN automation used in wiring See Chapter 3 Schematic Cap ture for details m Default Path Cancel Hep Electronics Workbench Customizing the Interface 2 4 5 Print Page Setup Tab gt To set the default print settings for subsequent circuits choose Edit User Preferences and click the Print page setup tab rated aries in black and white for z non color printers Circuit Workspace Preferences Pr
305. represents the type of component and the number is a sequential number that indicates the order in which the components were originally placed For example the first digital component has the refer ence ID U1 the next is U2 the first inductor has the reference ID L1 and so on Note If the component you place is a virtual component that is it has no equivalent in the real world and will therefore not be exported to Ultiboard it is a different color from real components and the Browser is not required i e no Step 3 This color is set in your preferences as explained in 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display on page 2 5 Note If you are placing a component whose package includes multiple devices for exam ple four separate gates you are prompted to specify which of the sections you want to place You can choose any one and if desired you can use all of the available devices from one chip before starting to use a second Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 7 ejnjde2 oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 3 5 2 3 5 3 Using the In Use List Each time you place a component or subcircuit it is added to the In Use list for easy re use To place a copy of any currently placed component simply select it from the list The copied component appears at the top of your circuit window you can move it to any location you like For educational purposes you can hide the In Use list from s
306. resistance Junction potential Break Down voltage and others available for anal ysis 8 12 2 Setting Parameter Sweep Analysis Parameters The behavior of a circuit is affected when certain parameters in specific components change Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and decide on a component and parame ter to sweep and a node for analysis Multisim User Guide 8 31 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 32 Parameter Sweep Analysis Parameters are set in the following screen Parameter Sweep Lx Analysis Parameters Output variables Miscellaneous Options Summary Choose sweep Choose the type m Sweep Parameters f devi t iiis va beer eo arameter Mode Parameter Tem E SIE en Name 12 Fl Capacitor or perature Device Parameter ad Parameter Inductor Present Value 0 Enter the refer Dictates how Multi Description Device initially off ence id of the component to sweep sim calculates the interval between the stop and start pep eva Type values Choose from Decade Octave Linear or List m Points to sweep Values 0 Choose the device parameter of the component to be sweeped Edit Analysis For List sweep only A list of val ues to sweep over Items in the list must be separated by spaces com mas or semico lons Click to edit parameters of the chosen analysis If not enabled each trace Choo
307. resistor temperature in Kelvin T 273 temperature in Celsius BW frequency bandwidth of the system being considered The thermal voltage could be represented by a mean square voltage source in series with the resistor e AkTR x BW Multisim User Guide 8 19 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 8 2 8 20 or the resistor mean square current generator i AKTBW R 2 Shot noise is caused by the discrete particle nature of the current carriers in all forms of semiconductors It is the major cause of transistor noise The equation for shot noise in a diode is i QqxIdcx BW where i shot noise RMS amperes uE electron charge 1 6 x 107 Coulomb Idec DC current A BW bandwidth Hz For all other devices such as transistors no valid formula is available See the device manufacturer s data sheet Shot noise and thermal noise are additive 3 Flicker noise also known as excess noise pink noise or f noise is present in BJTs and FETs and occurs at frequencies below 1kHz It is inversely proportional to frequency and directly proportional to temperature and DC current levels Assumptions Applied to an analog small signal circuit Non conforming parts are ignored Noise models for SPICE components are used Noise Analysis Example Noise analysis is used frequently when diagnosing problems in communications systems It calculates the noise contribution from each resistor and semiconductor at the
308. rld components that introduce variances to simulate the perfor mance of actual physical components Real world component settings are based on compo nent tolerances and therefore vary from their nominal values This affects simulation results For example a 1 Kohm resistor with a 10 variance could vary 100 ohms either way Electronics Workbench Multisim SPICE Simulation Technical Detail 7 4 7 4 1 7 3 4 2 Menu Driven Simulation from Netlist Without Schematic You can also run simulations from a command line To open the command line interface choose View Show Command Line The following win dow appears XSpice Command Line x m You can enter commands directly in this window The most important commands are SOURCE PLOT OP SAVE WRITE TAN SET and ANAC Multisim SPICE Simulation Technical Detail This section explains the basic technical methodology of circuit simulation in a SPICE based simulator including an outline of the stages of circuit simulation and an explanation of the methods of formulation and solution used in the circuit simulation It is not necessary to com prehend this information to make use of Multisim s simulation but you may find it interest ing In addition if you would like some advanced technical hints for user controllable simulation settings see 7 4 7 User Setting Maximum Integration Order on page 7 9 To fully understand the information in this section you should be acq
309. rmation you enter here will appear in the Footprint tab of the Component Properties screen 3 Click Next Step 3 of the wizard appears Create Component Wizard Step 3 of 6 MS EGET tities T vcc T VD MEE AE o ERES zi PGND Electronics Workbench The symbol you assign to this component will appear when it s placed on the circuit window To modify the symbol information click Edit and a symbol editing program will be launched see 5 10 2 3 Working with the Symbol Editor on page 5 21 for more details 4 To accept the symbol information displayed click Next Step 4 of the wizard appears Create Component Wizard Step 4 of 6 x Set Mapping Information Between Symbol and Layout Footprint H 1 01 2 lt Back L ne Cancel The logical and footprint pin mapping is needed for exporting to a layout package The relationship of logical and footprint pins must follow the syntax in the databook in order to work in Multisim see 5 10 2 6 Pins on page 5 22 for more details Foreach logical pin enter a corresponding footprint pin The mapping information you enter here will be displayed in the Footprint tab of the Component Properties screen To add logical and footprint pins click Add A logical pin will be added which you can then edit directly on this screen To delete logical and footprint pins select the pin and click Delete Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JOHP3 1ue
310. rminals and horizontal rows across the instrument face When the terminal is connected with a node its circle is displayed with a black dot and the node s name and color are displayed Otherwise the terminal circle is displayed without a black dot When a circuit is activated the logic analyzer records the input values on its terminals When the triggering signal is seen the logic analyzer displays the pre and post trigger data Data is displayed as square waves over time The top row displays values for channel 0 generally the first bit in a digital word the next row displays values for channel 1 and so on The binary value of each bit in the current word is displayed in the terminals on the left side of the instru ment face The time axis is displayed as the top axis of the signal display screen The screen also displays the internal clock signal external clock signal external clock qualify signal and trigger qualify signal To specify the number of samples stored before and after triggering click Set in the Clock box or use the default instrument settings as explained in 6 4 Default Instrument Analysis Settings on page 6 5 The logic analyzer stores data until it reaches the pre trigger number of samples Then it begins discarding samples as new samples appear until it sees the trigger signal After the trig ger signal samples are stored up to the value of the post trigger samples The time position automatically displays the ti
311. rotect both global and circuit restrictions It is important that you set passwords immediately when using restrictions that you want to keep secure against any modification by students The password for global restrictions is encrypted and stored in the Multisim program file The password for circuit restrictions for restricting only a particular circuit is encrypted and stored in the circuit file 13 4 1 Setting Global Restrictions Use global restrictions to set the basic level of functionality of Multisim available to students in all circuits with which they will work You can select a default path where circuits are to be saved hide databases parts bins and the In Use list and determine whether students may edit components or place instruments You can also choose which analyses will be available to students to run Note Global restrictions are overriden by circuit restrictions if the circuit restrictions are saved with the circuit See 13 4 2 Setting Circuit Restrictions on page 13 6 for information gt To set general global restrictions 1 Choose Edit Global restrictions Enter the default password testbench You can and should change this default password See 13 4 3 Setting Passwords for Restrictions on page 13 9 for more information Enter your password in the Password screen and click OK The Global restrictions screen appears 13 4 Electronics Workbench Using Restrictions 2 Ifit is no
312. rows V v COM V V COM move vertical cursor The Bode plotter generates a range of frequencies over a specified spectrum The frequency of any AC sources in the circuit does not affect the Bode plotter However an AC source must be included somewhere in the circuit The initial and final values of the vertical and horizontal scales are preset to their maximum value These values can be changed to see the plot on a different scale If the scale is expanded or the base changed after simulation is complete you may need to activate the circuit again to get more detail in the plot Unlike most test instruments if the Bode plotter s probes are moved to different nodes it is best to re activate the circuit to ensure accurate results 6 6 Electronics Workbench Bode Plotter 6 5 1 Magnitude or Phase Magnitude measures the ratio of magnitudes voltage gain in decibels between two nodes V and V Phase measures the phase shift in degrees between two nodes Both gain and phase shift will be plotted against frequency in hertz gt If V and V are single points in a circuit 1 Attach the positive IN terminal and the positive OUT terminal to connectors at V and V 2 Attach the negative IN and OUT terminals to a ground component gt If V or V is the magnitude or phase across a component attach both IN terminals or both OUT terminals on either side of the component 6 5 2 Vertical and Horizontal Axes Settings
313. rstood by studying the input output impedances Most engi neers would like to design an amplifier which has maximum input impedance in low RF fre quencies to reduce its loading effect on previous stage On the other hand the smaller the output impedance is the better the output signal would be delivered In higher RF frequencies it is desirable to have an output impedance matching that of the load to minimize the reflec tion of signals The Multisim RF characterizer analysis toolbox helps designers to study these impedances and choose the most appropriate frequency of operation To use the simulator in order to read the desired variable 1 Connect the network analyzer to the amplifier 2 Run the simulator Ignore the DC warnings and wait until the AC analyses are complete 3 Double click on the network analyzer 4 At the bottom of the right side of the control panel of the network analyzer select RF characterizer from the Mode drop down list 5 Under the Trace options set the desired variable from among T G A P G and T P G While the curves are plotted versus frequency the numerical values are displayed at the top of curves for each frequency point 6 From the Parameter drop down list select Gains Here the voltage gain V G gt is plot ted versus frequency and its value is given at the top of the curve Note Use Auto Scale each time you change the parameters to get a better reading 7 In the Parameter drop
314. s CN Using temperature sweep analysis you can quickly verify the operation of your circuit by Z simulating it at different temperatures The effect is the same as simulating the circuit several times once for each different temperature You control the temperature values by choosing start stop and increment values You may perform three types of sweeps DC Operating Point Transient Analysis and AC Frequency Analysis Assumptions See the assumptions for the selected analysis DC operating point analysis described in 8 4 DC Operating Point Analysis on page 8 9 transient anal ysis described in 8 6 Transient Analysis on page 8 13 or AC frequency analysis described in 8 4 DC Operating Point Analysis on page 8 9 Temperature sweep analysis affects only components whose model includes temperature dependency such as e Virtual Resistor e 3 Terminal Depletion N MOSFET e 3 Terminal Depletion P MOSFET 3 Terminal Enhancement N MOSFET 3 Terminal Enhancement P MOSFET e 4 Terminal Depletion N MOSFET e 4 Terminal Depletion P MOSFET 4 Terminal Enhancement N MOSFET 4 Terminal Enhancement P MOSFET e Diode LED N Channel JFET NPN Transistor P Channel JFET PNP Transistor 8 34 Electronics Workbench Temperature Sweep Analysis 8 13 2 Setting Temperature Sweep Analysis Parameters Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and decide on a node for analysis The Analysis Parameters
315. s RF components as you would any other Multisim components There are several Component Families in the RF Parts Bin including RF capacitors RF inductors RF NPN BJTs RF PNP BJTs RF MOSFETS RF tunnel diodes and RF striplines waveguides Families containing components with wide commercial availability e g RF NPN BJT have a large number of components within them Families containing components that are not readily available off the shelf e g RF inductors contain only a few components The latter were modelled using Multisim s RF Model Makers explained in 14 4 RF Instruments on page 14 9 RF Model Makers are also used to customise your own parts as explained in 14 6 RF Model Makers on page 14 27 14 3 3 Theoretical Explanation of the RF Models This section explains some of the scientific theory behind the operation of RF components and why they must be modelled differently at higher frequencies You do not need to under stand this information to use the RF components in Multisim but it may be of interest to you If it is not of interest you may proceed to section 14 4 and begin using the RF components immediately 14 3 3 1 Striplines Microstrips Waveguides Wires are used to connect two internal nodes on a circuit and show no difference in phase and magnitude between two connecting nodes Wires however behave differently at RF frequen cies depending on their length and diameter One effect at RF frequencies is called the
316. s Workbench Chapter 8 Analyses 8 1 About this Chapter This chapter explains how to use the various analyses included in Multisim It explains how to work with analyses in general the specific settings and options for each individual analysis and how to view and manipulate analyses results Some of the features described in this chapter may not be available in your version of Multi sim Such features have an icon in the column next to their description Introduction to Multisim Analyses Multisim offers you many analyses all of which utilize simulation to generate the data for the analysis you want to perform These analyses can range from quite basic to extremely sophis ticated and can often require one analysis to be performed automatically as part of another For each analysis you will need to decide upon some settings that will tell Multisim what you want the analysis to do In addition to the analyses provided by Multisim you can also create user defined analyses based on SPICE commands you enter When you activate an analysis the results are displayed on a plot in Multisim s Grapher unless you specify otherwise see 8 23 Viewing the Analysis Results Grapher on page 8 54 for more information on the Grapher and saved for use in the Postprocessor not available in all versions of Multisim see Chapter 9 Postprocessor for more information Some results are also written to an audit trail which you can view
317. s opened choose File Save to save the restrictions 13 4 3 Setting Passwords for Restrictions When using restrictions you should create a password immediately to ensure that your set tings are secure gt To create change a password 1 For global restrictions choose Edit Global restrictions For circuit restrictions choose Edit Circuit restrictions Multisim User Guide 13 9 apind suojeonpy Educators Guide Educators Guide 13 5 13 10 2 From the restrictions screen that appears click Password The Change Password screen appears Old password New password Confirm password p 3 Cancel 3 If you are choosing a password for the first time leave the Old password field blank If you are changing a password enter the old password in the Old password field 4 Enter your new password in the New password field 5 Confirm your password by entering it again in the Confirm password field 6 Click OK to return to the Global restrictions screen or Cancel to begin again Note If you want to change global circuit restrictions you will need to enter the password you have assigned in either case Be sure to keep your passwords written down and in a safe place as you will not be able to retrieve them from the program or circuit files where they are stored in encrypted form Note A circuit password is not automatically transferred to a new circuit when you go to set circuit restrictions for it
318. s see 5 5 Editing a Component General Properties on page 5 7 5 10 Editing and Creating a Component Symbol on page 5 16 5 11 Creating or Editing a Component Model on page 5 25 5 12 Creating and Editing Component Footprints on page 5 29 5 6 Editing a Component Electronic Parameters on page 5 8 Electronics Workbench You are prompted to specify the location where you want the edited component saved Select Destination Choose the database level in which you want ihe edited carpets stored Choose the family in which you want the edited component stored Click here to add new family prompted for group and name 5 5 Editing a Component General Properties The General tab of the Component Properties screen allows you to modify the component s name and manufacturer The data and author are drawn from system information and cannot be changed Component Properties Multisim User Guide Rev 1 ouodwo oduo2 X Component Editor 5 6 Editing a Component Electronic Parameters Common parameters are General Symbol Model Footprint Electronic Parameters User Fields the same for all compo 7 Common Parameters nents Thermal Resistance Junction 0 00 Thermal Resistance Case 116 00 AC The device Power Dissipation 0 01 parameters are not p affect the simulating Derating Knee Point 0 00 Vorher nt foo Min perating Temp
319. s tab where you choose a title for the plot produced by the analysis and set any custom values for analysis options the Summary tab where you see a consolidated view of all the settings for the analy sis The options and settings available under these tabs are described in the following sections of this chapter gt To save the settings as the defaults for future use click Accept on the analysis screen gt Torun the simulation with the current settings click Simulate on the analysis screen gt Torun several analyses in batch see 8 19 Batched Analyses on page 8 51 Tip To stop an analysis press ESC 8 2 Electronics Workbench Working with Analyses 8 3 2 8 3 3 The Analysis Parameters Tab The options available on the analysis parameters tab are different for each analysis and so are described in different subsections of this chapter one per analysis Each analysis description includes guidelines for both normal and advanced use of the analysis Some lists of items are accompanied by a Filter variables displayed function This lets you filter the items shown in that list choosing whether or not to include internal nodes submod ules open pins and device parameters The Output Variables Tab This tab displays on the left all the possible output variables for the current circuit You choose the variables you want to use in the analysis Distortion Analysis x Choose types of variables to
320. s the original wave A cosnot B sinnwt the n harmonic of the function A B the coefficients 2n E the fundamental angular frequency or 27 times the fre T quency of the original periodic wave Each frequency component or terrm of the response is produced by the corresponding har monic of the periodic waveform Each term is considered a separate source According to the principle of superposition the total response is the sum of the responses produced by each term Note that the amplitude of the harmonics decreases progressively as the order of the har monics increases This indicates that comparatively few terms yield a good approximation Electronics Workbench Fourier Analysis When Multisim performs Discrete Fourier Transform DFT calculations only the second cycle of the fundamental component of a time domain or transient response extracted at the output node is used The first cycle is discarded for the settling time The coefficient of each harmonic is calculated from the data gathered in the time domain from the beginning of the cycle to time point t That is set automatically and is a function of the fundamental fre quency This analysis requires a fundamental frequency matching the frequency of the AC source or the lowest common factor of multiple AC sources Assumptions None 8 7 2 Setting Fourier Analysis Parameters Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and select an output node in the scr
321. se DC Operating Point AC Analysis appears on a separate plot Transient Analysis Nested Sweep Not applicable to Temperature sweeps Parameter sweep analysis plots the appropriate curves sequentially The number of curves is dependent on the type of sweep as shown below Type of Sweep Curves Linear The number of curves is equal to the difference between the start and end values divided by the increment step size Decade The number of curves is equal to the number of times the start value can be multiplied by ten before reaching the end value Octave The number of curves is equal to the number of times the start value can be doubled before reaching the end value Electronics Workbench Parameter Sweep Analysis Setting Parameter Sweep Analysis Parameters for Normal Use For normal use you only need to select a sweep parameter by choosing a parameter type Device or Model from the Sweep Parameter drop down list then entering information in the Device Type Name and Parameter fields Note A brief description of the parameter appears in the Description field and the present value of the parameter is displayed in the Present Value field setthe sweep variation type by choosing a type of distribution linear decade or octave from the Sweep Variation Type drop down list select the analysis to sweep by choosing from the Analysis to sweep drop down list Optionally you can set the analysis parameters by c
322. shorts opens and leakage s Any o zi Short p Open p s Leak p a OK Specify Leak Resistance o om lt 2 Use the up down arrow keys or enter numerical values directly in the Short Open and Leak fields or enter a numerical value in the Any field to let Multisim randomly select the type of faults to assign 3 If you specify a number of leaks enter a number and unit of measurement in the Specify Leak Resistance fields 4 Click OK to apply the faults or Cancel to cancel and return to the circuit window 13 4 Using Restrictions Restrictions are useful in a number of ways a when you are designing circuits for demonstration purposes and want to limit the function ality available to students b when you are sharing circuits with students and want 1 to prevent them from being able to edit the circuit in any way Multisim User Guide 13 3 apind siojeonp3 Educators Guide Educators Guide ii to limit the types of modifications they can make to a circuit iii to limit the types of analyses they can perform on it iv to limit the information they can see about certain parts of the circuit for example the value of a resistor you want them to calculate You can set global level restrictions which become default Multisim settings or circuit level restrictions which affect only specific circuits To ensure that only you can set or modify restrictions you use passwords which can p
323. so you will need to recreate the password every time you cre ate circuit restrictions that you want to keep secure Remote Control Circuit Sharing Multisim s Remote Control Circuit Sharing module allows you to share a circuit with students over a network and to control Multisim running on each others PCs This module offers a way for you and groups of students to work with the same circuit in a laboratory environment and is useful for demonstrations and examples allowing students to see you making changes to the circuit in real time It can also be very useful for tutors trying to assist a student having difficulty at home To use Multisim s Remote Control Circuit Sharing capability you must have access to a net work or the Internet and have the free Microsoft application Netmeeting installed To install a copy of this product go to http www microsoft com netmeeting Once you have established a connection with students you can send text messages back and forth in a chat mode see and or talk to the students if you have the necessary software and hardware to support audio video links Electronics Workbench Remote Control Circuit Sharing e use an electronic whiteboard to present ideas to students e send circuit files to students control students machines so you can show them the changes you are making to a circuit gt To use the Remote Control Design Sharing module C 1 Click the Transfer button on t
324. span is 11MHz 1kHz 10 999kHz The fre quency value of f center is 1 1MHz 1kHz 2 5 5005 MHz 4 Set the range to 2 dB division and set the reference to 4 dB to demonstrate the application of reference dB level The frequency values of f start and f end are set so that the frequency components of interest are captured and their magnitudes can be studied Using the spectrum analyzer you can verify that there are more than two frequency components present at the output node There are three components above 4 dB zero frequency 2MHz and 4 MHz Other frequency components are at higher frequencies and have dB level less than 4 dB Network Analyzer 14 4 2 1 About the Network Analyzer The network analyzer is used to measure the scattering parameters or S parameters of a cir cuit commonly used to characterize a circuit intended to operate at higher frequencies These S parameters are used for a variety of purposes including in Multisim RF analyses The net work analyzer also calculates H Y Z parameters Multisim User Guide 14 15 du RF RF 14 4 2 2 Using the Network Analyzer The circuit is idealized as a two port network To properly use the network analyzer the cir cuit must be left open at its input and output ports During simulation the network analyzer completes the circuit being analyzed by inserting its sub circuits You need to remove these sub circuits from the circuit before performing other analysis
325. specified output node Each noise source is assumed not to be statistically correlated with the other noise sources in the circuit and their values are calculated independently The total output noise at the output node is the Root Mean Square RMS sum of the individual noise contributions The result is then divided by the gain between the input source VO in the sample circuit below and the output source node 13 to give the equivalent input noise Equivalent input noise is the amount of noise that you would need to inject at the input source of a noiseless circuit to give an output noise level matching the noisy circuit The total output noise voltage can be referenced to ground or to another node on the circuit In this case the total output noise is taken across these two nodes For example if you choose V1 as the input noise reference source and N1 as the output node all the noise generators in the circuit have their noise contributions summed at N1 to provide the output noise This value is then divided by the gain from V1 to N1 to get the equivalent Electronics Workbench Noise Analysis input noise which if injected from V1 into a noiseless circuit would cause the previously cal culated amount of output noise at N1 8 8 3 Setting Noise Analysis Parameters Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and decide on an input noise reference source output node and reference node Noise Analysis Parameters are set in t
326. spectively Note that the amplitude is the peak value of the sinusoidal waveform it is not the RMS value of the waveform The mixer is set to multi ply the signals with unity gain without introducing an offset in either of the input signals You can expect to find two components at the output placed at 1 2 0 8 2 MHz and 1 2 0 8 0 4 MHz gt If you want to try this example for yourself do the following 1 Construct the network as shown above 2 Double click on the multiplier and set the gains to 1 and the offsets to zeros 3 Double click on the spectrum analyzer and initialize it using one start and end frequencies example 3 in this chapter shows another way to initialize the spectrum analyzer Set Span to 3MHz and Center to 1 8MHz Click Enter The frequency value of f start is automatically set to 1 8MHz 3 2 MHz 300 kHz The frequency value of f end is automatically set to 1 8MHz 3 2 MHz 3 3MHz Multisim User Guide 14 13 du RF RF 14 14 Since the amplitude of the component is around 8 10 2 40V set the amplitude range to 100 V in LIN mode 4 Run the simulator 5 Double click on the spectrum analyzer 6 Click Start and wait until the signal stabilizes The spectrum analyzer starts performing the Fourier Transform of the input signal in time domain However since it begins with only a few samples it does not provide accurate results initially You must wait until the screen is refr
327. strictions See 13 4 2 Setting Circuit Restrictions on page 13 6 gt To set global analyses restrictions 1 From the Global restrictions screen click the Analyses tab Global restrictions x General Analysis Please select applicable box to enable the analysis DC operating point VDC Sweep Distortion Analysis Fourier Analysis Monte Carlo Noise Analysis Noise Figure Analysis Parameter Sweep Pole Zero Sensitivity Temperature Sweep Trace Width Analysis Transfer Function Transient Analysis User Defined Analysis Worst Case Password Cancel Help 2 Enable the desired analyses by clicking the appropriate checkboxes for more information on analyses see Chapter 8 Analyses and click OK Only the analyses you check will be enabled on the Simulate Analyses menu or when the student clicks the Analyses Design Bar button These options are immediately set for all circuits unless you have set circuit restrictions See 13 4 2 Setting Circuit Restrictions on page 13 6 13 4 2 Setting Circuit Restrictions Use circuit restrictions to set restrictions on individual circuits Circuit restrictions override global restrictions They are saved with your circuit and invoked each time the circuit is loaded In addition to hiding parts bins and databases and setting available analyses you can set a schematic to be read only i e not editabl
328. t age or current with respect to the parameters of all components DC sensitivity or one com ponent AC sensitivity in a circuit For details see 8 11 DC and AC Sensitivity Analyses on page 8 27 Simulate Analyses Parameter Sweep Sets up and runs Parameter Sweep analysis which verifies the operation of a circuit by simu lating it across a range of values for a component parameter For details see 8 12 Parameter Sweep Analysis on page 8 31 Simulate Analyses Temperature Sweep Sets up and runs Temperature Sweep analysis which quickly verifies the operation of a circuit by simulating it at different temperatures The effect is the same as simulating the circuit sev eral times once for each different temperature You control the temperature values For details see 8 13 Temperature Sweep Analysis on page 8 34 Simulate Analyses Transfer Function Sets up and runs Transfer Function analysis which calculates the DC small signal transfer function between an input source and two output nodes for voltage or an output variable for current in a circuit It also calculates input and output resistances For details see 8 14 Transfer Function Analysis on page 8 36 Simulate Analyses Worst Case Sets up and runs Worst Case analysis a statistical analysis that lets you explore the worst pos sible effects on circuit performance of variations in component parameters For details see 8 15 Worst Case Analysis on page 8 38
329. t List Allows you to edit the component For details see Chapter 5 Com ponent Editing Click to search the database For details see 4 3 Locat ing Components in the Database on page 4 21 Produces a list of the components in the family For details a see 11 3 Database Family List on page 11 3 List Report Detail Report Produces detailed information about the selected compo nent For details see 11 4 Component Detail Report on User Fields page 11 4 Allows you to enter user field information for the selected component For details see 13 7 Working with User Fields on page 13 8 3 6 Electronics Workbench Placing Components 5 To confirm that this is the component you want to place click OK To cancel placing the component click Cancel The Browser screen disappears and the cursor on the circuit window changes to a ghost image of the component you wish to place This indicates a component is ready to be placed An ghost image of the component appears on EN O the circuit window A E showing you exactly e E where the component will be placed 6 Click on the circuit window at the location where you want the component placed The component s symbol and labels appear unless you have specified that they are not to be displayed as explained in 3 11 1 Modifying Component Labels on page 3 22 as well as a unique reference ID made up of a letter and number The letter
330. t analysis such as the oscilloscope spectrum analyzer and logic analyzer For details see 6 4 Default Instrument Analysis Settings on page 6 5 2 6 4 4 Simulate Instruments Contains commands you use to place instruments an alternative to using the instruments tool bar or the Design Bar For details on these instruments see Chapter 6 Instruments Note Ammeter and voltmeter instruments are available from the Indicators Parts Bin Simulate Instruments Multimeter Places a multimeter on the circuit window A multimeter is used to measure AC or DC voltage or current resistance or decibel loss between two nodes in a circuit For details see 6 10 Multimeter on page 6 19 Simulate Instruments Function Generator Places a function generator on the circuit window A function generator is a voltage source that supplies sine triangular or square waves It provides a convenient and realistic way to supply power to a circuit For details see 6 7 Function Generator on page 6 11 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 19 soeJyaju Jasn User Interface User Interface 2 20 Simulate Instruments Wattmeter Places a wattmeter on the circuit window A wattmeter provides the combined functions of a voltmeter and an ammeter It is used to measure the magnitude of the active power that is the product of the voltage difference and the current flowing through the current terminals in a circuit For details see 6 14 Wat
331. t be connected to the symbol shape correctly in order for the symbol to function properly Follow these rules A pin must always be facing out with no shapes lines or text blocking its way to be con nected by a wire If a pin is blocked you may not be able to connect it e A pin can only be connected at the far end of its the logical side New Pin O The side marked New Pin is the logical end of the pin Connect the pin at the far end of the logi cal side e All pins must fall on the grid Multisim may not recognize a pin that is not placed on the grid Therefore it is very important that the snap to grid function be enabled when you place pins on a symbol gt To adda pin to a symbol 1 From the View menu enable Grid Visible and Snap to Grid ut 2 Click the Input Output Pin button on the palette A cursor appears Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JO1JIp3 1ueuoduio5 Component Editor 3 Click on the screen where you want the pin to appear A new pin placeholder appears HEU Bi New Pin O Note When placing a pin to a shape always use the side containing the logical pin name Multisim will not recognize a pin that has been connected backwards 4 If the pin does not touch the shape as you want it to disable Snap to Grid and draw a line from the logical pin end to the component shape Do not move the pin while the grid is disabled Once you have placed the pin in its location you can then edit its
332. t displayed click the General tab General Analysis Click here to select a r Circuit Path c program files default path location to store circuits I Enable these check a A m Parts Bin boxes to disallow component editing to hide parts bins Hide User DB databases and In Hide instruments parts bin Hide In Use list Use list Hide MultiSIM DB Password Cancel Help 3 Set your options by enabling the appropriate checkboxes Select from the following options Circuit path Sets the default path and location where students find and save files Disable component editing Ensures that students cannot edit component proper ties Makes the Component editing unavailable and dis ables the Tools Edit Component command Hide Multisim DB Hides the Multisim database and Parts Bins from the interface Hide User DB Hides the user database and Parts Bins from the inter face Hide Instruments parts bin Makes instruments unvailable to be placed in the circuit Hides the Instruments Design Bar button from the inter face and disables the Simulate Instruments com mand Hide In Use list Hides the In Use list from the interface 4 Click OK Multisim User Guide 13 5 apind siojeonp3 Educators Guide Educators Guide Your options are immediately set for all circuits unless you have set circuit re
333. t frequency FSTART Ha E Sweep Stop frequency FSTOP fio GHz y Sweep type Decade E Reset to main AC Select a sweep type decade TE N es linear or octave AN Vertical scale Decibel Reset to default Enter number of points For lin ear number of frequency points F2 F1 ratio 03 between start and end Select a vertical scale logarith mic linear decibel or octave When enabled if there are sig nals of two frequencies F1 and F2 then F2 is set to this ratio multiplied by the start frequency while F1 sweeps Must be greater than 0 0 and less than 1 0 Description AAA Simulate Accept Cancel Help If the F2 F1 ratio is disabled the analysis calculates harmonic distortion of one frequency which is swept according to the screen entries If F2 F1 ratio is enabled a spectral analysis is performed Each independent source in the circuit may potentially have two superimposed sinusoidal inputs for distortion at frequencies F1 and F2 If the F2 F1 ratio is disabled the analysis produces a graph of the second and third harmonics displaying them on a Distortion tab in the Grapher If the F2 F1 ratio is enabled the analysis produces a graph of the selected voltage or branch current at the intermodulation frequencies F1 F2 Fl F2 2 F1 F2 versus the swept frequency F1 These graphs appear in the IM Distortion tab of the Grapher For more information on the Grapher see 8 23 Viewi
334. tabase and the 1 is a sequential number placed on the component Any additional resistors either placed on the circuit window using the component family toolbar or copied will increase sequentially i e R1 R2 R3 5 10 2 5 Shape A symbol requires a shape to allow users to recognize its general function For example a capacitor has a shape of and a nor gate has a shape of TJ You utilize the drawing capabilities of Multisim s Symbol Editor to construct a shape that makes logical sense for the component you are creating or modifying The simplest way to do this is to edit the shape of an existing component Once this is done you will need to add pins Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JOJIp3 1ueuoduio5 Component Editor 5 10 2 6 Pins There are three main parts to a pin the logical pin the physical pin and the shape of the pin The logical pin is the name given to an actual pin For example most digital parts have pins named Vc and GND These names are the logical pin names used to identify the actual pin The logical pin name can be anything you want as long as it is understood You can use the acronym GND or call the pin Ground It is recommended however that you use the logical pin names provided in the data book for a component The physical pin is the physical location of the pin on a given component For example if you are creating a symbol that has 16 physical pins attached to it
335. te how the vari Add Trace Delete Trace ables are prefixed with the analysis code In this example the first vari able comes from the analysis disto03 and Analysis Results Analysis Variables Available functions the second from analy B fan gt fan E Draw sis dc05 Default Analisys Results Operating Point op01 Interactive Image Technolog Operating Point opO1 v 2 Close v Cancel Set Default Analysis Results Copy Variable To trace es Help From the Available Functions list select the mathematical function you want included in the equation for this trace and click Copy Function to Trace To filter the list to show only certain mathematical functions choose from the drop down list of options For details about the available functions see 9 5 Available Functions on page 9 8 Note Although it is possible to manually type or modify a trace s equation manual interven tion can introduce syntax errors Wherever possible use the copy buttons to build your traces Multisim User Guide 9 3 JosseooJdisog Postprocessor Postprocessor 9 4 5 Continue to choose analyses variables and functions until the equation is complete For example your equation might look like this a fad og 2y de02 w1 branch 6 To plot the traces defined by this equation click Draw 7 You are prompted for a page name This is the name of the tabbed page that w
336. te reliably Use degrees centigrade Electronics Workbench 5 7 n ESD Rating Description Enter or modify the electro static discharge for the component Adding Components Multisim includes a Create Component Wizard to step you through the process of creating a component gt To create a component 1 Click the Component editing button on the Design Bar and choose Create Component from the pop up menu that appears Or Choose Tools Create Component The Create Component Wizard appears Create Component Wizard Step 1 of 6 Ea Set Component Information Component Name test Manufacturer Name CEC Component Type Analog Component requires simulation model and layout footprint C Component requires only simulation model C Component requires only layout footprint tees Enter the component name manufacturer and type Select the component simulation and layout footprint requirements for the component Note The number of Steps you will have to complete will depend upon which component requirements you select in Step 1 For example if your component only requires a simulator model the wizard will skip Step 6 on pin and model mapping Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JO1JIp3 1ueuoduio 5 2 Click Next Step 2 of the wizard appears Create Component Wizard Step 2 of 6 Specify the package type and pin number information for the component The foot print info
337. the Windows control keys for cut CTRL X copy CTRL C and paste CTRL V 3 5 5 Replacing a Placed Component You can easily replace a placed component by using the Replace button on the component s properties screen gt To replace a placed component Ja ik 1 Double click on the component you want to replace The component s properties screen appears Label Display Value Faut Value Model T ohm Footprint RESQ5 Manufacturer Generic Function Edit Component EditMode Replace Multisim User Guide Rev 1 3 9 eunjdey oneueuos Schematic Capture Schematic Capture 2 Click Replace The Browser screen appears already loaded with the selected compo nent s component family 3 Select a new component from the Component List and click OK The new component appears on the circuit window in the place of the previous one 3 5 6 Controlling Component Color The default color used for a component and the background color of the circuit window are controlled by your user preferences as described in 2 4 2 Controlling Circuit Display on page 2 5 Tochange the color of the placed component right click on the component and choose Color from the pop up menu that appears You are presented with a color palette Choose a color and click OK to apply it to the selected item gt To change the color of the background and the default color scheme used throughout the cir
338. the analysis review your circuit and decide on an output node In the Model tolerance list tab choose which tolerance parameters are to be used You can do this using any of the following methods To edit a tolerance in the list select it and click Edit select tolerance The tolerance s current variable settings appear Modify the variables as desired and click OK to save To delete a tolerance form the list select it and click Delete tolerance entry To manually add a tolerance click Add tolerance Electronics Workbench Monte Carlo Analysis The Tolerance screen appears Choose type of sweep to be per formed Model Parameter or Device Parameter Tolerance Model Parameter When selected the current value and a description of the parame fur ter appear Choose the type of distribution fron El re Gaussian or Uniform Choose Unique each random number generation is distinct ora numbered lot the same random number generation for various parameters Choose Absolute to enter a value or Percent to vary the parameter by the specified per centage of its stated value Enter a percentage value or a set value depending on the tolerance type selected Enter the desired variables in the appropriate fields Multisim User Guide 8 49 ses jeuy Analyses Analyses 8 17 2 Setting Monte Carlo Analysis Parameters Monte Carlo Analysis parameters are set in the following screen
339. the analysis is unedited the last values set for the analysis will be used If the analy sis has not been run previously the default values will apply Setting Temperature Sweep Analysis Parameters for Advanced Use You can select different sweep variation types while setting Analysis Parameters You can also perform nested sweeps combining a device model parameter sweep with a temperature sweep This allows you to sweep a device parameter such as capacitance at a range of tem perature values Multisim User Guide 8 35 sos A euy Analyses Analyses gt To select a sweep parameter 1 Choose a parameter type Device or Model from the Sweep Parameter drop down list 2 Enter values in the Device Type Name and Parameter fields Note A brief description of the parameter appears in the Description field and the present value of the parameter is displayed in the Present Value field gt To set the sweep variation type and specify the range and number of points to sweep 1 Choose the type of distribution linear decade or octave from the Sweep Variation Type drop down list Click Edit Analysis A new Analysis Parameters screen appears Enter a start value for the sweep in the Start field Enter a stop value for the sweep in the End field D CERVUS Enter the number of points in the Number of points field The increment value will be calculated and automatically set Choose the analysis to sweep from the Analysis
340. the y axis When used alone inverts the trace 180 degrees from to Channel A C NJ m dE Scale 5 v Div Scale 5 v Div When used in conjunction with timebase Add Y position 0 0 Y position 0 0 button subtracts Trace B from Trace A ac offer Point of origin Input terminal indicators on the y axis This setting determines the scale of the y axis It also controls the x axis scale when A B or B A is selected To get a readable display adjust the scale in relation to the channel s expected voltage For example an input AC signal of 3 volts fills the oscilloscope s display vertically when the y axis is set to 1 V Div If the volts per division is increased the waveform will become smaller If the volts per division is decreased the waveform s top will be cut off 6 12 3 2 Y Position 3 00 3 00 This setting controls the point of origin for the y axis When Y position is set to 0 00 the point of origin is the intersection with the x axis Increasing Y position to 1 00 for example moves 0 the point of origin up to the first division above the x axis Decreasing Y position to 1 00 moves 0 down to the first division below the x axis Changing the Y position setting for channels A and B may help distinguish their waveforms for comparison 6 12 3 3 Input Coupling AC 0 and DC With AC coupling only the AC component of a signal is displayed AC coupling has the effect of placing a capacitor in series w
341. then you would have physi cal pins numbered from 1 to 16 The numbering of the physical pins is what is used by PCB layout software to ensure that connections from one component to another are made properly While it is recommended that you use the logical pin names given in a databook for a compo nent for the physical pin names you must use the names from the databook or your compo nent will not work properly Note The relationship of logical and physical pins must follow the syntax in the databook in order to work in Multisim The third part of a pin is its appearance or shape Multisim provides eight pin shapes that you can use dot Negative Active Signal 0 New Pin O e dot clock Negative Active Clock New Pin lt O e line Positive Active Signal 0 New Pin e short Positive Active Signal 0 short format New Pin Zero Terminal Pin length 0 8 New Pin 9 Electronics Workbench clock input wedge output wedge 0 New Pin lt New Pin New Pin Positive Active Clock Negative Active Input Signal DIN symbols Negative Active Output Signal DIN symbols None of the pin shapes have any impact on the operation of the component However pin shapes do have an impact on the component user each of the shapes is used for specific iden tification purposes Again it is recommended that you follow the pin shape from the data book when creating a symbol for a component Pins mus
342. tion Via previous second time point solution h present time step ha previous time step User Setting Maximum Integration Order You can change the maximum order for integration method using the MAXORD analysis option see 8 29 Analysis Options on page 8 65 Using a higher order 3 through 6 Gear method theoretically leads to more accurate results but slows down the simulation Be aware that the maximum order for integration method is the maximum order that could be used but that the simulator selects the most appropriate order based on the circuit Due to the nature of the nonlinear components each time point may involve solving the admittance matrix several times before converging to a solution The point solution is reached when the difference between consecutive voltage values is less than the tolerance calculated internally in terms of the absolute and relative tolerances specified in the analysis options Convergence Assistance Algorithms Multisim uses two modified Newton Raphson continuation algorithms Gmin stepping and Source stepping to help find the solution during a DC Operating Point analysis of general nonlinear circuits 7 4 8 1 Gmin Stepping Gmin stepping is a multi step iterative algorithm This algorithm simply adds a conductance Gmin to the diagonal elements of the modified nodal admittance matrix so that a solution will converge more quickly The basic concept is to keep the matrix well conditioned I
343. tmeter on page 6 29 Simulate Instruments Oscilloscope Places an oscilloscope on the circuit window The dual channel oscilloscope displays the magnitude and frequency variations of electronic signals It can provide a graph of the strength of one or two signals over time or allow comparison of one waveform to another For details see 6 12 Oscilloscope on page 6 24 Simulate Instruments Bode Plotter Places a Bode plotter on the circuit window A Bode plotter produces a graph of a circuit s fre quency response and is useful for analyzing filter circuits For details see 6 5 Bode Plotter on page 6 6 Simulate Instruments Word Generator Places a word generator on the circuit window A word generator sends digital words or pat terns of bits into circuits to test them For details see 6 15 Word Generator on page 6 30 Simulate Instruments Logic Analyzer Places a logic analyzer on the circuit window A logic analyzer displays the levels of up to 16 digital signals in a circuit It is used for fast data acquisition of logic states and advanced tim ing analysis to help design large systems and carry out troubleshooting For details see 6 9 Logic Analyzer on page 6 15 Simulate Instruments Logic Converter Places a logic converter on the circuit window A logic converter is able to perform several transformations of a circuit representation It has no real world counterpart For details see 6 8 Logic Converter on page
344. tons on a toolbar which can be dragged to a new loca tion Saves contents of current Shows preview of pages as Undoes most pages in a graph file they will be printed See recent action Presents menu of two 8 28 Print and Print Pre commands New Page ES view on page 8 64 and Delete All Pages Ny Prints some or all of the cur Cuts copies and pastes pages or Opens previously saved rent pages See 8 28 Print 2 graph file and Print Preview on page graphs charts See 8 27 Cut Copy and 8 64 Paste on page 8 63 When the Grapher is on the screen it remains visible until you do one of the following Restores pre zoom Lets you set graph Lets you export dimensions See properties See 8 24 Lets you re analysis results Displays hides graph 825 3 Zoom and Working with Pages on apply chart t Excel See legend See 8 25 1 Restore on page 8 page 8 56 and 8 25 properties 12 4 2 Export Grids and Legends VA Sm with Graphs ing to Excel on on page 8 57 on page 8 at ra pu page 12 3 ws E ag al ER Applies removes grid for Displays hides cur Displays hides Undoes Lets you export the selected graph See sors and data See negative chart prop analysis results to 8 25 1 Grids and Leg 8 25 2 Cursors on image of erties MathCAD See ends on page 8 57 page 8 58 for details graph or chart 12 4 1 Exporting to MathCAD on page 12 3 Close the window Or Toggle of
345. tor en Capacitor virtual Inductor Inductor virtual ff Potentiometer Variable potentiometer Variable capacitor Virtual variable capacitor Variable inductor Virtual variable inductor Rpack _ _ Pullup Non linear transformer Switch 1 1 Tm Transformer Coreless coil Magnetic core Relay Sockets i Connectors Resistor smt T Capacitor smt Inductorsmt _ 4 Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Electronics Workbench Structure of the Component Database 4 2 3 4 Diodes Toolbar ANSI Diode Diode virtual Zener FWB LED __ SCR TRIAC Schottky diode DIAC Bf Li Varactor DIN Diode Diode virtual iM PIN Zener Pin diode H FWB LED SCR Shottky diode DIAC TRIAC Varactor IN Note For details about these component families see the appendices in either the printed manual or the PDF file shipped with Multisim Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 9 sjueuodujoj5 Components Components 4 10 4 2 3 5 Transistors Toolbar ANSI Transistors BJT NPN BJT NPN virtual BJT_PNP X BJT PNP virtual BJT 4T NPN BJT 4T_ PNP Darlington NPN l BJT NRES BJT Pres Darlington PNP qn BJT Array MOS STDN El to NE LE IGBT MOS
346. tput signal The impedance of a capacitor is frequency dependant and is calculated using X_c 1 jwC where w is 2 pi f Multisim User Guide 14 21 du RF RF 14 22 2 To activate the network analyzer click the Simulate button on the Design Bar and choose Run Stop from the pop up menu Wait until the AC analyses are complete Ignore the warning for DC analysis Double click on the Network Analyzer icon on the circuit window From the Mode drop down list select Match Net Designer From the Match Net Designer screen click the Stability Circles tab QN IN pen Select the desired operating frequency from the field in the lower left corner of the screen and click OK The result is a Smith Chart showing an input stability circle and an output stability circle A stability circle represents the boundary between the values of source or load impedance that cause instability and those that do not The perimeter of the circle thus represents the locus of points which forces K 1 Note that either the inside or the outside of the circle may represent an unstable region Unstable regions are hashed on the Smith Chart There are three possible scenarios on the Smith Chart as described below None ofthe Smith Chart is hashed In this case the circuit is said to be unconditionally stable meaning that any area of the Smith Chart represents a valid passive source or load impedance The designer can then select the input or o
347. tput vari ables from any submodules contained in the circuit To filter the variables displayed 1 Click Change Filter The Filter Nodes screen appears Filter nodes x Display internal nodes Display submodules Cancel Display open pins 2 Enable one or more settings 3 Click OK Electronics Workbench Monte Carlo Analysis 8 17 Monte Carlo Analysis 8 17 1 About the Monte Carlo Analysis EJ Monte Carlo analysis is a statistical technique that lets you explore how changing component A properties affects circuit performance Multiple simulations are performed and for each simu lation the component parameters are randomly varied according to the distribution type and parameter tolerances that you set in the screen The first simulation is always performed with nominal values For the rest of the simulations a delta value is randomly added to or subtracted from the nominal value This delta value can be any number within the standard deviation The probability of adding a particular delta value depends on the probability distribution Two probability distributions are available Uniform is a linear distribution that generates delta values uniformly within the tolerance range Any value in the tolerance range is equally likely to be chosen Gaussian distribution is generated with the following probability function po where u the nominal parameter value s the standard deviation value x the in
348. transient analysis is run The settings of this analysis are derived from considering all the concurrent instruments and choosing settings that will satisfy each For example if you have two oscilloscopes with two different time bases reso lutions Multisim uses the time base of the oscilloscope with the smallest time base highest resolution As a result both instruments will sample at a higher resolution than they would individually The results from each instrument are recorded separately in the error log audit trail Electronics Workbench Default Instrument Analysis Settings 6 4 Default Instrument Analysis Settings Multisim lets you set default settings for instruments that are based on a transient analysis such as the oscilloscope spectrum analyzer and logic analyzer To set the default instrument settings 1 Choose Simulate Default Instrument Settings The following screen appears Set initial conditions Zero Default Instrument Settings x User Defined Calculate DC Defaults for Transient Analysis Instruments Miscellaneous Options Operating Point or Automati r Initial conditions cally Determine Initial Condi Automatica tions m Analysis Start time of transient analysis pe Start time TSTART jo s must be greater than or equal End time TSTOP fle 030 s to 0 and less than End time E Set maxinuam timestep IMAN scans End time of transient analysis C Maximum time step TMAX fico s
349. ts Grapher 22 2 0c eee eee ree 8 54 Working with Pages setae ee we ae ir e a eh ee RR fe 8 56 Working with GraphS ooocococccoo ehh 8 57 Grids and Legends 22m Hansen nennen nennen 8 57 CUISOI S cire aene eie red ee ee eh a E Wa RARUS a enden MEC 8 58 Zoom and Restore 0 00 een nn 8 59 Title toed en er nike ba Me dee el eta ns Pe ee eee 8 60 PES A Sah Mr t Ede ME ttt O M e EN St ne ET 8 61 MACS A A a Ri ESE a a ae 8 62 Viewing CORSA hass E bd tex eked A Rs 8 63 Cut Copy and Paste 2 2 2 ects 8 63 Print and Print Preview 0 0 0 000s 8 64 Analysis Options 4 tole e Ree en Hr ae Ri De de ed 8 65 Multisim User Guide xi Chapter 9 Postprocessor About this Chapter o ooooccocco m rm 9 1 Introduction to the Postprocessor l i eh 9 1 Using the Postprocessor lssseseseeeel e m nh 9 2 Basic Steps oll esp ae eh ae week EIAS re Ela d nra eus 9 2 Using the Default Analysis l llee leere 9 4 Creating Multiple Traces 2 2 cece ee 9 6 Working with Pages Graphs and Charts 2 2 000 eese 9 7 Postprocessor Variables 0 0 cece eee ee 9 8 Available FUNCUONS 32 rin 9 8 Chapter 10 HDLs and Programmable Logic About this Chaptef i vat ies ai a a E hh rere 10 1 Overview of HDLs within Multisim llle mme 10 2 About HDLES ai o eed Ed ed d en 10 2 Using Multisim with Programmable Logic 0 0 0 ee
350. ts to MathCAD Exports the results of your simulation to a file format readable by MathCAD For details see Chapter 12 Transfer Communication 2 6 5 7 Transfer Export Simulation Results to Excel Exports the results of your simulation to a file format readable by Excel For details see Chapter 12 Transfer Communication 2 6 5 8 Transfer Export Netlist Exports the netlist of your design Opens a standard file browser where you can choose the file name and folder for the exported netlist 2 6 6 Tools Menu 2 6 6 1 Tools Create Component Invokes the Create Component Wizard which takes you through the steps of creating a com ponent For details see 5 7 Adding Components on page 5 9 2 6 6 2 Tools Edit Component Lets you edit any component in the database For details see 5 4 Editing Components on page 5 5 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 25 eoepeju Jes User Interface User Interface 2 6 6 3 Tools Copy Component Lets you copy any component in the database For details see 5 9 Copying Components on page 5 15 2 6 6 4 Tools Delete Component Lets you delete any component in the corporate library or user level of the database For details see 5 8 Removing Components on page 5 14 2 6 6 5 Tools Database Management Lets you add component families assign button icons to families and for some versions of Multisim enter or modify user field titles for those component families F
351. ts vs Hierarchy llli eh 3 26 3 12 2 Setting up a Circuit for Use as a Subcircuit ooooooooooo 3 27 3 12 3Adding Subcircuits to a Circuit ee 3 27 Printing the Circuit llis RR m 3 28 Placing a BUS ene eer Tm ere hs ER dex mee e Hee at 3 29 Using the Pop up Menu suere eLOb a ee ew peg 3 30 3 15 1 From Circuit Window with no Component Selected 3 30 3 15 2From Circuit Window with Component or Instrument Selected 3 31 3 15 3From Circuit Window with Wire Selected 0 oococcocococooo 3 32 Electronics Workbench Chapter 3 Schematic Capture 3 1 3 2 3 3 About this Chapter This chapter describes all the basic functions involved in creating a circuit in the circuit win dow This chapter explains the fundamental steps in circuit creation but is not intended to describe all the potential aspects of circuit design For example you should look to other chapters for details on the component database instructions on editing components and infor mation on adding instruments Introduction to Schematic Capture Schematic capture is the first stage in developing your circuit In this stage you choose the components you want to use place them on the circuit window in the desired position and ori entation wire them together and otherwise prepare your design Multisim also allows you to modify component properties orient your circuit on a grid add text and a title
352. ts you delete all empty compo nent families in the selected data base m Database user Delete Empty Families Modify User Field Titles Lets you edit the user field titles which appear on the User Field tab of the Component Properties screen for components in the selected dat base r Family Button in Toolbar Lets you select a different toolbar button to be associated with the selected family and symbol set Lets you modify and existing toolbar button Shows the toolbar button associated with the selected component family gt To add a component family to the user or corporate library database 1 In the Database list choose the database in which you want to work 2 Click Add You are prompted to select a family group e g Passive Digital and enter a family name e g Sample 3 Click OK You return to the Database Management screen 4 A default icon of the group is automatically assigned to the new family To change it fol low the procedure below 5 Your new family appears in the associated component family group toolbar For exam ple a new Sample family will appear in the Passive component family toolbar of the library you selected Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JOJIp3 1ueuoduio 5 Component Editor gt To load a component toolbar button 1 With the desired component family selected click Load You will be prompted to navigate to the desired toolbar button file
353. tudents view by using restric tions See 13 4 Using Restrictions on page 13 3 for details Moving a Placed Component You can move a placed component to another location by doing one of the following dragging the component selecting the component and pressing the arrow keys on your keyboard to move it up down or to either side Note A component s icon and labels can be moved independently or together if you plan to move the component be sure the whole component is selected not just its label Labels ul l con Ben HA17333 Note Moving automatically adjust the wiring to an appropriate configuration unless you have disabled the autowire on move option described in 3 6 4 Setting User Prefer ences for Wiring on page 3 13 3 5 4 Copying a Placed Component 3 8 gt Tocopy a placed component 1 Select the desired component and choose Edit Copy or Right click on the desired component and from the pop up menu that appears choose Copy Electronics Workbench Placing Components 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste or Right click anywhere on the circuit window and from the pop up menu that appears choose Paste 3 The cursor shows a ghosted version of the copied component Click at the location where you want the copied component placed Once you have placed the copied component you can click and drag it to the desired location You can also copy a component using
354. uainted with the theory of electronic circuit simulation and the mathematics involved BSpice XSpice Support Multisim incorporates SPICE3F5 and XSpice at the core of its simulation engine with cus tomized enhancements designed by Electronic Workbench specifically for optimizing simula tion performance with digital and mixed mode simulation Both SPICE3F5 and XSpice are industry accepted public domain standards unlike non standard proprietary formats such as PSPICE SPICE3F5 is the most recent version of the SPICE Simulation Program with Inte grated Circuit Emphasis core designed by the University of California at Berkeley SPICE3F5 has evolved from the original program developed and released in 1972 It is com monly called BSpice XSpice is a set of unique enhancements made to SPICE under contract to the US Air Force which included specialized modeling subsystems Multisim User Guide 7 5 uone nuis Simulation Simulation 7 4 2 Circuit Simulation Mechanism After you create a circuit schematic and begin simulation the solution of the circuit and gen eration of the data you see on instruments such as the oscilloscope is the role of the simulator More specifically the simulator is the part of Multisim that calculates a numerical solution to a mathematical representation of the circuit you created For this calculation to occur each component in a circuit is represented by a mathematical model Mathematical models link the
355. ues and Tolerances Multisim uses the nominal values for each component in simulation When you want to observe circuit behavior that is more typical of real world results you can choose to use tolerances instead The components in this case randomly introduce variances to simulate the performance of actual physical components Tolerance settings affect simulation results For example a 1 Kohm resistor with a 1096 variance could vary 100 ohms either way 4 26 Electronics Workbench Component Nominal Values and Tolerances gt To set the tolerances to be used for components 1 Choose Simulate Global Component Tolerances If you have undeclared tolerances you see a screen that allows you to set a percentage to be applied to undeclared tolerances in the circuit for each type of eligible component in the circuit For example Global Component Tolerances lx THO i dui Only those components that exist in the active circuit can have values assigned to them in this screen 2 Enter the desired variances 3 To cancel your changes click Cancel To save them click OK The simulation will now use random values as specified Multisim User Guide Rev 1 4 27 sjueuoduio5 Components Components 4 28 Electronics Workbench Chapter 5 Component Editing 51 About this Chapter iis ey er Re ROC TR oe e ru e SERERE 5 1 5 2 Introduction to Component Editing llllies eese 5 1 5 3 Managing the D
356. uit Hide Instruments parts bin Makes instruments unavailable to be placed on the cir cuit Hides the Instruments Design Bar button and dis ables the Simulate Instruments command for the current circuit Hide In Use list Hides the In Use list from the current circuit 4 Click OK The options you select are immediately invoked in the circuit 5 To have the restrictions apply each time the circuit is opened choose File Save to save the restrictions in the circuit file 13 8 Electronics Workbench Using Restrictions gt To set circuit analyses restrictions 1 From the Circuit restrictions screen click the Analyses tab General Analysis Please select applicable box to enable the analysis lt DC operating point Distortion Analysis Fourier Analysis Monte Carlo Noise Analysis Noise Figure Analysis Parameter Sweep Pole Zero Sensitivity Temperature Sweep Transfer Function Transient Analysis User Defined Analysis Worst Case aq LJ K K SI L IS Password Cancel Help 2 Enable the desired analyses by clicking the appropriate checkboxes for more information on analyses see Chapter 8 Analyses and click OK Only the analyses you check will be enabled on the Simulate Analyses menu or when the student clicks the Simulate Design Bar button 3 To have these analyses apply each time the circuit i
357. uit representation or digital signal This is a useful tool for digital circuit analysis but has no real world counter part It can be attached to a circuit to derive the truth table or Boolean expression the circuit embodies or to produce a circuit from a truth table or Boolean expression XLC1 Logic Converter XLC1 x Inputs O O Q ars Truth table 0 0 Conversions 3j for speci 1 fied inputs i i AB Log Boolean expression Click to change from 0 to 1 or X toggle See details Conversion options in 6 8 3 Entering and Converting a Boolean Expres sion on page 6 14 Click the circles or the label below them to display the inputs for that terminal 6 8 1 Deriving a Truth Table from a Circuit gt To derive a truth table from a circuit schematic 1 Attach the input terminals of the logic converter to up to eight nodes in the circuit 2 Connect the single output of the circuit to the output terminal on the Logic Converter icon 3 Click the Circuit to Truth Table 559 7 IRTE button The truth table for the cir cuit appears in the logic converter s display Multisim User Guide 6 13 Sjueuunyjsu Instruments Instruments 6 8 2 Entering and Converting a Truth Table 6 8 3 6 14 To construct a truth table 1 Click the number of input channels you want from A to H across the top of the logic con verter The display area below the termin
358. uoduio5 Component Editor 5 Click Next Step 5 of the wizard appears only if you indicated in Step 1 that this compo nent requires a simulation model Create Component Wizard Step 5 of 6 Lets you create a model with Multisim s Model Maker Lets you load a model stored in a file Lets you copy data from another model Select a model from the Multisim database or from your own files or create a model using model maker For more information on model maker see 5 11 Creating or Editing a Component Model on page 5 25 For more information on loading a model see 5 11 2 Loading an Existing Model on page 5 28 For more information on copying data from another model see 5 11 1 Copying a Component s Model on page 5 27 Electronics Workbench 6 Click Next Step 6 of the wizard appears If you indicated in Step 1 that this component does not require a layout footprint the wizard will skip this last Step Create Component Wizard Step 6 of 6 x Set Mapping Information Between Symbol and Simulation Model SPICE Model Type Value Pin Mapping T able For each symbol pin enter a corresponding number to connect to its respective nodes in the model The mapping information you enter here will be displayed in the Model tab of the Component Properties screen When you are done click Finish The completed Component Properties screen appears Tosavethe new component click Save To continue e
359. up Multisim User Guide 8 15 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 7 8 7 1 8 16 Reduce the absolute current tolerance if current levels allow Your particular circuit may not require resolutions down to 1 uV or 1 pA You should allow at least an order of magni tude below the lowest expected voltage or current levels of your circuit e Realistically model your circuit Add realistic parasitics especially junction capacitances Use RC snubbers around diodes Replace device models with subcircuits especially for RF and power devices f you have a controlled one shot source in your circuit increase its rise and fall times Change the integration method to Gear Gear integration requires longer simulation time but is generally more stable than the trapezoid method Fourier Analysis About the Fourier Analysis Fourier analysis is a method of analyzing complex periodic waveforms It permits any nonsi nusoidal period function to be resolved into sine or cosine waves possibly an infinite num ber and a DC component This permits further analysis and allows you to determine the effect of combining the waveform with other signals Given the mathematical theorem of a Fourier series the period function f t can be written as follows f t Ag A cos t A cos2 r B sin t B5sin2Of where Ay the DC component of the original wave A cos t B sint the fundamental component has the same frequency and period a
360. utput impedances using other cri teria such as gain or noise criteria e Parts of the Smith Chart are hashed In this case the circuit is potentially unstable meaning it is possible to select passive input or output impedance and still maintain the stability of the circuit An input impedance should fall outside the hashed area of the input stability circle to achieve stability at the input port while an output impedance should be selected outside the output stability circle to achieve stability at the output port Theentire Smith Chart is hashed In this case the circuit is unstable regardless of input or output impedances The designer has a number of options to achieve stability including changing the frequency of operation changing the DC biasing of the transistor changing the transistor itself or changing the entire structure of the amplifier In addition to stability circles there are two numerical values printed on the Match Net Designer screen They are A and K The design is unconditionally stable if IAI lt 1 and K 1 For K 1 for example the circuit is potentially unstable and will most likely oscillate with certain combinations of source or load impedance Unilateral Gain Circles This option is used to analyze the unilateral property of a circuit A transistor is said to be uni lateral when there is no bounce effect meaning the signal reflected from the output port to the input port is zero This
361. values of the second and third harmonics at every point in the circuit If the circuit has two AC frequencies the analysis finds the complex values of the circuit variables at three different frequencies at the sum of the frequencies at the differ ence of the frequencies and at the difference between the lowest and highest frequencies of the second harmonic The analysis carries out a small signal distortion analysis of the circuit A multi dimensional Volterra analysis is carried out using a multi dimensional Taylor series to represent the nonlin earities at the operating point The series expansion uses terms of up to the third order Assumptions Analog circuit small signal Non conforming parts are ignored Distortion models for SPICE components are used Multisim User Guide 8 23 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 9 2 Setting Distortion Analysis Parameters 8 24 Before you perform the analysis review your circuit and decide on one or two sources and one or more nodes for analysis You can also change the magnitude and phase of sources for distortion analysis through the placed component s parameters as described in 3 9 3 Con trolling How a Placed Component is Used in Analyses on page 3 20 Distortion Analysis Parameters are set in the following screen Enter the start frequency AU NE see E for the sweep E Parameters Dutput variables Miscellaneous Options Summary Enter the stop frequency for the Star
362. ve select input and output impedances 1 Select the desired gain should be less than the maximum gain calculated above 2 Choose Gs and GI so that these three conditions are met e Gs GTU Gl lt Gmax e Gs lt Gsmax e Gl Glmax 3 Enter the selected values for Gs and Gl and observe the circles Select points on the circles closest to the center of the Smith Chart These points are shown on the Smith Chart and circles by two triangles The circle for Gl 0 dB always passes through the center There fore the best point of the Gl to produce Gl 0 dB Any point selected on the Smith Chart is a normalized point These points provide the imped ances for the input and output ports that you then design manually Note To ensure these points will not cause instability we recommend you follow the instruc tions in Stability Circles on page 14 21 If the amplifier is unconditionally stable it would be stable for any passive load or source network so you need not check stabil ity circles in this case Impedance Matching Occasionally a design is considered unconditionally stable meaning the amplifier does not oscillate in the presence of any passive load or source impedance In this case you can use the impedance matching option to automatically modify the structure of an RF amplifier to achieve maximum gain impedance To deliver maximum power a circuit must match at both its input and output ports In other words there ne
363. wer of the signal dBm This option stands for 10 log10 V 0 775 Zero dBm is the power dissipated in a 600 Ohm resistor when the voltage across it is 0 775 V This power is equal to 1 mW If the level of a signal is 10 dBm it means that its power is 10 mW When this option is used the signal power is displayed based on the reference of 0 dBm For applications in which the terminating resistor is 600 Ohm such as in telephone lines it is more convenient to read dBm as it is directly proportional to the power dissipation However in dB you need to include the value of the resistor to find the dissipated power in the resistor In dBm the value of the resistor has been accounted for already LIN This option selects a linear display of the signal To change the maximum amplitude displayed on the screen enter a voltage value in the Range field 14 4 1 7 Reference Level The reference level is used to set the range of the input signal that can be displayed on the screen The axes of the spectrum analyzer are not marked by units and values You can read the fre quency and the amplitude of each point displayed on the screen by using the cursor When the cursor is moved and placed on the point of interest the frequency and the amplitude in V dB or dBm are displayed at the right lower part of the analyzer You can observe more than one frequency and evaluate the results for the entire frequency range shown You may want to know when the ampl
364. within the graph ranges maxx maxy xandy maxima within the graph ranges gt To activate the cursors 1 Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it jud 2 Click the Toggle Cursors button To remove the cursors click the button again Or Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it Click the Properties button The Graph Properties screen appears Select the General tab Enable the Cursors On option Select Single Trace to view cursor data for one trace or All Traces to view cursor data for all traces If you select Single Trace and there is more than one trace in your graph use the Trace field to select the one you want V dm cues ID gt To move a cursor click and drag it horizontally 8 25 3 Zoom and Restore gt To zoom in on any part of a graph 1 Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it 2 Click and drag the pointer until the dotted enlargement box covers the region of the graph that you want to zoom in on Analysis Graphs dol x Eie Edit View Help oema Jeca egi e a o Transient Analysis 6 testing DC operating point 88 Transient Analysis test 214 5727m Enlargement box for zooming Multisim User Guide 8 59 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 4 Release the mouse button The axes are scaled and the graph redrawn based on the enlargement box Select a graph by clicking anywhere on it Click the Properties button The Graph Properties screen appears Click an axis tab to zoom
365. xpression to a truth table click the Boolean Expression to Truth Table AB gt rot button To convert a Boolean expression to a circuit click the Boolean Expression to Circuit se Ss button The logic gates that fulfill the Boolean expression appear on the circuit window The compo nents are selected so you can move them to a different location on the circuit window or put them in a subcircuit Deselect the components by clicking on an empty spot on the circuit Electronics Workbench Logic Analyzer gt To see a circuit that fulfills the conditions of the Boolean expression using only NAND gates click the Boolean Expression to NAND LAB gt NANO button 6 9 Logic Analyzer XLA1 Terminals for input signals External clock Trigger qualifier Clock qualifier The logic analyzer displays the levels of up to 16 digital signals in a circuit It is used for fast data acquisition of logic states and advanced timing analysis to help design large systems and carry out troubleshooting Logic Analyzer XLA1 x ocoocobpoocoboobobuob 200m Time s 2900m 3100m 3300m 3 500m 3 700m Stop Reset TI T2 Clock Trigger n Clocksidiv 1 Set E Set io m Ovaiifer Multisim User Guide S USWNJ Su Instruments Instruments 6 9 1 o o The 16 circles on the left side of the icon correspond to the te
366. y entering a value in the Number of harmonics field You can specify the stopping time for sampling to avoid unwanted transient results prior to the cir cuit reaching steady state operation stopping time for sampling by enabling Stopping time for sampling and entering a new stopping time for sampling Although the Nyquist rate specifies only two times the highest frequency component being considered in the analysis as a suitable sampling rate it is rec ommended that you specify a sampling frequency sufficient to obtain a minimum of 10 sampling points per period sampling options by doing one of the following enabling Sampling points per period and entering a value for sampling points per period enabling Sampling points per period and clicking Set Default to choose the default value of 10 enabling Sampling Frequency and entering a value in the appropriate field enabling Sampling Frequency and clicking Set Default to choose the default value Note The sampling frequency should be equal to the frequency under test times the number of harmonics plus one times at least 10 sampling points per period Setting Fourier Analysis Parameters for Advanced Use In addition to the basic procedures you can also specify parameters for the following degree of polynomial for interpolation by enabling Degree of polynomial for interpola tion and entering a value in the appropriate field The higher the degree of polynomial the greater the a
367. y family folders will be deleted from the Family list on the Database Management screen for the selected database 5 4 Editing Components gt To edit an existing component 1 Click the Component editing button on the Design Bar and choose Edit Component from the pop up menu that appears De A or Choose Tools Edit Component 2 The Select Component screen appears Select Component Edit x m Database Name MultiSIM Master H Family Name mas rx Component NE 744L500m zs Manufacturer National ul e Model Level ID Lo 74ALSODA zu Est Help 3 From the Database Name list choose the database level containing the component you want to edit 4 From the Family Name list choose the component family containing the component you want to edit The family s icon appears on the screen 5 From the Component Name list choose the component you want to edit The compo nent s icon appears on the screen Multisim User Guide Rev 1 JO1JIp3 1ueuoduio 5 Component Editor 6 If necessary choose the Manufacturer and Model Level ID of the component you want to edit if more than one manufacturer or model exists 7 To continue click Edit To cancel click Exit The Component Properties screen appears consisting of multiple tabs Component Properties You can click Save from any of the tabs to save the edited component For information on those tab
368. you are prompted to save or cancel them Edit Menu Contains commands for removing duplicating or selecting information If acommand is not applicable to the selected item for example a component it is dimmed 2 6 2 1 Edit Place Component Lets you browse the entire database Multisim master level corporate library level and user level for components to be placed For details see 3 5 1 Choosing a Component and Using the Browser Screen on page 3 4 2 6 2 2 Edit Place Junction Ctrl J Places a connector when you click For details see 3 7 Manually Adding a Junction Con nector on page 3 14 Multisim User Guide Rev 1 2 13 eoepelu Jasn User Interface User Interface 2 6 2 3 Edit Place Bus Ctrl G Places a bus with segments created as you click For details see 3 14 Placing a Bus on page 3 29 2 6 2 4 Edit Place Input Output Ctrl l Adds connecting nodes to a circuit for use as a subcircuit For details see 3 12 2 Setting up a Circuit for Use as a Subcircuit on page 3 27 2 6 2 5 Edit Place Text Ctrl T Lets you place text on the circuit For details see 3 11 4 Adding Miscellaneous Text on page 3 24 2 6 2 6 Edit Undo Ctrl Z Undoes the most recently performed action 2 6 2 7 Edit Redo Ctrl Y Redoes the last undone actions 2 6 2 8 Edit Cut Ctrl X Removes selected components circuits or text What you cut is placed on the Windows clip board so you can
369. z Description Resistance From the Parameter Type list select whether you want to add a device parameter or model parameter These let you set how various internal parameters of a component or model change during the analysis You will find a complete list of model and component instance parameters in the SPICE User s Manual Appendix B Parameters are labelled either input output or output only From the Device Type drop down list select a device type from the devices in the circuit From the Name drop down list select a specific instance of the device type From the Parameter drop down list select a parameter from all available device model parameters A brief description of the selected parameter appears in the Description list Click OK to add the selected parameter to the Variables in Circuit list This variable can now be included in the analysis To save the addition click Accept To cancel the addition click Cancel The parameter appears in the left hand list under the Output Variables tab on the analysis screen which is automatically set to show only device model parameters gt To delete a parameter added in this way select it and click Delete selected variables gt To show the values of all the components and models in the circuit at the end of the simula tion enable Show all output parameters at end of simulation Multisim User Guide 8 5 sos A euy Analyses Analyses 8 3 4
370. zer E ed Rr RR aa AERE volte D ERE 6 15 Multisim User Guide SjueuunJ su Instruments 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 91 Start Stop amp Reset bet bdo bus bx eda LN RIP beds Sih ba ded 6 16 6 92 ClOCK m IT 6 17 6 9 3 Hriggerihng sees gare pe opi emu P Baas Nod T oett a 6 18 Multimeters CC m 6 19 6 10 1 Measurement Options 2 22 22 cece seh 6 19 6 10 1 1 Ammeter 2 no eise V il lance Sti el Mie tt nla 6 20 6 10 1 2 Voltmeter 2 ooo nane UE Ri ey Ba EMO 6 20 6 10 1 3 Ohmmeter isn b bead area seen ee es 6 21 6 103124 Decibels pA ia beaten Be SHE 6 21 6 10 2Signal Mode AC or DO 0 en nenn 6 22 6 10 3Internal Settings lille ees 6 22 Network Analyzer csr ieia o e aa ea aE eh en 6 23 Oscilloscopes 2 wea me aaa eed Den anes A S WEE 6 24 6 12 1 Time Base 0 1 ns Div 1S Div 2 222m sense nennen nennen nn 6 25 6 12 1 1 X Position 5 00 5 00 2 2 2 2nsaneene een ee 6 25 6 12 1 2 Axes Y T A B and B A llle 6 25 6 12 2Grou nding ace e oes net REALI UXOR ed aur IG URS 6 25 6 12 3Channel A and Channel B Settings 0 0000 eee eee ee 6 26 6 12 3 1 Volts per Division 010m V Div 5 kV Div llus 6 26 6 12 3 2 Y Position 3 00 3 00 2 0 0 2 eee eee 6 26 6 12 3 3 Input Coupling AC 0 and DCO nauuna aana 6 26 6 12 A TrIgger ouod eR are pte Ed egeta beds 6 27 6 12 4 1 Trigger Edge 44 copas ob me R

Educator User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents